第四 大双品显示巴利原文
4. Mahāyamakavaggo
1. 小牛角经注显示巴利原文
1. Cūḷagosiṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
325 “如是我闻”等,即《小牛角经》。其中,“住在纳提卡”:纳提卡是依一座湖泊而建的两个村庄,由小父与大父的两个儿子所建,世尊便住在其中一个村庄里。“在砖堂”:指砖砌的住处。据说,一时世尊为摄受大众,游行于跋耆国,到达纳提卡。纳提卡的居民向世尊供养大布施,闻法后心生净信,便商议道:“我们为导师建造住处吧。”于是他们用砖建造殿堂,装饰墙壁、阶梯、柱子,绘制猛兽等图案,涂抹灰泥,完成花鬘与藤蔓等工艺,铺设地面、敷具、床座等,奉献给导师。人们又陆续为比丘僧团建造了夜间住处、日间住处、会堂、经行道等。如此,这处住所变得非常广大,因此称为“在砖堂”。显示巴利原文
325.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷagosiṅgasuttaṃ. Tattha nātike viharatīti nātikā nāma ekaṃ taḷākaṃ nissāya dvinnaṃ cūḷapitimahāpitiputtānaṃ dve gāmā, tesu ekasmiṃ gāme. Giñjakāvasatheti iṭṭhakāmaye āvasathe. Ekasmiṃ kira samaye bhagavā mahājanasaṅgahaṃ karonto vajjiraṭṭhe cārikaṃ caramāno nātikaṃ anuppatto. Nātikavāsino manussā bhagavato mahādānaṃ datvā dhammakathaṃ sutvā pasannahadayā, ‘‘satthu vasanaṭṭhānaṃ karissāmā’’ti mantetvā iṭṭhakāheva bhittisopānatthambhe vāḷarūpādīni dassento pāsādaṃ katvā sudhāya limpitvā mālākammalatākammādīni niṭṭhāpetvā bhummattharaṇamañcapīṭhādīni paññapetvā satthu niyyātesuṃ. Aparāparaṃ panettha manussā bhikkhusaṅghassa rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānamaṇḍapacaṅkamādīni kārayiṃsu. Iti so vihāro mahā ahosi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘giñjakāvasathe’’ti.
“牛角娑罗林园”:那里有一棵最大的树,树干上生出状如牛角的枝干,由此这棵树,整片树林便被称为“牛角娑罗林”。“林园”是森林的泛称。因此,“牛角娑罗林园”即是指牛角娑罗林那片森林。“住”:是指他们享受和合之喜而住。因为这些善男子在《上五十篇》中所述,还是他们为凡夫之时;而此处所说,是已成为漏尽者之时。那时,他们已尝法味,得坚固,证得无碍解,成为漏尽者,和合喜悦而安住其中。这便是此处所说的含义。显示巴利原文
Gosiṅgasālavanadāyeti tattha ekassa jeṭṭhakarukkhassa khandhato gosiṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ hutvā viṭapaṃ uṭṭhahi, taṃ rukkhaṃ upādāya sabbampi taṃ vanaṃ gosiṅgasālavananti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ. Dāyoti avisesena araññassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Tasmā gosiṅgasālavanadāyeti gosiṅgasālavanaaraññeti attho. Viharantīti sāmaggirasaṃ anubhavamānā viharanti. Imesañhi kulaputtānaṃ uparipaṇṇāsake puthujjanakālo kathito, idha khīṇāsavakālo. Tadā hi te laddhassādā laddhapatiṭṭhā adhigatapaṭisambhidā khīṇāsavā hutvā sāmaggirasaṃ anubhavamānā tattha vihariṃsu. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
“来到牛角娑罗林园”指世尊没有召唤法将大目犍连尊者等八十位大弟子,甚至也没有召唤持法藏者阿难尊者,自己持着衣钵,犹如离群之象、离群的黑狮、被风吹散的雨云,独自一人前往。世尊何故在此亲自前往?有三个原因:为策励这三位善男子,为悲愍未来的众生,以及出于对法的尊重。世尊这样想:“我要鼓励这些善男子,称赞他们,款待他们,并为他们说法。”最初的出发正是为了策励。他又想:“未来的善男子们知道:正自觉者亲自去到安住于和合共住的人那里,款待他们、说法、并策励了三位善男子。谁还会不安住于和合共住呢?”当他们如此思惟,便会迅速终结痛苦。这是为了悲愍未来众生而去。再者,诸佛是尊重法的,这种对法的尊重在《车乘经》中已经说明。因此,出于对法的尊重,为彰显法而亲自前往。显示巴利原文
Yena gosiṅgasālavanadāyo tenupasaṅkamīti dhammasenāpatimahāmoggallānattheresu vā asītimahāsāvakesu vā, antamaso dhammabhaṇḍāgārikaānandattherampi kañci anāmantetvā sayameva pattacīvaraṃ ādāya anīkā nissaṭo hatthī viya, yūthā nissaṭo kāḷasīho viya , vātacchinno valāhako viya ekakova upasaṅkami. Kasmā panettha bhagavā sayaṃ agamāsīti? Tayo kulaputtā sāmaggirasaṃ anubhavantā viharanti, tesaṃ paggaṇhanato, pacchimajanataṃ anukampanato dhammagarubhāvato ca. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘ahaṃ ime kulaputte paggaṇhitvā ukkaṃsitvā paṭisanthāraṃ katvā dhammaṃ nesaṃ desessāmī’’ti. Evaṃ tāva paggaṇhanato agamāsi. Aparampissa ahosi – ‘‘anāgate kulaputtā sammāsambuddho samaggavāsaṃ vasantānaṃ santikaṃ sayaṃ gantvā paṭisanthāraṃ katvā dhammaṃ kathetvā tayo kulaputte paggaṇhi, ko nāma samaggavāsaṃ na vaseyyāti samaggavāsaṃ vasitabbaṃ maññamānā khippameva dukkhassantaṃ karissantī’’ti. Evaṃ pacchimajanataṃ anukampanatopi agamāsi. Buddhā ca nāma dhammagaruno honti, so ca nesaṃ dhammagarubhāvo rathavinīte āvikatova. Iti imasmā dhammagarubhāvatopi dhammaṃ paggaṇhissāmīti agamāsi.
“守林人”即林园守护者。他为了让人们不能随意进入林中各处,拿走花、果、树脂或木料等,便给那围有篱笆的森林安上大门,坐在门口守护保护整片森林,因此称为“守林人”。“自利之形”是指他们以希求自身利益的方式而安住。如果有人于佛陀的教法中出家后,去从事医生、信使、跑腿等事,靠二十一种邪命过活,这不称为自利者。如果有人于教法中出家后,舍弃二十一种邪命,安立在四遍净戒上,学习佛语,决意修行相应的头陀支,于三十八种所缘中择取合意的业处,离开村落,进入森林,成就等至,致力于观修而住,这便称为自利者。那三位善男子正是如此,所以说“以自利之形而住”。显示巴利原文
Dāyapāloti araññapālo. So taṃ araññaṃ yathā icchiticchitappadesena manussā pavisitvā tattha pupphaṃ vā phalaṃ vā niyyāsaṃ vā dabbasambhāraṃ vā na haranti, evaṃ vatiyā parikkhittassa tassa araññassa yojite dvāre nisīditvā taṃ araññaṃ rakkhati, pāleti. Tasmā ‘‘dāyapālo’’ti vutto. Attakāmarūpāti attano hitaṃ kāmayamānasabhāvā hutvā viharanti. Yo hi imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajitvāpi vejjakammadūtakammapahiṇagamanādīnaṃ vasena ekavīsatianesanāhi jīvikaṃ kappeti, ayaṃ na attakāmarūpo nāma. Yo pana imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajitvā ekavīsatianesanaṃ pahāya catupārisuddhisīle patiṭṭhāya buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhitvā sappāyadhutaṅgaṃ adhiṭṭhāya aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu cittaruciyaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā gāmantaṃ pahāya araññaṃ pavisitvā samāpattiyo nibbattetvā vipassanāya kammaṃ kurumāno viharati, ayaṃ attakāmo nāma. Tepi tayo kulaputtā evarūpā ahesuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘attakāmarūpā viharantī’’ti.
“不要打扰他们”意思是“不要令他们不安”,他这样劝阻世尊。他心里想:“这些善男子和合而住,而有些人无论到哪里都会引起争吵、口角、斗争,像尖角凶牛一样到处冲撞,有时两人甚至无法共走一条路。也许此人也会这样行事,破坏这些善男子的和合共住。再者,此人相貌庄严,金色肌肤,似乎贪著上妙的味,从来到这里开始,可能会赞叹殊胜施主和自己侍者的功德等,从而扰乱这些善男子的不放逸住。还有,这些善男子的住处是固定的,各有分界:三间茅舍、三条经行道、三个日间住处、三张床座。而这位沙门身材高大,可能年长,他会在不合适的时间让这些善男子从住处迁离。这样一来,无论如何都会给他们带来不安。”他不希望如此,所以劝阻世尊:“不要打扰他们!”显示巴利原文
Mā tesaṃ aphāsumakāsīti tesaṃ mā aphāsukaṃ akāsīti bhagavantaṃ vāresi. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘ime kulaputtā samaggā viharanti, ekaccassa ca gataṭṭhāne bhaṇḍanakalahavivādā vattanti, tikhiṇasiṅgo caṇḍagoṇo viya ovijjhanto vicarati, athekamaggena dvinnaṃ gamanaṃ na hoti, kadāci ayampi evaṃ karonto imesaṃ kulaputtānaṃ samaggavāsaṃ bhindeyya. Pāsādiko ca panesa suvaṇṇavaṇṇo surasagiddho maññe, gatakālato paṭṭhāya paṇītadāyakānaṃ attano upaṭṭhākānañca vaṇṇakathanādīhi imesaṃ kulaputtānaṃ appamādavihāraṃ bhindeyya. Vasanaṭṭhānāni cāpi etesaṃ kulaputtānaṃ nibaddhāni paricchinnāni tisso ca paṇṇasālā tayo caṅkamā tīṇi divāṭṭhānāni tīṇi mañcapīṭhāni. Ayaṃ pana samaṇo mahākāyo vuḍḍhataro maññe bhavissati. So akāle ime kulaputte senāsanā vuṭṭhāpessati. Evaṃ sabbathāpi etesaṃ aphāsu bhavissatī’’ti. Taṃ anicchanto, ‘‘mā tesaṃ aphāsukamakāsī’’ti bhagavantaṃ vāresi.
那么,他是知道而阻拦,还是不知道呢?是不知道。因为,虽然从如来入胎那一刻起,就有震动一万个世界等神变显现,但那些住在森林里的人根性羸弱,专注着自己的事,没能注意到这些。而所谓正自觉者,当他由数千比丘随行,展现一寻光明、八十随形好和三十二大人相的庄严与佛陀威德而游行时,那时无须问“这是谁”便可知道。但在那时,世尊将这一切佛陀威德都隐藏于衣内,如同满月被云层遮蔽,亲自持着钵与衣,以无人认得的形态到来。因此,守林人不知道他是谁,便阻拦了他。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ panesa jānanto vāresi, ajānantoti? Ajānanto. Kiñcāpi hi tathāgatassa paṭisandhiggahaṇato paṭṭhāya dasasahassacakkavāḷakampanādīni pāṭihāriyāni pavattiṃsu, araññavāsino pana dubbalamanussā sakammappasutā tāni sallakkhetuṃ na sakkonti. Sammāsambuddho ca nāma yadā anekabhikkhusahassaparivāro byāmappabhāya asītianubyañjanehi dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇasiriyā ca buddhānubhāvaṃ dassento vicarati, tadā ko esoti apucchitvāva jānitabbo hoti. Tadā pana bhagavā sabbampi taṃ buddhānubhāvaṃ cīvaragabbhena paṭicchādetvā valāhakagabbhena paṭicchanno puṇṇacando viya sayameva pattacīvaramādāya aññātakavesena agamāsi. Iti naṃ ajānantova dāyapālo nivāresi.
“他说”:据说,长老听到守林人说“喂,沙门!”后,心想:“我们三人住在这里,并没有其他出家人,可这守林人却像是在与出家人说话一般,会是谁呢?”于是他从日间住处起身,站在门口望向路上,便看见了世尊。就在长老看见世尊的同时,世尊放出身上的光明,以八十随形好庄严,一寻光明犹如展开的金色布匹般辉耀。长老心想:“这守林人就像伸手去抓颈部膨起的毒蛇,与世间最尊贵的人说话却浑然不觉,还以为只是和某位比丘交谈。”为了制止他,便说:“喂,守林人,别这样!”等等。显示巴利原文
Etadavocāti thero kira mā samaṇāti dāyapālassa kathaṃ sutvāva cintesi – ‘‘mayaṃ tayo janā idha viharāma, aññe pabbajitā nāma natthi, ayañca dāyapālo pabbajitena viya saddhiṃ katheti, ko nu kho bhavissatī’’ti divāṭṭhānato vuṭṭhāya dvāre ṭhatvā maggaṃ olokento bhagavantaṃ addasa. Bhagavāpi therassa saha dassaneneva sarīrobhāsaṃ muñci, asītianubyañjanavirājitā byāmappabhā pasāritasuvaṇṇapaṭo viya virocittha. Thero, ‘‘ayaṃ dāyapālo phaṇakataṃ āsivisaṃ gīvāya gahetuṃ hatthaṃ pasārento viya loke aggapuggalena saddhiṃ kathentova na jānāti, aññatarabhikkhunā viya saddhiṃ kathetī’’ti nivārento etaṃ, ‘‘mā, āvuso dāyapālā’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.
“他前往”:为什么他没有向世尊起迎便直接前往?据说他这样想:“我们三人过着和合共住的生活,如果我独自一人起迎,那便不再称得上和合共住了。”因此他打算带上亲爱的好友一同前去迎接。正如世尊是我所亲爱的,我的同伴们也是我所亲爱的。所以他想与他们一同起迎,没有独自起迎便前往了。不过,有些长老的茅舍门口和经行处末端正好就在世尊前来的路上,所以长老走过去,等于是给他们一个提醒。“请来”:“请从这边过来。”“洗足”:他用如同绽放莲花、有网纹相的手,取来犹如宝石的水,浇在世尊金色的脚背上,搓洗双足。其实诸佛的身体原本不染尘垢,为何还要洗足?为了给身体降温,也为了让那些比丘心生欢喜。比丘们心想“用我们所供奉的水,世尊洗了足,作了受用”,便会因强烈的喜悦而心意满足。因此他为世尊洗了足。“世尊对尊者阿那律这样说”:据说阿那律是他们之中年纪较长的一位。显示巴利原文
Tenupasaṅkamīti kasmā bhagavato paccuggamanaṃ akatvā upasaṅkami? Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘mayaṃ tayo janā samaggavāsaṃ vasāma, sacāhaṃ ekakova paccuggamanaṃ karissāmi, samaggavāso nāma na bhavissatī’’ti piyamitte gahetvāva paccuggamanaṃ karissāmi. Yathā ca bhagavā mayhaṃ piyo, evaṃ sahāyānampi me piyoti, tehi saddhiṃ paccuggamanaṃ kātukāmo sayaṃ akatvāva upasaṅkami. Keci pana tesaṃ therānaṃ paṇṇasāladvāre caṅkamanakoṭiyā bhagavato āgamanamaggo hoti, tasmā thero tesaṃ saññaṃ dadamānova gatoti. Abhikkamathāti ito āgacchatha. Pāde pakkhālesīti vikasitapadumasannibhehi jālahatthehi maṇivaṇṇaṃ udakaṃ gahetvā suvaṇṇavaṇṇesu piṭṭhipādesu udakamabhisiñcitvā pādena pādaṃ ghaṃsanto pakkhālesi. Buddhānaṃ kāye rajojallaṃ nāma na upalimpati, kasmā pakkhālesīti? Sarīrassa utuggahaṇatthaṃ, tesañca cittasampahaṃsanatthaṃ. Amhehi abhihaṭena udakena bhagavā pāde pakkhālesi, paribhogaṃ akāsīti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ balavasomanassavasena cittaṃ pīṇitaṃ hoti, tasmā pakkhālesi. Āyasmantaṃ anuruddhaṃ bhagavā etadavocāti so kira tesaṃ vuḍḍhataro.
326 当对那位(阿那律)表达了关怀时,对其余两人的关怀便也自然完成,因此世尊便向长老说:“阿那律!你们是否……”等语。其中,“是否(kacci)”是一个表示询问的不变词。“你们(vo)”是所有格。整句意为:“阿那律!你们是否堪忍?威仪是否安适?生活是否还可维持?生命是否还能延续、支撑下去?是否不因团食而感到疲惫?团食是否容易获得?人们见到你们前来,是否会想到应当布施一瓢粥或一匙食?”这是在询问乞食的行仪。为何如此询问?因为只有在资具上无疲累,才能修行沙门法;而这本身也是出家人应尽的行仪。阿那律回答后,世尊为了询问和合的意味,便说:“阿那律!你们是王族出家者,有大福德。对于住在森林中的你们,人们若不加布施,还会布施给谁呢?然而,你们受用这些之后,究竟是像小鹿般互相牴触而住,还是彼此和合无诤呢?”于是便说出:“阿那律!你们是否和合……”等语。显示巴利原文
326. Tassa saṅgahe kate sesānaṃ katova hotīti theraññeva etaṃ kacci vo anuruddhātiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tattha kaccīti pucchanatthe nipāto. Voti sāmivacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kacci anuruddhā tumhākaṃ khamanīyaṃ, iriyāpatho vo khamati? Kacci yāpanīyaṃ, kacci vo jīvitaṃ yāpeti ghaṭiyati? Kacci piṇḍakena na kilamatha, kacci tumhākaṃ sulabhapiṇḍaṃ, sampatte vo disvā manussā uḷuṅkayāguṃ vā kaṭacchubhikkhaṃ vā dātabbaṃ maññantīti bhikkhācāravattaṃ pucchati. Kasmā? Paccayena akilamantena hi sakkā samaṇadhammo kātuṃ, vattameva vā etaṃ pabbajitānaṃ. Atha tena paṭivacane dinne, ‘‘anuruddhā, tumhe rājapabbajitā mahāpuññā, manussā tumhākaṃ araññe vasantānaṃ adatvā kassa aññassa dātabbaṃ maññissanti, tumhe pana etaṃ bhuñjitvā kiṃ nu kho migapotakā viya aññamaññaṃ saṅghaṭṭentā viharatha, udāhu sāmaggibhāvo vo atthī’’ti sāmaggirasaṃ pucchanto, kacci pana vo, anuruddhā, samaggātiādimāha.
其中,“乳水相融(khīrodakībhūtā)”意为:如同乳与水互相交融,不再分离,仿佛成为一体。世尊以此询问:“你们是否依于和合之力,心念一致而安住?”“以慈爱之眼(piyacakkhūhi)”是指:先令慈心生起,再以此眼目去看,便称为慈爱之眼。所问是:“你们是否以这样的眼睛彼此对视而安住?”“确然(tagghā)”是一个表示肯定、决然的不变词,意为:“尊者!我们确是如此。”“你们是如何……(yathā kathaṃ panā)”中,“yathā”仅为不变化词,“kathaṃ”是询问方式。全句意为:“那么,你们是如何如此安住的?依于何因何缘能致如此?请告知那个原因。”“慈身业(mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ)”是指以慈心为因而生起的身业。“于明处与于暗处(āvi ceva raho ca)”即当面与背后。对于语业、意业,亦同此理。显示巴利原文
Tattha khīrodakībhūtāti yathā khīrañca udakañca aññamaññaṃ saṃsandati, visuṃ na hoti, ekattaṃ viya upeti, kacci evaṃ sāmaggivasena ekattūpagatacittuppādā viharathāti pucchati. Piyacakkhūhīti mettacittaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā olokanacakkhūni piyacakkhūni nāma. Kacci tathārūpehi cakkhūhi aññamaññaṃ sampassantā viharathāti pucchati. Tagghāti ekaṃsatthe nipāto. Ekaṃsena mayaṃ, bhanteti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathā kathaṃ panāti ettha yathāti nipātamattaṃ. Kathanti kāraṇapucchā. Kathaṃ pana tumhe evaṃ viharatha, kena kāraṇena viharatha, taṃ me kāraṇaṃ brūthāti vuttaṃ hoti. Mettaṃ kāyakammanti mettacittavasena pavattaṃ kāyakammaṃ. Āvi ceva raho cāti sammukhā ceva parammukhā ca. Itaresupi eseva nayo.
其中,当面的身业和语业在共住时可得知,其余的身业和语业则在分开时可得知。意业则于一切处可得知。共住之时,若见床、椅、木器或陶器等被随意放在外面,见后不生轻视之想:“这是谁所用?”而是视同自己放置不当一般将其收好,或将应整理之处予以整理──这便是当面的慈身业。当有人外出时,另一人将该比丘随意放置的坐卧具等资具如法放好,或整理应整理之处──这便是背后的慈身业。与共住者一起进行温和悦意的交谈、款待之语、令人忆念之语、法语、诵经、讨论、提问、解答等──如此即是当面的慈语业。而当长老们不在时,称扬其功德:“我亲爱的同伴难提长老、金毗罗长老,具足如是戒、具足如是行仪……”──如此即是背后的慈语业。内心则作意:“愿我亲爱的朋友难提长老、金毗罗长老无怨敌、无恼害、得安乐”──如此无论当面还是背后,皆是慈意业。显示巴利原文
Tattha sammukhā kāyavacīkammāni sahavāse labbhanti, itarāni vippavāse. Manokammaṃ sabbattha labbhati. Yañhi sahavasantesu ekena mañcapīṭhaṃ vā dārubhaṇḍaṃ vā mattikābhaṇḍaṃ vā bahi dunnikkhittaṃ hoti, taṃ disvā kenidaṃ vaḷañjitanti avaññaṃ akatvā attanā dunnikkhittaṃ viya gahetvā paṭisāmentassa paṭijaggitabbayuttaṃ vā pana ṭhānaṃ paṭijaggantassa sammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma hoti. Ekasmiṃ pakkante tena dunnikkhittaṃ senāsanaparikkhāraṃ tatheva nikkhipantassa paṭijaggitabbayuttaṭṭhānaṃ vā pana paṭijaggantassa parammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma hoti. Sahavasantassa pana tehi saddhiṃ madhuraṃ sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ paṭisanthārakathaṃ sāraṇīyakathaṃ dhammīkathaṃ sarabhaññaṃ sākacchaṃ pañhapucchanaṃ pañhavissajjananti evamādikaraṇe sammukhā mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma hoti. Theresu pana pakkantesu mayhaṃ piyasahāyo nandiyatthero kimilatthero evaṃ sīlasampanno, evaṃ ācārasampannotiādiguṇakathanaṃ parammukhā mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma hoti. Mayhaṃ piyamitto nandiyatthero kimilatthero avero hotu, abyāpajjo sukhī hotūti evaṃ samannāharato pana sammukhāpi parammukhāpi mettaṃ manokammaṃ hotiyeva.
“尊者!我们的身体各不相同”:因为身体如同面粉或泥土,不可能将它们揉压成一体。“不过我想,我们的心却是一体”:这是表示在利益、无间、无碍、和合这些意义上,心确实是同一的。那么,如何放下自心而随顺他人的心呢?比如:一位比丘的钵沾了污垢,一位比丘的衣服脏了,一位比丘有其他杂务。其中,钵有污垢的比丘说:“贤友!我的钵沾了污垢,该烧煮了。”这时,其他人不会说“我的衣服脏了要洗”或“我有杂务要办”,而是去林中捡拾柴火,劈开,为钵作烧煮处理,完成此杂务后,再去洗衣或做别的事。即便先前有人说:“贤友!我的衣服脏了该洗了”或“我的叶屋杂乱该整理了”,也都会如此去做。显示巴利原文
Nānā hi kho no, bhante, kāyāti kāyañhi piṭṭhaṃ viya mattikā viya ca omadditvā ekato kātuṃ na sakkā. Ekañca pana maññe cittanti cittaṃ pana no hitaṭṭhena nirantaraṭṭhena aviggahaṭṭhena samaggaṭṭhena ekamevāti dasseti. Kathaṃ panetaṃ sakaṃ cittaṃ nikkhipitvā itaresaṃ cittavasena vattiṃsūti? Ekassa patte malaṃ uṭṭhahati, ekassa cīvaraṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ hoti, ekassa paribhaṇḍakammaṃ hoti. Tattha yassa patte malaṃ uṭṭhitaṃ, tena mamāvuso, patte malaṃ uṭṭhitaṃ pacituṃ vaṭṭatīti vutte itare mayhaṃ cīvaraṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ dhovitabbaṃ, mayhaṃ paribhaṇḍaṃ kātabbanti avatvā araññaṃ pavisitvā dārūni āharitvā chinditvā pattakaṭāhe paribhaṇḍaṃ katvā tato paraṃ cīvaraṃ vā dhovanti, paribhaṇḍaṃ vā karonti. Mamāvuso, cīvaraṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ dhovituṃ vaṭṭati, mama paṇṇasālā uklāpā paribhaṇḍaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti paṭhamataraṃ ārocitepi eseva nayo.
327 “善哉!善哉!阿那律们!”——对于他们先前所说“尊者!我们不因团食而疲惫”这句话,世尊并未给予善哉。为什么呢?因为这种名为抟食的食物,无论是在恶趣还是人天世间,对众生而言都极为寻常。然而,世间的共住大多陷入诤论;无论是在恶趣还是人天世间,这些众生本就彼此对立,和合极为稀有,只是偶尔出现。正因为和合共住极其难得,世尊才在此处给予善哉。接着,为了询问他们不放逸的征相,世尊说道:“阿那律们!你们是否……”等语。其中,“你们”一词是不变化词,也可作为主格,意为你们;“在我们之间”是指“在我们三人之中”。“从乞食返回的人”即指在村中乞食后回来的人。“残余容器”是指为了盛放多余的团食并加以存放,而将一只带盖的容器洗净,放在那里。显示巴利原文
327.Sādhusādhu, anuruddhāti bhagavā heṭṭhā na ca mayaṃ, bhante, piṇḍakena kilamimhāti vutte na sādhukāramadāsi. Kasmā? Ayañhi kabaḷīkāro āhāro nāma imesaṃ sattānaṃ apāyalokepi devamanussalokepi āciṇṇasamāciṇṇova. Ayaṃ pana lokasannivāso yebhuyyena vivādapakkhando, apāyaloke devamanussalokepi ime sattā paṭiviruddhā eva, etesaṃ sāmaggikālo dullabho, kadācideva hotīti samaggavāsassa dullabhattā idha bhagavā sādhukāramadāsi. Idāni tesaṃ appamādalakkhaṇaṃ pucchanto kaccipana vo, anuruddhātiādimāha. Tattha voti nipātamattaṃ paccattavacanaṃ vā, kacci tumheti attho. Amhākanti amhesu tīsu janesu. Piṇḍāya paṭikkamatīti gāme piṇḍāya caritvā paccāgacchati. Avakkārapātinti atirekapiṇḍapātaṃ apanetvā ṭhapanatthāya ekaṃ samuggapātiṃ dhovitvā ṭhapeti.
“后至者”:据说这些长老并不是一同入村乞食,因为他们乐于果等至。清晨,他们打理好身体,完成应尽的义务,便进入住所,限定好时间,然后入果等至而坐。他们中,最先坐下入定的人,会根据自己设定的时间率先出定。他乞食归来后,来到用斋处,知道:“两位比丘尚在后面,我先到了。”于是盖好钵,铺好座位等。如果钵中刚好有适量的食物,便坐下受用;若有多余,则放入残余容器中,盖好容器,然后进食。用斋完毕,洗净钵,擦干,装入钵袋,携钵与衣,返回住处。第二位到达的比丘也知道:“一位先到,一位尚在后面。”若自己钵里的食物恰好适量,便直接受用;若不足,则从残余容器中取来补足后再吃;若有多余,则将多余部分放入残余容器,只食用适量之份,然后如前一位长老那样返回住处。第三位比丘回来时也知道:“两位先到了,我最后。”他也像第二位长老那样食用。用斋完毕,洗净钵,擦干,收入钵袋,收拾座位,整理妥当;将饮用水瓶或洗用水瓶中的余水倒掉,瓶口朝下放置;若残余容器中尚有剩余食物,便依前述方式处理掉,并把容器洗净。显示巴利原文
Yo pacchāti te kira therā na ekatova bhikkhācāraṃ pavisanti, phalasamāpattiratā hete. Pātova sarīrappaṭijagganaṃ katvā vattappaṭipattiṃ pūretvā senāsanaṃ pavisitvā kālaparicchedaṃ katvā phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā nisīdanti. Tesu yo paṭhamataraṃ nisinno attano kālaparicchedavasena paṭhamataraṃ uṭṭhāti; so piṇḍāya caritvā paṭinivatto bhattakiccaṭṭhānaṃ āgantvā jānāti – ‘‘dve bhikkhū pacchā, ahaṃ paṭhamataraṃ āgato’’ti. Atha pattaṃ pidahitvā āsanapaññāpanādīni katvā yadi patte paṭivisamattameva hoti, nisīditvā bhuñjati. Yadi atirekaṃ hoti, avakkārapātiyaṃ pakkhipitvā pātiṃ pidhāya bhuñjati. Katabhattakicco pattaṃ dhovitvā vodakaṃ katvā thavikāya osāpetvā pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pavisati. Dutiyopi āgantvāva jānāti – ‘‘eko paṭhamaṃ āgato, eko pacchato’’ti. So sace patte bhattaṃ pamāṇameva hoti, bhuñjati. Sace mandaṃ, avakkārapātito gahetvā bhuñjati. Sace atirekaṃ hoti, avakkārapātiyaṃ pakkhipitvā pamāṇameva bhuñjitvā purimatthero viya vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pavisati. Tatiyopi āgantvāva jānāti – ‘‘dve paṭhamaṃ āgatā, ahaṃ pacchato’’ti. Sopi dutiyatthero viya bhuñjitvā katabhattakicco pattaṃ dhovitvā vodakaṃ katvā thavikāya osāpetvā āsanāni ukkhipitvā paṭisāmeti; pānīyaghaṭe vā paribhojanīyaghaṭe vā avasesaṃ udakaṃ chaḍḍetvā ghaṭe nikujjitvā avakkārapātiyaṃ sace avasesabhattaṃ hoti, taṃ vuttanayena jahitvā pātiṃ dhovitvā paṭisāmeti; bhattaggaṃ sammajjati. Tato kacavaraṃ chaḍḍetvā sammajjaniṃ ukkhipitvā upacikāhi muttaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā pattacīvaramādāya vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pavisati. Idaṃ therānaṃ bahivihāre araññe bhattakiccakaraṇaṭṭhāne bhojanasālāyaṃ vattaṃ. Idaṃ sandhāya, ‘‘yo pacchā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
而“看见者”等,应理解为他们在寺院内的做法。其中,“净瓶”指洗濯用的水罐。“空”指已经空无所有。“空无”是它的同义词。“不能独举者”意指无法一个人抬起,极为沉重。“以手势”指用手势示意。据说,他们从饮水瓶等容器中取任何一个空瓶,前往池塘,将瓶子内外洗净,过滤水后,放在岸边,然后用手势招呼另一位比丘,不特地称名呼唤,也不泛泛出声。何以不称名呼唤?因恐声音打扰那位比丘。何以不泛泛出声?因若泛泛出声,两人可能同时出来,争说‘我先!我先!’,从而中断第三位比丘应当行持之事。然而,他们会控制脚步声,走到另一位比丘日间居处的附近,知道对方看见自己后,便打手势;那位比丘看懂手势后过来,于是两人手拉手,将物品置于两人手上一起抬起。正是针对此情景才说:‘以手势招呼另一位,手拉手地一起安放。’显示巴利原文
Yo passatītiādi pana nesaṃ antovihāre vattanti veditabbaṃ. Tattha vaccaghaṭanti ācamanakumbhiṃ. Rittanti rittakaṃ. Tucchanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Avisayhanti ukkhipituṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ, atibhāriyaṃ. Hatthavikārenāti hatthasaññāya. Te kira pānīyaghaṭādīsu yaṃkiñci tucchakaṃ gahetvā pokkharaṇiṃ gantvā anto ca bahi ca dhovitvā udakaṃ parissāvetvā tīre ṭhapetvā aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ hatthavikārena āmantenti, odissa vā anodissa vā saddaṃ na karonti. Kasmā odissa saddaṃ na karonti? Taṃ bhikkhuṃ saddo bādheyyāti. Kasmā anodissa saddaṃ na karonti? Anodissa sadde dinne, ‘‘ahaṃ pure, ahaṃ pure’’ti dvepi nikkhameyyuṃ, tato dvīhi kattabbakamme tatiyassa kammacchedo bhaveyya. Saṃyatapadasaddo pana hutvā aparassa bhikkhuno divāṭṭhānasantikaṃ gantvā tena diṭṭhabhāvaṃ ñatvā hatthasaññaṃ karoti, tāya saññāya itaro āgacchati, tato dve janā hatthena hatthaṃ saṃsibbantā dvīsu hatthesu ṭhapetvā upaṭṭhapenti. Taṃ sandhāyāha – ‘‘hatthavikārena dutiyaṃ āmantetvā hatthavilaṅghakena upaṭṭhapemā’’ti.
“复次,每五日”等。首先,十四日、十五日、八日这些日子是常规的闻法时间。他们在护持此闻法无有间断后,每逢第五日,两位长老在尚早之时沐浴,便前往阿那律长老的住处。在那里,三人一同坐下,就三藏中的某一部互相提问、互相解答;他们这样研讨交流,不觉间天就亮了。正是就此情况而说了这句话。至此,被世尊问及不放逸之相的长老,恰恰正是在有放逸可能之处,解答了什么是'不放逸之相'。何以故?因为其他比丘有这些事情:入村乞食时、出村时、更换下裙、披上上衣、在村中乞食、说法、回向、出村后办理饮食之事、洗钵、收纳钵袋、收拾钵与衣……等等这些容易令人心思散乱的事务。因此,长老为了表明:‘除了这些该做之事外,我们并没有所谓放逸的时间’,所以恰好就在那些可能出现放逸的地方,解释了'不放逸之相'。显示巴利原文
Pañcāhikaṃ kho panāti cātuddase pannarase aṭṭhamiyanti idaṃ tāva pakatidhammassavanameva, taṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvā pañcame pañcame divase dve therā nātivikāle nhāyitvā anuruddhattherassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gacchanti. Tattha tayopi nisīditvā tiṇṇaṃ piṭakānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ aññamaññaṃ pañhaṃ pucchanti , aññamaññaṃ vissajjenti, tesaṃ evaṃ karontānaṃyeva aruṇaṃ uggacchati. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Ettāvatā therena bhagavatā appamādalakkhaṇaṃ pucchitena pamādaṭṭhānesuyeva appamādalakkhaṇaṃ vissajjitaṃ hoti. Aññesañhi bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhācāraṃ pavisanakālo, nikkhamanakālo, nivāsanaparivattanaṃ, cīvarapārupanaṃ, antogāme piṇḍāya caraṇaṃ dhammakathanaṃ, anumodanaṃ , gāmato nikkhamitvā bhattakiccakaraṇaṃ, pattadhovanaṃ, pattaosāpanaṃ, pattacīvarapaṭisāmananti papañcakaraṇaṭṭhānāni etāni. Tasmā thero amhākaṃ ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ muñcitvā pamādakālo nāma natthīti dassento pamādaṭṭhānesuyeva appamādalakkhaṇaṃ vissajjesi.
328 于是,世尊给予他称赞后,为询问初禅,又说:“那么,还有超胜于此的吗?”等语。其中,“超出凡夫法”意指超越凡夫之法。“堪称圣者的智见殊胜”是指能成就圣者素质的智之殊胜。“尊者!我等何故不得”意思是:‘尊者!为何不能被证得呢?实已被证得啊!’“乃至天众”意思是‘乃至如是’。显示巴利原文
328. Athassa bhagavā sādhukāraṃ datvā paṭhamajjhānaṃ pucchanto puna atthi pana votiādimāha. Tattha uttari manussadhammāti manussadhammato uttari. Alamariyañāṇadassanavisesoti ariyabhāvakaraṇasamattho ñāṇaviseso. Kiñhi no siyā, bhanteti kasmā, bhante, nādhigato bhavissati, adhigatoyevāti. Yāva devāti yāva eva.
329 如此,当阿那律尊者回答证得初禅后,世尊为询问第二禅等,又说道:“那么,由这个……”等等。其中,“为超越”(samatikkamāya)是指为了超越(初禅等)。“为止息”(paṭippassaddhiyā)是指为了止息。其余一切,皆应如前述方式理解。然而,在最后一个问题中,世尊为询问依出世间智见而证得的灭尽定,才说:“足以成为圣者智见的殊胜。”长老也依所问而作了回答。在这里,由于不感受任何感受之乐比有感受之乐更为寂静、更为殊胜,因此他说:“我们不见有其他更超越或更殊胜的安乐住了。”显示巴利原文
329. Evaṃ paṭhamajjhānādhigame byākate dutiyajjhānādīni pucchanto etassa pana votiādimāha. Tattha samatikkamāyāti samatikkamatthāya. Paṭippassaddhiyāti paṭippassaddhatthāya. Sesaṃ sabbattha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Pacchimapañhe pana lokuttarañāṇadassanavasena adhigataṃ nirodhasamāpattiṃ pucchanto alamariyañāṇadassanavisesoti āha. Theropi pucchānurūpeneva byākāsi. Tattha yasmā vedayitasukhato avedayitasukhaṃ santataraṃ paṇītataraṃ hoti, tasmā aññaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ uttaritaraṃ vā paṇītataraṃ vā na samanupassāmāti āha.
330 “以法语”是指:以和合利益、与法相应的言说。他们所有人于四圣谛皆已究竟完成,因此不必再为他们说任何为求证悟之法。然而,世尊只是就“和合有此利益、有彼利益”来对他们开示和合的利益。“追随世尊”即跟随而去。据说,他们接过世尊的钵与衣,走了一小段路,当世尊到达精舍院墙的边界时,说:“把钵和衣拿来给我,你们就留在这里。”便离开了。“从那里返回”就是从他们当时站立之处又折返回来。“我们这些尊者……”:他们虽依止世尊证得出家等功德,但一谈到自身功德便感到厌苦,出于少求证悟之心,故而那样说。“于这些与这些”:指对于初禅等世间与出世间的等至。“以心了知心后得知”:即“今日这些尊者住于世间等至,今日住于出世间等至”,像这样以心辨别心而了知。“诸天也对我说”:意思是“阿那律尊者,今日难提耶长老住于这些至,今日金毗罗长老住于这些至”,诸天如此来通知我。“以被提问”:这是说,或是凭我自己了知,或是通过诸天告知,我仅仅是以这些事打开话题,并非不待发问而主动说起。然而,当世尊反过……显示巴利原文
330.Dhammiyā kathāyāti sāmaggirasānisaṃsappaṭisaṃyuttāya dhammiyā kathāya. Sabbepi te catūsu saccesu pariniṭṭhitakiccā, tena tesaṃ paṭivedhatthāya kiñci kathetabbaṃ natthi. Sāmaggirasena pana ayañca ayañca ānisaṃsoti sāmaggirasānisaṃsameva nesaṃ bhagavā kathesi. Bhagavantaṃ anusaṃyāyitvāti anugantvā. Te kira bhagavato pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā thokaṃ agamaṃsu, atha bhagavā vihārassa pariveṇapariyantaṃ gatakāle, ‘‘āharatha me pattacīvaraṃ, tumhe idheva tiṭṭhathā’’ti pakkāmi. Tato paṭinivattitvāti tato ṭhitaṭṭhānato nivattitvā. Kiṃ nu kho mayaṃ āyasmatoti bhagavantaṃ nissāya pabbajjādīni adhigantvāpi attano guṇakathāya aṭṭiyamānā adhigamappicchatāya āhaṃsu. Imāsañca imāsañcāti paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ lokiyalokuttarānaṃ. Cetasā ceto paricca viditoti ajja me āyasmanto lokiyasamāpattiyā vītināmesuṃ, ajja lokuttarāyāti evaṃ cittena cittaṃ paricchinditvā viditaṃ. Devatāpi meti, bhante anuruddha, ajja ayyo nandiyatthero, ajja ayyo kimilatthero imāya ca imāya ca samāpattiyā vītināmesīti evamārocesunti attho. Pañhābhipuṭṭhenāti tampi mayā sayaṃ viditanti vā devatāhi ārocitanti vā ettakeneva mukhaṃ me sajjanti kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā apuṭṭheneva me na kathitaṃ. Bhagavatā pana pañhābhipuṭṭhena pañhaṃ abhipucchitena satā byākataṃ, tatra me kiṃ na rocathāti āha.
331 “长”(Dīgha):如“珠宝、宝珠、长、还有舍利萨迦、同伴”(《长部》3.293)所提及的,是二十八位夜叉将军中的一位天王。“波罗阇那”(Parajana)就是那位夜叉的名字。“他往诣世尊”(yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami):据说,他受多闻天王派遣前往彼处,路上看见世尊自己拿着钵与衣从炼瓦堂出来,走入牛角沙罗林中,便知道世尊正亲自持钵与衣前往牛角沙罗林里的三位善男子处。他心想:“今日将有一场大说法,我也应当参与这场说法。”于是,他以不可见的身体跟在导师足后,在不远处站着听法。导师离去后,他仍未离开,为了观察“这些长老会做什么”而留在原地。接着,他看到那两位长老围绕着阿那律长老,心想:“这些长老依止世尊证得出家等一切功德后,却对世尊吝啬,不愿与他人分享,过分隐藏遮覆。现在我不让他们再遮掩了,我要从地面直到梵天界去宣扬他们的功德。”这样想好后,他便前往世尊那里。显示巴利原文
331.Dīghoti ‘‘maṇi māṇivaro dīgho, atho serīsako sahā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.293) evaṃ āgato aṭṭhavīsatiyā yakkhasenāpatīnaṃ abbhantaro eko devarājā. Parajanoti tasseva yakkhassa nāmaṃ. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti so kira vessavaṇena pesito etaṃ ṭhānaṃ gacchanto bhagavantaṃ sayaṃ pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā giñjakāvasathato gosiṅgasālavanassa antare disvā bhagavā attanā pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā gosiṅgasālavane tiṇṇaṃ kulaputtānaṃ santikaṃ gacchati. Ajja mahatī dhammadesanā bhavissati. Mayāpi tassā desanāya bhāginā bhavitabbanti adissamānena kāyena satthu padānupadiko gantvā avidūre ṭhatvā dhammaṃ sutvā satthari gacchantepi na gato, – ‘‘ime therā kiṃ karissantī’’ti dassanatthaṃ pana tattheva ṭhito. Atha te dve there anuruddhattheraṃ paliveṭhente disvā, – ‘‘ime therā bhagavantaṃ nissāya pabbajjādayo sabbaguṇe adhigantvāpi bhagavatova maccharāyanti, na sahanti, ativiya nilīyanti paṭicchādenti, na dāni tesaṃ paṭicchādetuṃ dassāmi, pathavito yāva brahmalokā etesaṃ guṇe pakāsessāmī’’ti cintetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami.
「他们真是有得啊,尊者!」意思是:尊者,那些住在跋耆国的人们,得以见到世尊及这三位善男子,得以礼敬,得以布施应施物,得以听法——尊者,跋耆人真是有得啊。
「听到声音」:据说,他凭着自己的夜叉威神力,发出巨大音声,遍满整个跋耆国,讲出那句话。由于他的缘故,那些住在树、山等处的地居天听到了声音。正是因为这样,才说「听到声音」。
「转告」:听到那么大的声音之后,他们便转告。这个道理在每个环节都适用。
「乃至梵天界」:一直到阿迦尼吒梵天界。
「如果那个家族也」:意思是“这些善男子从我们的家族出离,出家后成为这样具戒、具德、具足正行、有善法的人”。如果那个家族以净信心忆念这三位善男子,于一切处都应这样理解其含义。
就这样,世尊顺着话题的关联,结束了说法。显示巴利原文
Lābhā vata, bhanteti ye, bhante, vajjiraṭṭhavāsino bhagavantañca ime ca tayo kulaputte passituṃ labhanti, vandituṃ labhanti, deyyadhammaṃ dātuṃ labhanti, dhammaṃ sotuṃ labhanti, tesaṃ lābhā, bhante, vajjīnanti attho. Saddaṃ sutvāti so kira attano yakkhānubhāvena mahantaṃ saddaṃ katvā sakalaṃ vajjiraṭṭhaṃ ajjhottharanto taṃ vācaṃ nicchāresi. Tena cassa tesu rukkhapabbatādīsu adhivatthā bhummā devatā saddaṃ assosuṃ. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘saddaṃ sutvā’’ti. Anussāvesunti mahantaṃ saddaṃ sutvā sāvesuṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha. Yāva brahmalokāti yāva akaniṭṭhabrahmalokā. Tañcepi kulanti, ‘‘amhākaṃ kulato nikkhamitvā ime kulaputtā pabbajitā evaṃ sīlavanto guṇavanto ācārasampannā kalyāṇadhammā’’ti evaṃ tañcepi kulaṃ ete tayo kulaputte pasannacittaṃ anussareyyāti evaṃ sabbattha attho daṭṭhabbo. Iti bhagavā yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesīti.
2.《大牛角经》注释显示巴利原文
2. Mahāgosiṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
332 「如是我闻(evaṃme sutaṃ)」指的就是这部《大牛角经》。在这里,「牛角沙罗树林(gosiṅgasālavanadāya)」这一句,是为了说明他们当时居住的地点而说的。在其他经典中,通常会先点明世尊托钵乞食的村庄,然后再说明居住的地方,比如“住在舍卫城(sāvatthiyaṃ)的祇树给孤独(anāthapiṇḍika)园”。但在这部《大牛角经》里,世尊所在的乞食村庄并没有固定下来,想必是某一个村庄吧。因此,经文只指明了住处。这部经,就是所谓的以林野为缘起的经典。「与众多(sambahulehi)」意思就是和很多比丘一起。「声名远播(abhiññātehi abhiññātehi)」指在各个地方都很有名、很突出。「长老声闻弟子(therehi sāvakehi saddhiṃ)」:由于他们具备由巴帝摩卡律仪等坚实修习所成就的功德,所以称为“长老”;又因为他们是在听闻佛法的末期出生的,所以称为“声闻”;经文是说世尊与这些长老声闻弟子在一起。接下来,为了展现这些长老的具体身份,经文说:「与具寿舍利弗(āyasmatā ca sāriputtena)……在一起」。在这里,具寿舍利弗因为他自身戒行等功德,在佛陀的教法中声名远播。就像对于有眼睛的人们来说,高悬天空中央的太阳或月亮那样显眼;又像对于站在海岸边的人们来说,大海那样突出,他广为人知、备受瞩目。然而,不应该只根据这部经里提到的功德来了解长老的伟大;还要根据其他许多经典来了解,例如《法嗣经》《无秽经》《正见经》《狮子吼经》《车辕调伏》《大象迹喻》《大问答》《牛众经》《长爪经》《不取着经》《应亲近不应亲近经》《谛分别经》《团食清净》《快乐经》《等诵经》《十上经》《自恣经》(《相应部》1.215等)、《须尸摩经》《长老问经》《大义释》《无碍解道》《长老狮子吼经》《出离》《最上》等等。因为在《最上》中,世尊说:“诸比丘,在我的声闻比丘弟子中,大智慧第一的,就是舍利弗。”(《增支部》1.188-189)显示巴利原文
332.Evaṃme sutanti mahāgosiṅgasuttaṃ. Tattha gosiṅgasālavanadāyeti idaṃ vasanaṭṭhānadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Aññesu hi suttesu, ‘‘sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme’’ti evaṃ paṭhamaṃ gocaragāmaṃ dassetvā pacchā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ dasseti. Imasmiṃ pana mahāgosiṅgasutte bhagavato gocaragāmo anibandho, kocideva gocaragāmo bhavissati. Tasmā vasanaṭṭhānameva paridīpitaṃ. Araññanidānakaṃ nāmetaṃ suttanti. Sambahulehīti bahukehi. Abhiññātehi abhiññātehīti sabbattha vissutehi pākaṭehi. Therehi sāvakehi saddhinti pātimokkhasaṃvarādīhi thirakārakeheva dhammehi samannāgatattā therehi, savanante jātattā sāvakehi saddhiṃ ekato. Idāni te there sarūpato dassento, āyasmatā ca sāriputtenātiādimāha. Tatthāyasmā sāriputto attano sīlādīhi guṇehi buddhasāsane abhiññāto. Cakkhumantānaṃ gaganamajjhe ṭhito sūriyo viya cando viya, samuddatīre ṭhitānaṃ sāgaro viya ca pākaṭo paññāto. Na kevalañcassa imasmiṃ sutte āgataguṇavaseneva mahantatā veditabbā, ito aññesaṃ dhammadāyādasuttaṃ anaṅgaṇasuttaṃ sammādiṭṭhisuttaṃ sīhanādasuttaṃ rathavinītaṃ mahāhatthipadopamaṃ mahāvedallaṃ cātumasuttaṃ dīghanakhaṃ anupadasuttaṃ sevitabbāsevitabbasuttaṃ saccavibhaṅgasuttaṃ piṇḍapātapārisuddhi sampasādanīyaṃ saṅgītisuttaṃ dasuttarasuttaṃ pavāraṇāsuttaṃ (saṃ. ni. 1.215 ādayo) susimasuttaṃ therapañhasuttaṃ mahāniddeso paṭisambhidāmaggo therasīhanādasuttaṃ abhinikkhamanaṃ etadagganti imesampi suttānaṃ vasena therassa mahantatā veditabbā. Etadaggasmiñhi, ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ mahāpaññānaṃ yadidaṃ sāriputto’’ti (a. ni. 1.188-189) vuttaṃ.
大目犍连长老也以戒行等功德,以及此经中所说的功德,如同诸大长老一样,是广为人知、声名远播的尊者。此外,还应依据《推论经》《小渴爱尽经》《魔怖经》《殿堂震动》、整部《神足相应》《降伏难陀乌巴难达》、于示现双神变时前往天界、《天宫事》《饿鬼事》《长老譬喻》以及《最上》等经典,来了解他的伟大。因为在《最上》中,世尊说:“诸比丘,我诸声闻比丘弟子中,具神通第一者,即是大目犍连。”显示巴利原文
Mahāmoggallānopi sīlādiguṇehi ceva imasmiṃ sutte āgataguṇehi ca thero viya abhiññāto pākaṭo mahā. Apicassa anumānasuttaṃ, cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhayasuttaṃ māratajjaniyasuttaṃ pāsādakampanaṃ sakalaṃ iddhipādasaṃyuttaṃ nandopanandadamanaṃ yamakapāṭihāriyakāle devalokagamanaṃ vimānavatthu petavatthu therassa abhinikkhamanaṃ etadagganti imesampi vasena mahantabhāvo veditabbo . Etadaggasmiñhi, ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ iddhimantānaṃ yadidaṃ mahāmoggallāno’’ti (a. ni. 1.190) vuttaṃ.
大迦叶长老也因其戒行等功德以及本经所提及的功德,如同大长老一般,广为人知、声名远播。此外,依据《衣相易经》《补衲衣经》(《相应部》2.154等)、《月喻》、全部的《迦叶相应》、《大圣种经》、长老的出离事迹以及“第一”的称号等,亦可了知他的伟大。在“第一”的开示中,世尊曾这样说:“诸比丘,在我的声闻弟子比丘中,头陀论者第一者,即是大迦叶。”(《增支部》1.191)显示巴利原文
Mahākassapopi sīlādiguṇehi ceva imasmiṃ sutte āgataguṇehi ca thero viya abhiññāto pākaṭo mahā. Apicassa cīvaraparivattanasuttaṃ jiṇṇacīvarasuttaṃ (saṃ. ni. 2.154 ādayo) candopamaṃ sakalaṃ kassapasaṃyuttaṃ mahāariyavaṃsasuttaṃ therassa abhinikkhamanaṃ etadagganti imesampi vasena mahantabhāvo veditabbo. Etadaggasmiñhi, ‘‘etadaggaṃ , bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dhutavādānaṃ yadidaṃ mahākassapo’’ti (a. ni. 1.191) vuttaṃ.
阿那律长老也因其戒行等功德以及本经所提及的功德,如同大长老一般,广为人知、声名远播。此外,依据《小牛角经》、《那罗伽波那经》、《无上经》、《随烦恼经》、《阿那律相应》、《大人之思惟经》、长老的出离事迹以及“第一”的称号等,亦可了知他的伟大。在“第一”的开示中,世尊曾这样说:“诸比丘,在我的声闻弟子比丘中,天眼第一者,即是阿那律。”(《增支部》1.192)显示巴利原文
Anuruddhattheropi sīlādiguṇehi ceva imasmiṃ sutte āgataguṇehi ca thero viya abhiññāto pākaṭo mahā. Apicassa cūḷagosiṅgasuttaṃ naḷakapānasuttaṃ anuttariyasuttaṃ upakkilesasuttaṃ anuruddhasaṃyuttaṃ mahāpurisavitakkasuttaṃ therassa abhinikkhamanaṃ etadagganti imesampi vasena mahantabhāvo veditabbo. Etadaggasmiñhi, ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dibbacakkhukānaṃ yadidaṃ anuruddho’’ti (a. ni. 1.192) vuttaṃ.
经文说“与尊者离瓦达在一起”,此处有两位离瓦达:迦迪拉林住者离瓦达与疑结离瓦达。其中,迦迪拉林住者离瓦达是法将舍利弗长老的幼弟,并非此处所指。这里所指的,是那位因“红糖不如法吗?绿豆不如法吗?”(《大品》272)等事而常怀疑惑的离瓦达长老。这位离瓦达长老同样以其戒行等功德,以及本经所提及的功德,如同其他大长老一般,广为人知、声名远播。此外,从其出离事迹和“第一”的称号,亦可了知他的伟大。世尊在开示“第一”时曾这样说:“诸比丘,在我的声闻弟子比丘中,最乐于修习禅那者,第一就是疑结离瓦达。”(《增支部》1.204)显示巴利原文
Āyasmatā ca revatenāti ettha pana dve revatā khadiravaniyarevato ca kaṅkhārevato ca. Tattha khadiravaniyarevato dhammasenāpatittherassa kaniṭṭhabhātiko, na so idha adhippeto. ‘‘Akappiyo guḷo, akappiyā muggā’’ti (mahāva. 272) evaṃ kaṅkhābahulo pana thero idha revatoti adhippeto. Sopi sīlādiguṇehi ceva imasmiṃ sutte āgataguṇehi ca thero viya abhiññāto pākaṭo mahā. Apicassa abhinikkhamanenapi etadaggenapi mahantabhāvo veditabbo. Etadaggasmiñhi, ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ jhāyīnaṃ yadidaṃ kaṅkhārevato’’ti (a. ni. 1.204) vuttaṃ.
阿难长老也因其戒行等功德,以及本经中所说的功德,如同其他大长老一般,广为人知、名声远闻。此外,通过《有学经》《巴希提迦经》《不动适切经》《瞿默目犍连经》《多界经》《小空经》《大空经》《希有未曾有法经》《一夜贤者经》《大因缘经》《大般涅槃经》《须跋经》《小界蕴经》,以及他出离的事迹与“第一”的称号,都能了知他的伟大。在说到“第一”时,世尊曾这样说:“诸比丘,在我的比丘声闻弟子中,多闻第一者,即是阿难。”(《增支部》1.219-223)显示巴利原文
Ānandattheropi sīlādiguṇehi ceva imasmiṃ sutte āgataguṇehi ca thero viya abhiññāto pākaṭo mahā. Apicassa sekkhasuttaṃ bāhitikasuttaṃ āneñjasappāyaṃ gopakamoggallānaṃ bahudhātukaṃ cūḷasuññataṃ mahāsuññataṃ acchariyabbhutasuttaṃ bhaddekarattaṃ mahānidānaṃ mahāparinibbānaṃ subhasuttaṃ cūḷaniyalokadhātusuttaṃ abhinikkhamanaṃ etadagganti imesampi vasena mahantabhāvo veditabbo. Etadaggasmiñhi, ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahussutānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando’’ti (a. ni. 1.219-223) vuttaṃ.
“以及与其他诸多名声卓著者”这句话的意思是:不只是和这几位在一起,世尊还和众多其他因大功德而声名远播、广为人知的声闻长老比丘们一起,住在牛角娑罗林园中。要知道,当时具寿舍利弗自己是大智慧者,还带着其他许多大智慧的比丘,一起围绕着十力世尊而住。具寿大目犍连自己具足神通,具寿大迦叶自己修持头陀行,具寿阿那律自己拥有天眼,具寿离瓦达自己乐于禅那,具寿阿难自己多闻,并带着其他许多多闻的比丘,围绕着十力世尊而住。就这样,应当了知,那时这几位以及其他名声卓著的诸大长老,大约有三万比丘,围绕着十力世尊而住。显示巴利原文
Aññehi ca abhiññātehi abhiññātehīti na kevalañca eteheva, aññehi ca mahāguṇatāya pākaṭehi abhiññātehi bahūhi therehi sāvakehi saddhiṃ bhagavā gosiṅgasālavanadāye viharatīti attho. Āyasmā hi sāriputto sayaṃ mahāpañño aññepi bahū mahāpaññe bhikkhū gahetvā tadā dasabalaṃ parivāretvā vihāsi. Āyasmā mahāmoggallāno sayaṃ iddhimā, āyasmā mahākassapo sayaṃ dhutavādo, āyasmā anuruddho sayaṃ dibbacakkhuko, āyasmā revato sayaṃ jhānābhirato, āyasmā ānando sayaṃ bahussuto aññepi bahū bahussute bhikkhū gahetvā tadā dasabalaṃ parivāretvā vihāsi, evaṃ tadā ete ca aññe ca abhiññātā mahātherā tiṃsasahassamattā bhikkhū dasabalaṃ parivāretvā vihariṃsūti veditabbā.
“从独处禅定中出定”是指,从果等至的独处状态中出定。关于“前往具寿大迦叶之处”这句:据说,这位长老从独处禅定中出定后,观察西方世界,看见那圆满十五由旬的日轮正在沉落,样子就像一个在林中嬉戏的醉意刹帝利从耳朵上掉落的耳环,又像一床被叠好放进箱子的红毯子,也好似一个从宝象的象牙上掉下来的、价值十万的黄金钵。紧接着,他又观察东方世界,看见刚从海云色的海洋腹中升起、停留在东方铁围山山顶上、带有兔相庄严的、四十九由旬的月轮,宛如一个被人握住轮辐在旋转的银轮,好像从银色山顶涌出的一团圆圆的乳流,又像一只展开翅膀腾飞于空中的白天鹅。接着,他又观察了娑罗林。就在那时,那些娑罗树从树根一直到树梢,所有的花都尽情盛放,看上去就像披着丝帛一样,又像挂满了成串的珍珠那般光辉闪耀。大地仿佛用花毯作供养而庄严起来,又好像到处飘落的花粉正像虫胶一般倾洒着。一群群蜜蜂沉醉在花粉酿成的蜜酒中,一边飞舞在树林间,一边如同在歌唱。而且那一天,正好是布萨日。于是,长老心想:“今天要用什么方式来度过这愉快的时光呢?”要知道,圣弟子们天生就喜好听闻正法。这时他心中便想:“今天,我去我的长兄法将长老那里,以闻法的喜悦度过时光吧。”不过,他在准备前往时没有打算独自去,而是想:“我要带上我的亲密伙伴大迦叶长老一起去。”于是,他从座位上站起来,抖了抖坐具,便朝着具寿大迦叶的住处走去了。显示巴利原文
Paṭisallānā vuṭṭhitoti phalasamāpattivivekato vuṭṭhito. Yenāyasmā mahākassapo tenupasaṅkamīti thero kira paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito pacchimalokadhātuṃ olokento vanante kīḷantassa mattakhattiyassa kaṇṇato patamānaṃ kuṇḍalaṃ viya, saṃharitvā samugge pakkhipamānaṃ rattakambalaṃ viya, maṇināgadantato patamānaṃ satasahassagghanikaṃ suvaṇṇapātiṃ viya ca atthaṃ gacchamānaṃ paripuṇṇapaṇṇāsayojanaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ addasa. Tadanantaraṃ pācīnalokadhātuṃ olokento nemiyaṃ gahetvā parivattayamānaṃ rajatacakkaṃ viya, rajatakūṭato nikkhamantaṃ khīradhārāmaṇḍaṃ viya, sapakkhe papphoṭetvā gaganatale pakkhandamānaṃ setahaṃsaṃ viya ca meghavaṇṇāya samuddakucchito uggantvā pācīnacakkavāḷapabbatamatthake sasalakkhaṇappaṭimaṇḍitaṃ ekūnapaṇṇāsayojanaṃ candamaṇḍalaṃ addasa. Tato sālavanaṃ olokesi. Tasmiñhi samaye sālarukkhā mūlato paṭṭhāya yāva aggā sabbapāliphullā dukūlapārutā viya, muttākalāpavinaddhā viya ca virociṃsu. Bhūmitalaṃ pupphasantharapūjāya paṭimaṇḍitaṃ viya, tattha tattha nipatantena pupphareṇunā lākhārasena siñcamānaṃ viya ca ahosi. Bhamaramadhukaragaṇā kusumareṇumadamattā upagāyamānā viya vanantaresu vicaranti. Tadā ca uposathadivasova hoti. Atha thero, ‘‘kāya nu kho ajja ratiyā vītināmessāmī’’ti cintesi, ariyasāvakā ca nāma piyadhammassavanā honti. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘ajja mayhaṃ jeṭṭhabhātikassa dhammasenāpatittherassa santikaṃ gantvā dhammaratiyā vītināmessāmī’’ti. Gacchanto pana ekakova agantvā ‘‘mayhaṃ piyasahāyaṃ mahākassapattheraṃ gahetvā gamissāmī’’ti nisinnaṭṭhānato vuṭṭhāya cammakhaṇḍaṃ papphoṭetvā yenāyasmā mahākassapo tenupasaṅkami.
“是的,贤友。”具寿大迦叶如此答道。这位长老同样也是好乐听闻正法的圣弟子,因此,在听了他的话后,丝毫没有找比如“去吧,贤友,我头有些疼,或背有些疼”之类的托辞推脱,而是满心欢喜地说:“是的,贤友。”答应之后,他便从座起身,抖了抖皮垫,跟随在大目犍连之后一同前往。就在那时,这两位大长老光耀赫奕,犹如两轮并行的明月、两轮并行的红日、两头六牙象王、两头雄狮或两只猛虎。而当时,具寿阿那律正坐在自己的日间休息处,他望见两位大长老正前往舍利弗长老处,又观察西方,见落日仿佛正沉入林中;观察东方,见明月好似正从林中升起;再看看那片娑罗林,只见所有娑罗树全然盛开。他心想:“今日是布萨日,我的这两位长兄正前往法将那里,必定会有盛大的闻法集会,我也应当参与其中。”于是,他也从座起身,抖了抖皮垫,跟随着大长老们的足迹而出。因此,经文中这样说:“尔时,具寿大目犍连、具寿大迦叶与具寿阿那律,一同前往具寿舍利弗之处。”“前往”是指,他们三人依次排成一列,如同三个月亮、太阳或……显示巴利原文
Evamāvusotikho āyasmā mahākassapoti theropi yasmā piyadhammassavanova ariyasāvako, tasmā tassa vacanaṃ sutvā gacchāvuso, tvaṃ, mayhaṃ sīsaṃ vā rujjati piṭṭhi vāti kiñci lesāpadesaṃ akatvā tuṭṭhahadayova, ‘‘evamāvuso’’tiādimāha. Paṭissutvā ca nisinnaṭṭhānato vuṭṭhāya cammakhaṇḍaṃ papphoṭetvā mahāmoggallānaṃ anubandhi. Tasmiṃ samaye dve mahātherā paṭipāṭiyā ṭhitāni dve candamaṇḍalāni viya, dve sūriyamaṇḍalāni viya, dve chaddantanāgarājāno viya, dve sīhā viya, dve byagghā viya ca virociṃsu. Anuruddhattheropi tasmiṃ samaye divāṭṭhāne nisinno dve mahāthere sāriputtattherassa santikaṃ gacchante disvā pacchimalokadhātuṃ olokento sūriyaṃ vanantaṃ pavisantaṃ viya, pācīnalokadhātuṃ olokento candaṃ vanantato uggacchantaṃ viya, sālavanaṃ olokento sabbapāliphullameva sālavanañca disvā ajja uposathadivaso, ime ca me jeṭṭhabhātikā dhammasenāpatissa santikaṃ gacchanti, mahantena dhammassavanena bhavitabbaṃ, ahampi dhammassavanassa bhāgī bhavissāmīti nisinnaṭṭhānato vuṭṭhāya cammakhaṇḍaṃ papphoṭetvā mahātherānaṃ padānupadiko hutvā nikkhami. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho āyasmā ca mahāmoggallāno āyasmā ca mahākassapo āyasmā ca anuruddho yenāyasmā sāriputto tenupasaṅkamiṃsū’’ti. Upasaṅkamiṃsūti. Paṭipāṭiyā ṭhitā tayo candā viya, sūriyā viya, sīhā viya ca virocamānā upasaṅkamiṃsu.
333 333. 正当那些大长老如此前往时,具寿阿难也坐在自己的日间休息处,望见这情景后,他心想:“今日将有一场盛大的闻法集会,我也应当参与其中。然而,我不能独自前去,定要带上我的亲密同伴离瓦达长老一同前往。”这一切,都应当按照前面叙述大目犍连、大迦叶、阿那律长老前往时的方式来理解。就这样,他们两人排成一列,如同两轮明月、两轮红日或两头雄狮般,光辉闪耀地一同前去。因此,经中这样记载:“具寿舍利弗望见……”等等。舍利弗看见后,对具寿阿难说了这番话:他远远望见,待对方渐渐走近,到了适宜交谈的距离时,便说出了“来吧,贤友”等话语。“贤友,这地方真是令人愉悦啊。”在这里,“愉悦”有两种:环境的愉悦与人的愉悦。其中,所谓“环境”,指的是那些长满了铁力木、娑罗、檀香、黄兰等种种树木的地方,那里树荫浓密、花果繁盛、树种多样、水源充足,并且远离村落,这就称为“环境的愉悦”。对此,有偈颂说道:显示巴利原文
333. Evaṃ upasaṅkamante pana te mahāthere āyasmā ānando attano divāṭṭhāne nisinnoyeva disvā, ‘‘ajja mahantaṃ dhammassavanaṃ bhavissati, mayāpi tassa bhāginā bhavitabbaṃ, na kho pana ekakova gamissāmi, mayhaṃ piyasahāyampi revatattheraṃ gahetvā gamissāmī’’ti sabbaṃ mahāmoggallānassa mahākassapassa anuruddhassa upasaṅkamane vuttanayeneva vitthārato veditabbaṃ. Iti te dve janā paṭipāṭiyā ṭhitā dve candā viya, sūriyā viya, sīhā viya ca virocamānā upasaṅkamiṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘addasā kho āyasmā sāriputto’’tiādi . Disvāna āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ etadavocāti dūratova disvā anukkamena kathāupacāraṃ sampattametaṃ, ‘‘etu kho āyasmā’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Ramaṇīyaṃ, āvusoti ettha duvidhaṃ rāmaṇeyyakaṃ vanarāmaṇeyyakaṃ puggalarāmaṇeyyakañca. Tattha vanaṃ nāma nāgasalaḷasālacampakādīhi sañchannaṃ hoti bahalacchāyaṃ pupphaphalūpagaṃ vividharukkhaṃ udakasampannaṃ gāmato nissaṭaṃ, idaṃ vanarāmaṇeyyakaṃ nāma. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
“林野十分可爱,世人却于此不乐;
离贪者心得安乐,他们并非追求欲乐之人。”(《法句经》99)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ramaṇīyāni araññāni, yattha na ramatī jano; Vītarāgā ramissanti, na te kāmagavesino’’ti. (dha. pa. 99);
然而,纵使那地方干旱荒芜、没有水、树荫稀疏、荆棘丛生,只要有佛陀等圣者安住于彼,这样的地方便称为“人所悦意之处”。对此,有偈颂云:显示巴利原文
Vanaṃ pana sacepi ujjaṅgale hoti nirudakaṃ viralacchāyaṃ kaṇṭakasamākiṇṇaṃ, buddhādayopettha ariyā viharanti, idaṃ puggalarāmaṇeyyakaṃ nāma. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
无论在村落或旷野,低洼之处或高岗上;
阿拉汉们所安住之处,那片大地便是可爱的。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Gāme vā yadi vāraññe, ninne vā yadi vā thale; Yattha arahanto viharanti, taṃ bhūmirāmaṇeyyaka’’nti. (dha. pa. 98);
但在这里,这两种情况都可见到。因为那时,牛角沙罗林处处盛开着花,花香馥郁;而且在这包含天界的世间,最上之人——正自觉者,正与约三万位具足神通的比丘们一同安住。正是针对这一点,才说:‘阿难尊者,牛角沙罗林真可爱。’显示巴利原文
Idha pana taṃ duvidhampi labbhati. Tadā hi gosiṅgasālavanaṃ sabbapāliphullaṃ hoti kusumagandhasugandhaṃ, sadevake cettha loke aggapuggalo sammāsambuddho tiṃsasahassamattehi abhiññātabhikkhūhi saddhiṃ viharati. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘ramaṇīyaṃ, āvuso ānanda, gosiṅgasālavana’’nti.
“纯净”:意思是离垢,也就是远离了云、雾、烟、尘、罗睺这五种杂染。“一切处盛开”:意思是处处都盛开着花,从根部直到树梢,没有一处不开花的地方。“仿佛散发着天界的香气”:意思是,如同天界的曼陀罗花、拘吠陀罗花、波利质多罗树的花以及旃檀粉末的香气一般,四处飘散;又犹如忉利天、兜率天、化乐天、他化自在天、梵天等诸天降临之处,有香气在那里飘荡流动。显示巴利原文
Dosināti dosāpagatā, abbhaṃ mahikā dhūmo rajo rāhūti imehi pañcahi upakkilesehi virahitāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sabbapāliphullāti sabbattha pāliphullā, mūlato paṭṭhāya yāva aggā apupphitaṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthi. Dibbā maññe gandhā sampavantīti dibbā mandārapupphakoviḷārapāricchattakacandanacuṇṇagandhā viya samantā pavāyanti, sakkasuyāsantusitanimmānaratiparanimmitamahābrahmānaṃ otiṇṇaṭṭhānaṃ viya vāyantīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“阿难贤友,是怎样的人呢?”阿难长老在那五位长老之中,犹如僧团里的最下座比丘。为何长老首先问他呢?因为他们彼此护念。那位两位长老互相护念。舍利弗长老护念阿难长老,心想:“他做了本该由我承担的对世尊的侍奉。”阿难长老护念舍利弗长老,视他为世尊弟子中最上首者。让良家子弟出家后,便带到舍利弗长老跟前,拜他为和尚;舍利弗长老也这样做。就这样,他们各自拿出自己的衣和钵,度人出家,令其拜请和尚,由此有了五百位比丘。当阿难尊者得到上好的衣服等物时,也都会送给长老。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃrūpena, āvuso ānandāti ānandatthero tesaṃ pañcannaṃ therānaṃ saṅghanavakova. Kasmā thero taṃyeva paṭhamaṃ pucchatīti? Mamāyitattā. Te hi dve therā aññamaññaṃ mamāyiṃsu. Sāriputtatthero, ‘‘mayā kattabbaṃ satthu upaṭṭhānaṃ karotī’’ti ānandattheraṃ mamāyi. Ānandatthero bhagavato sāvakānaṃ aggoti sāriputtattheraṃ mamāyi, kuladārake pabbājetvā sāriputtattherassa santike upajjhaṃ gaṇhāpesi. Sāriputtattheropi tatheva akāsi. Evaṃ ekamekena attano pattacīvaraṃ datvā pabbājetvā upajjhaṃ gaṇhāpitāni pañca bhikkhusatāni ahesuṃ. Āyasmā ānando paṇītāni cīvarādīnipi labhitvā therasseva deti.
据说,有一位婆罗门心想:“对佛宝和僧宝的供养是显而易见的,但怎样才算供养了法宝呢?”他便来到世尊那里,请问了这件事。世尊说:“婆罗门,如果你想供养法宝,就去供养一位多闻者吧。”“尊者,请指示多闻者。”他于是向比丘僧团请问。他来到比丘僧团中说:“尊者们,请指示多闻者。”僧众回答:“阿难长老就是,婆罗门。”那位婆罗门便用价值千金的衣服供养了阿难长老。长老拿了衣服,来到世尊那里。世尊问:“阿难,从哪里得来的?”“尊者,是一位婆罗门布施的,但我想把它送给具寿舍利弗。”“那就给他吧,阿难。”“尊者,他外出游方去了。”“等他回来时再给。”“尊者,已经制了学处。”“舍利弗什么时候回来?”“尊者,大约十天后。”世尊说:“阿难,我允许你最多可将多余的衣服存放十天。”(见《波罗夷》461;《大品》347)并制定了这条学处。舍利弗长老也一样,无论得到什么合意的东西,都会送给阿难长老。就这样,那两位长显示巴利原文
Eko kira brāhmaṇo cintesi – ‘‘buddharatanassa ca saṅgharatanassa ca pūjā paññāyati, kathaṃ nu kho dhammaratanaṃ pūjitaṃ nāma hotī’’ti? So bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṃ pucchi. Bhagavā āha – ‘‘sacesi, brāhmaṇa, dhammaratanaṃ pūjitukāmo, ekaṃ bahussutaṃ pūjehī’’ti bahussutaṃ, bhante, ācikkhathāti bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pucchati. So bhikkhusaṅghaṃ upasaṅkamitvā bahussutaṃ, bhante, ācikkhathāti āha. Ānandatthero brāhmaṇāti. Brāhmaṇo theraṃ sahassagghanikena cīvarena pūjesi. Thero taṃ gahetvā bhagavato santikaṃ agamāsi. Bhagavā ‘‘kuto, ānanda, laddha’’nti āha. Ekena, bhante, brāhmaṇena dinnaṃ, idaṃ panāhaṃ āyasmato sāriputtassa dātukāmoti. Dehi, ānandāti. Cārikaṃ pakkanto, bhanteti. Āgatakāle dehīti. Sikkhāpadaṃ, bhante, paññattanti. Kadā pana sāriputto āgamissatīti? Dasāhamattena, bhanteti. ‘‘Anujānāmi, ānanda, dasāhaparamaṃ atirekacīvaraṃ nikkhipitu’’nti (pārā. 461; mahāva. 347) sikkhāpadaṃ paññapesi. Sāriputtattheropi tatheva yaṃkiñci manāpaṃ labhati, taṃ ānandattherassa deti. Evaṃ te therā aññamaññaṃ mamāyiṃsu, iti mamāyitattā paṭhamaṃ pucchi.
而且,所谓征询同意之问,原本应从下座开始问起。因此,长老心想:“我先问阿难,阿难会凭他的辩才作出回答。然后我再问离婆多、阿那律、大迦叶、大目犍连。大目犍连也会凭他的辩才作出回答。接着,五位长老都会问我,我也会凭我的辩才作出回答。即便如此,这场说法也还不会达到圆满、广大的境地。那时,我们大家再一起去亲近十力者发问,导师会以一切知智作出回答。到了这一步,这场说法才会达到圆满、广大的境地。正如在一个地区产生的诉讼,会提交到村长那里;如果村长决断不了,就提交到地方长官;如果地方长官决断不了,就提交到高级审判官;如果高级审判官决断不了,就提交到将军;如果将军决断不了,就提交到副王;如果副王也决断不了,就提交到国王。自从国王作出判决的那一刻起,这起诉讼就不再辗转传递,仅凭国王的圣旨便了结了。同样地,我先问阿难……乃至……然后我们大家再一起去亲近十力者发问,导师会以一切知智作出回答。到了这一步,这场说法才会达到圆满、广大的境地。”就这样,长老在进行征询同意之问显示巴利原文
Apica anumatipucchā nāmesā khuddakato paṭṭhāya pucchitabbā hoti. Tasmā thero cintesi – ‘‘ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ ānandaṃ pucchissāmi, ānando attano paṭibhānaṃ byākarissati. Tato revataṃ, anuruddhaṃ, mahākassapaṃ, mahāmoggallānaṃ pucchissāmi. Mahāmoggallāno attano paṭibhānaṃ byākarissati. Tato pañcapi therā maṃ pucchissanti, ahampi attano paṭibhānaṃ byākarissāmī’’ti. Ettāvatāpi ayaṃ dhammadesanā sikhāppattā vepullappattā na bhavissati, atha mayaṃ sabbepi dasabalaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchissāma, satthā sabbaññutaññāṇena byākarissati. Ettāvatā ayaṃ dhammadesanā sikhāppattā vepullappattā bhavissati. Yathā hi janapadamhi uppanno aṭṭo gāmabhojakaṃ pāpuṇāti, tasmiṃ nicchituṃ asakkonte janapadabhojakaṃ pāpuṇāti, tasmiṃ asakkonte mahāvinicchayaamaccaṃ, tasmiṃ asakkonte senāpatiṃ, tasmiṃ asakkonte uparājaṃ, tasmiṃ vinicchituṃ asakkonte rājānaṃ pāpuṇāti, raññā vinicchitakālato paṭṭhāya aṭṭo aparāparaṃ na sañcarati, rājavacaneneva chijjati. Evamevaṃ ahañhi paṭhamaṃ ānandaṃ pucchissāmi…pe… atha mayaṃ sabbepi dasabalaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchissāma, satthā sabbaññutaññāṇena byākarissati. Ettāvatā ayaṃ dhammadesanā sikhāppattā vepullappattā bhavissati. Evaṃ anumatipucchaṃ pucchanto thero paṭhamaṃ ānandattheraṃ pucchi.
“多闻”是说,他所听闻的很多,即依巴利律本母及其上下文的脉络之力,受持了九分教的佛陀教法。“持闻者”指作为所闻之法的承载者。若有人在此所学,到了彼处便散失,如同破罐中的水无法存留,在大众中既无法讲述、也无法诵出一部经或一则本生故事,这便不名为持闻者。反之,若有人所受持的佛语,如初受持时一般,即便十年、二十年不加温习亦不忘失,这才名为持闻者。“集闻者”是所闻之法的积集者。如同刻在石上的文字,又如保存在金瓶中的狮子油,所闻之法积集于心之宝藏中,长久坚住,是故名为集闻者。“已持者”即安住、纯熟之义。有些人所受持的佛语并不安住、不纯熟、不坚固;当被请求“请讲某经或某本生故事”时,他会说:“待我温习、核对、仔细思惟之后方知。”而另一些人,所持的法安住、纯熟,如同生命之流一般;当被请求讲说某经或本生故事时,即能立刻阐发。正是对此,才说“已持者”。显示巴利原文
Bahussuto hotīti bahu assa sutaṃ hoti, navaṅgaṃ satthusāsanaṃ pāḷianusandhipubbāparavasena uggahitaṃ hotīti attho. Sutadharoti sutassa ādhārabhūto. Yassa hi ito gahitaṃ ito palāyati, chiddaghaṭe udakaṃ viya na tiṭṭhati, parisamajjhe ekaṃ suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā kathetuṃ vā vācetuṃ vā na sakkoti, ayaṃ na sutadharo nāma. Yassa pana uggahitaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggahitakālasadisameva hoti, dasapi vīsatipi vassāni sajjhāyaṃ akarontassa na nassati, ayaṃ sutadharo nāma. Sutasannicayoti sutassa sannicayabhūto. Yathā hi sutaṃ hadayamañjūsāya sannicitaṃ silāyaṃ lekhā viya, suvaṇṇaghaṭe pakkhittasīhavasā viya ca ajjhosāya tiṭṭhati, ayaṃ sutasannicayo nāma. Dhātāti ṭhitā paguṇā. Ekaccassa hi uggahitaṃ buddhavacanaṃ dhātaṃ paguṇaṃ niccalitaṃ na hoti, asukasuttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā kathehīti vutte sajjhāyitvā saṃsanditvā samanuggāhitvā jānissāmīti vadati. Ekaccassa dhātaṃ paguṇaṃ bhavaṅgasotasadisaṃ hoti, asukasuttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā kathehīti vutte uddharitvā tameva katheti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘dhātā’’ti.
“口诵习熟”,指依十经、十品、五十经等方式,以口诵而复习。“以意善察”,即用心观察。对于那些口诵复习过的佛语,于心中思惟时,处处清晰显现,犹如点亮大灯后,一切色像皆明了可见。正是对此,才说“口诵习熟,以意善察”。“以见善通达”,指从义理上、从缘由上,以智慧善加通达。“以圆满的句文”:此处将“句”本身称为“句文”,因它是表达义理的文辞。所说“圆满”,是指句文具足字母、不舍弃十种文句智。其义为,具备如此圆满的句文。再者,若有比丘在大众中说法时,放下正讲述的经或本生故事,转而引出其他能引发诘难之经,为其作喻,却舍弃了原本的义理;如此拿着经文,时而跳到此处,偏于一边,看准时机便结束。那么,所放置的经便被搁置了,他的讲说便称为“不圆满”。然而,若有比丘放下所讲经或本生故事后,一步也不偏离,顺随经文,不抹杀其连结与上下文,安立于师长所教导的方式,如以画笔细致描绘,如以深规测量水深,如良种骏马踏足而行,他的讲说才名为“圆满”。显示巴利原文
Vacasā paricitāti suttadasaka-vaggadasaka-paṇṇāsadasakānaṃ vasena vācāya sajjhāyitā. Manasānupekkhitāti cittena anupekkhitā, yassa vācāya sajjhāyitaṃ buddhavacanaṃ manasā cintentassa tattha tattha pākaṭaṃ hoti. Mahādīpaṃ jāletvā ṭhitassa rūpagataṃ viya paññāyati. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘vacasā paricitā manasānupekkhitā’’ti. Diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhāti atthato ca kāraṇato ca paññāya suppaṭividdhā. Parimaṇḍalehipadabyañjanehīti ettha padameva atthassa byañjanato padabyañjanaṃ, taṃ akkharapāripūriṃ katvā dasavidhabyañjanabuddhiyo aparihāpetvā vuttaṃ parimaṇḍalaṃ nāma hoti, evarūpehi padabyañjanehīti attho. Apica yo bhikkhu parisati dhammaṃ desento suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā nikkhapitvā aññaṃ upārambhakaraṃ suttaṃ āharati, tassa upamaṃ katheti, tadatthaṃ ohāreti, evamidaṃ gahetvā ettha khipanto ekapasseneva pariharanto kālaṃ ñatvā vuṭṭhahati. Nikkhittasuttaṃ pana nikkhattamattameva hoti, tassa kathā aparimaṇḍalā nāma hoti. Yo pana suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā nikkhipitvā bahi ekapadampi agantvā pāḷiyā anusandhiñca pubbāparañca amakkhento ācariyehi dinnanaye ṭhatvā tulikāya paricchindanto viya, gambhīramātikāya udakaṃ pesento viya, padaṃ koṭṭento sindhavājānīyo viya gacchati, tassa kathā parimaṇḍalā nāma hoti. Evarūpiṃ kathaṃ sandhāya – ‘‘parimaṇḍalehi padabyañjanehī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“相续连贯”:在此,有些比丘讲说佛法时,始讲某经或某本生故事,从开口之时起便急急躁躁,犹如钻木取火者般急促,又像在吞滚烫的食物一般慌张;他将经文前后脉络中已掌握的部分当作未掌握,未掌握的部分反当作已掌握,这好比在枯叶堆中赶蜥蜴,这里敲敲、那里打打,把它赶走便弃之不顾。又有比丘说法时,语速忽快忽慢,声音忽大忽小,犹如饿鬼身上燃起的火,时燃时熄;在这教法中,此人便称为“饿鬼火般的说法者”;当他看见听众想要起身离场时,又一遍遍地重新开讲。又有些说法者,讲到某处便停顿下来唉声叹气,如同边哭边讲一般说法。以上所有人的讲说,都叫作“不相续”。然而,若有比丘始讲一经后,稳定地安立于师长们所教导的方式,讲说如同河水奔流般不间断地推进,犹如从空中恒河倾泻而下的水流,毫不停歇地推进,他的讲说便是“相续连贯”的。正是针对这种情况,才说“相续连贯”。“为了断除随眠”,是指为了彻底断除七种随眠。“以这样的”:以像这样一位多闻的比丘,与同等多闻的几百位或几千位比丘一起。显示巴利原文
Anuppabandhehīti ettha yo bhikkhu dhammaṃ kathento suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā ārabhitvā āraddhakālato paṭṭhāya turitaturito araṇiṃ manthento viya, uṇhakhādanīyaṃ khādanto viya, pāḷiyā anusandhipubbāparesu gahitaṃ gahitameva aggahitaṃ aggahitameva ca katvā purāṇapaṇṇantaresu caramānaṃ godhaṃ uṭṭhapento viya tattha tattha paharanto osāpento ohāya gacchati. Yopi dhammaṃ kathento kālena sīghaṃ kālena dandhaṃ kālena mahāsaddaṃ kālena khuddakasaddaṃ karoti. Yathā petaggi kālena jalati, kālena nibbāyati, evameva idha petaggidhammakathiko nāma hoti, parisāya uṭṭhātukāmāya punappunaṃ ārabhati. Yopi kathento tattha tattha vitthāyati, nitthunanto kandanto viya katheti, imesaṃ sabbesampi kathā appabandhā nāma hoti. Yo pana suttaṃ ārabhitvā ācariyehi dinnanaye ṭhito acchinnadhāraṃ katvā nadīsotaṃ viya pavatteti, ākāsagaṅgato bhassamānaṃ udakaṃ viya nirantaraṃ kathaṃ pavatteti, tassa kathā anuppabandhā hoti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘anuppabandhehī’’ti. Anusayasamugghātāyāti sattannaṃ anusayānaṃ samugghātatthāya. Evarūpenāti evarūpena bahussutena bhikkhunā tathārūpeneva bhikkhusatena bhikkhusahassena vā saṅghāṭikaṇṇena vā saṅghāṭikaṇṇaṃ, pallaṅkena vā pallaṅkaṃ āhacca nisinnena gosiṅgasālavanaṃ sobheyya. Iminā nayena sabbavāresu attho veditabbo.
334 “以隐居为乐处”指他以隐居为乐处。“乐于隐居”指他乐于安住隐居。显示巴利原文
334. Paṭisallānaṃ assa ārāmoti paṭisallānārāmo. Paṭisallāne ratoti paṭisallānarato.
335 “千世界”即一千个世界界域。这是长老日常系念的所缘范围;但若他愿意,也能观见数千乃至更多的轮围世界。“登上最上妙楼”指登上了那座七层或九层的最胜妙楼顶层。“他能观见千辐轮之轮圈”是指:他打开楼阁周廊的窗户,观见那些竖立着、轮圈紧挨轮圈的千辐轮。对他而言,轮毂清晰可见,轮辐清晰可见,辐间空隙清晰可见,外轮圈也清晰可见。贤友,正是如此,这位具天眼的比丘以超越常人的天眼观照千世界。对他而言,在千个轮围世界之中,千座须弥山就像立在楼阁中人眼前的轮毂一般清晰显现;各大洲如同轮辐一般显现;洲上居住的人们如同辐间空隙一般显现;轮围山则如同外轮圈一般显现。显示巴利原文
335.Sahassaṃlokānanti sahassaṃ lokadhātūnaṃ. Ettakañhi therassa dhuvasevanaṃ āvajjanapaṭibaddhaṃ, ākaṅkhamāno pana thero anekānipi cakkavāḷasahassāni voloketiyeva. Uparipāsādavaragatoti sattabhūmakassa vā navabhūmakassa vā pāsādavarassa upari gato. Sahassaṃ nemimaṇḍalānaṃ volokeyyāti pāsādapariveṇe nābhiyā patiṭṭhitānaṃ nemivaṭṭiyā nemivaṭṭiṃ āhacca ṭhitānaṃ nemimaṇḍalānaṃ sahassaṃ vātapānaṃ vivaritvā olokeyya, tassa nābhiyopi pākaṭā honti, arāpi arantarānipi nemiyopi. Evameva kho, āvusoti, āvuso, evaṃ ayampi dibbacakkhuko bhikkhu dibbena cakkhunā atikkantamānusakena sahassaṃ lokānaṃ voloketi. Tassa pāsāde ṭhitapurisassa cakkanābhiyo viya cakkavāḷasahasse sinerusahassaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Arā viya dīpā pākaṭā honti. Arantarāni viya dīpaṭṭhitamanussā pākaṭā honti. Nemiyo viya cakkavāḷapabbatā pākaṭā honti.
336 “阿兰若者”指已受持阿兰若头陀支的比丘。其余类似的词句,道理亦同。显示巴利原文
336.Āraññikoti samādiṇṇaaraññadhutaṅgo. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.
337 「不会令人沮丧」是指不会使人陷于消沉。若有人将一有价值、有根据的问题提出,而应答者却无力解答,这便称为「令人沮丧」。他并不会这样做——此即其意涵所在。「能令法音流转」意为说法如同江河水流,自然顺畅地向前推进。显示巴利原文
337.No ca saṃsādentīti na osādenti. Sahetukañhi sakāraṇaṃ katvā pañhaṃ pucchituṃ vissajjitumpi asakkonto saṃsādeti nāma. Evaṃ na karontīti attho. Pavattinī hotīti nadīsotodakaṃ viya pavattati.
338 「以任何一种住等至而住」者,即以任一种世间住等至而住,或以任一种出世间住等至而住。显示巴利原文
338.Yāyavihārasamāpattiyāti yāya lokiyāya vihārasamāpattiyā, yāya lokuttarāya vihārasamāpattiyā.
339 「善哉,善哉,舍利弗」:此赞叹之词是对阿难尊者而发。然而,世尊此时是与舍利弗尊者交谈。这一道理普遍适用于各处。「正如阿难尊者当会如此解答」意谓:恰如阿难自己正确解答时那般作答,阿难所解说的,恰好是契合他自身、完全随顺其内心意趣的解答。阿难尊者本人即为多闻,且他心中怀有这样的意愿:「啊,但愿教法中的同梵行者们都能成为多闻之人。」何以如此?因为多闻之人能够明辨何为法、何非法,何为有过、何为无过,何为重、何为轻,何为可对治、何为不可对治。多闻之人转念回思自己所学过的佛语,便能了知:「此段讲的是戒,彼段讲的是定,彼段讲的是观,彼段讲的是道、果、涅槃。」于是,他在佛语中讲到戒处便圆满戒,讲到定处便圆满定,讲到观处便令观成熟,进而修习圣道,亲自证悟圣果。因此,长老心中才有此意趣:「啊,但愿同梵行者们能掌握一部、两部、三部、四部乃至五部经藏,如理思维,于讲戒、定、观等处圆满相应之修行,并依照次第亲自——」显示巴利原文
339.Sādhu sādhu sāriputtāti ayaṃ sādhukāro ānandattherassa dinno. Sāriputtattherena pana saddhiṃ bhagavā ālapati. Esa nayo sabbattha. Yathā taṃ ānandovāti yathā ānandova sammā byākaraṇamāno byākareyya, evaṃ byākataṃ ānandena attano anucchavikameva, ajjhāsayānurūpameva byākatanti attho. Ānandatthero hi attanāpi bahussuto, ajjhāsayopissa evaṃ hoti – ‘‘aho vata sāsane sabrahmacārī bahussutā bhaveyyu’’nti. Kasmā? Bahussutassa hi kappiyākappiyaṃ sāvajjānavajjaṃ, garukalahukaṃ satekicchātekicchaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Bahussuto uggahitabuddhavacanaṃ āvajjitvā imasmiṃ ṭhāne sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, imasmiṃ samādhi, imasmiṃ vipassanā, imasmiṃ maggaphalanibbānānīti sīlassa āgataṭṭhāne sīlaṃ pūretvā, samādhissa āgataṭṭhāne samādhiṃ pūretvā vipassanāya āgataṭṭhāne vipassanāgabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvā maggaṃ bhāvetvā phalaṃ sacchikaroti. Tasmā therassa evaṃ ajjhāsayo hoti – ‘‘aho vata sabrahmacārī ekaṃ vā dve vā tayo vā cattāro vā pañca vā nikāye uggahetvā āvajjantā sīlādīnaṃ āgataṭṭhānesu sīlādīni paripūretvā anukkamena maggaphalanibbānāni sacchikareyyu’’nti. Sesavāresupi eseva nayo.
340 尊者离婆多心意倾向禅那、乐于禅那,因此他这样想:「善哉!愿诸同梵行者皆能独自静坐,修习遍业处的前行,成就八等至,进而以禅那为近因增长观,最终亲证出世间法。」由此因缘,他这样解答。显示巴利原文
340. Āyasmā hi revato jhānajjhāsayo jhānābhirato, tasmāssa evaṃ hoti – ‘‘aho vata sabrahmacārī ekikā nisīditvā kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattetvā jhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā lokuttaradhammaṃ sacchikareyyu’’nti. Tasmā evaṃ byākāsi.
341 尊者阿那律具有天眼,他这样想:「善哉!愿诸同梵行者增长光明,以天眼观察数千世界众生的死与生,见轮回之怖畏而心生悚惧,进而增长观,亲证出世间法。」由此因缘,他这样解答。显示巴利原文
341. Āyasmā anuruddho dibbacakkhuko, tassa evaṃ hoti – ‘‘aho vata sabrahmacārī ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dibbena cakkhunā anekesu cakkavāḷasahassesu cavamāne ca upapajjamāne ca satte disvā vaṭṭabhayena cittaṃ saṃvejetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā lokuttaradhammaṃ sacchikareyyu’’nti. Tasmā evaṃ byākāsi.
342 尊者大迦叶倡导头陀行,他这样想:「善哉!愿诸同梵行者皆行头陀,以头陀支的威力摧伏对资具的渴爱,并抖落种种烦恼,增长观,亲证出世间法。」由此因缘,他这样解答。显示巴利原文
342. Āyasmā mahākassapo dhutavādo, tassa evaṃ hoti – ‘‘aho vata sabrahmacārī dhutavādā hutvā dhutaṅgānubhāvena paccayataṇhaṃ milāpetvā aparepi nānappakāre kilese dhunitvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā lokuttaradhammaṃ sacchikareyyu’’nti. Tasmā evaṃ byākāsi.
343 尊者大目犍连已到达禅定波罗蜜的顶峰。至于微细层面的心识间隔、蕴间隔、界间隔、处间隔,以及入禅那的次第、入所缘的次第、禅支的分辨、所缘的分辨、禅支的转起、所缘的转起、单方面增长与两方面增长等,这些唯有精通论藏的论师才能明了。不通达论藏的人说法时,分不清“这是己方宗义,这是对方宗义”。他本想阐明己方宗义,结果却阐明了对立宗义;本想阐明对立方宗义,结果却阐明了己方宗义,在法的微细判别上出了差错。而通达论藏的人,则能依己方宗义如实阐述己方宗义,依对立宗义如实阐述对立宗义,于法的微细判别中不出差错。因此,尊者心中这样期许:“啊,愿同梵行者们都能通达论藏,能在这微细之处深植智慧,增长观行,亲自证得出世间法。”正是由于这个缘故,他才如此解答。显示巴利原文
343. Āyasmā mahāmoggallāno samādhipāramiyā matthakaṃ patto, sukhumaṃ pana cittantaraṃ khandhantaraṃ dhātvantaraṃ āyatanantaraṃ jhānokkantikaṃ ārammaṇokkantikaṃ aṅgavavatthānaṃ ārammaṇavavatthānaṃ aṅgasaṅkanti ārammaṇasaṅkanti ekatovaḍḍhanaṃ ubhatovaḍḍhananti ābhidhammikadhammakathikasseva pākaṭaṃ. Anābhidhammiko hi dhammaṃ kathento – ‘‘ayaṃ sakavādo ayaṃ paravādo’’ti na jānāti. Sakavādaṃ dīpessāmīti paravādaṃ dīpeti, paravādaṃ dīpessāmīti sakavādaṃ dīpeti, dhammantaraṃ visaṃvādeti. Ābhidhammiko sakavādaṃ sakavādaniyāmeneva , paravādaṃ paravādaniyāmeneva dīpeti, dhammantaraṃ na visaṃvādeti. Tasmā therassa evaṃ hoti – ‘‘aho vata sabrahmacārī ābhidhammikā hutvā sukhumesu ṭhānesu ñāṇaṃ otāretvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā lokuttaradhammaṃ sacchikareyyu’’nti. Tasmā evaṃ byākāsi.
344 尊者舍利弗已到达智慧巴拉密的顶峰,也只有具足智慧的人,才能令心在自我掌控下运作,缺乏智慧的人则无法做到。缺乏智慧的人,反而会被生起的心所奴役,左冲右突,往往仅几天便还俗,招致不幸与毁灭。因此,尊者心中这样期许:“啊,愿同梵行者们都不为心所役,而能令心在自我掌控下运作,摧破一切于所缘境上摇摆、纷乱的扰动,不令心向外流逸分毫,增长观行,亲自证得出世间法。”正是由于这个缘故,他才如此解答。显示巴利原文
344. Āyasmā sāriputto paññāpāramiyā matthakaṃ patto, paññavāyeva ca cittaṃ attano vase vattetuṃ sakkoti, na duppañño. Duppañño hi uppannassa cittassa vase vattetvā ito cito ca vipphanditvāpi katipāheneva gihibhāvaṃ patvā anayabyasanaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā therassa evaṃ hoti – ‘‘aho vata sabrahmacārī acittavasikā hutvā cittaṃ attano vase vattetvā sabbānassa visevitavipphanditāni bhañjitvā īsakampi bahi nikkhamituṃ adentā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā lokuttaradhammaṃ sacchikareyyu’’nti. Tasmā evaṃ byākāsi.
345 「舍利弗,你们所有人的善说都是就某种方式而言的」,舍利弗,这句话的意思是:因为一个名为僧园的地方,确实有多闻比丘能令其庄严的理由,也有乐于禅那者、具天眼者、提倡头陀行者、通晓阿毗达摩者、能掌控自心者能令其庄严的理由。因此,你们所有人的善说,都是就某种方式,依这样那样的原因而说的善说,并非不善说。另外,「也听听我的」:就是请你们也听听我所说的话。「我不将破此结跏趺座」:意思是我不将破坏这个依四支精进而盘起的结跏趺座,也就是不放松、不放腿的意思。据说,这是世尊在智慧成熟圆满时,舍弃了王权的荣耀而出家,次第登上菩提道场后,依四支精进而盘坐于不败结跏趺座,坚固决意而坐,摧破三魔之顶,在破晓时分,震响了十千世界,证得了一切知智。这句话是针对他自己的大菩提座而说的。再者,这也是出于慈悯未来的众生,为了展示以修行为核心的凡夫善士典范而说的。因为世尊清楚地预见到:「未来世,有这样志趣的善男子会这样反思:『世尊在开示《大牛角经》时,在这里说:“舍利弗,有比丘在午后……像这样的比丘,舍利弗,才能让牛角娑罗林更加庄严。”我们应当领会世尊的意趣。』他们会在午后从托钵乞食回来,依四支精进而坚固决意,心想:『未证得阿罗汉果,我绝不破此结跏趺座。』从而精进修习沙门法。他们如此修行,不久就能终结生老死。」正是出于对这一切未来众生的慈悯,为了展示以修行为核心的凡夫善士典范,世尊才这样说。「舍利弗,像这样的比丘,确实可以直接了当地说,他用这样的方式让牛角娑罗林更加庄严了。」就这样,随顺经文的脉络,世尊结束了这次开示。显示巴利原文
345.Sabbesaṃ vo, sāriputta, subhāsitaṃ pariyāyenāti sāriputta, yasmā saṅghārāmassa nāma bahussutabhikkhūhipi sobhanakāraṇaṃ atthi, jhānābhiratehipi, dibbacakkhukehipi, dhutavādehipi, ābhidhammikehipi, acittavasikehipi sobhanakāraṇaṃ atthi. Tasmā sabbesaṃ vo subhāsitaṃ pariyāyena, tena tena kāraṇena subhāsitameva, no dubbhāsitaṃ. Apica mamapi suṇāthāti apica mamapi vacanaṃ suṇātha. Na tāvāhaṃ imaṃ pallaṅkaṃ bhindissāmīti na tāva ahaṃ imaṃ caturaṅgavīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhāya ābhujitaṃ pallaṅkaṃ bhindissāmi, na mocessāmīti attho. Idaṃ kira bhagavā paripākagate ñāṇe rajjasiriṃ pahāya katābhinikkhamano anupubbena bodhimaṇḍaṃ āruyha caturaṅgavīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhāya aparājitapallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā daḷhasamādāno hutvā nisinno tiṇṇaṃ mārānaṃ matthakaṃ bhinditvā paccūsasamaye dasasahassilokadhātuṃ unnādento sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ paṭivijjhi, taṃ attano mahābodhipallaṅkaṃ sandhāya evamāha. Apica pacchimaṃ janataṃ anukampamānopi paṭipattisāraṃ puthujjanakalyāṇakaṃ dassento evamāha. Passati hi bhagavā – ‘‘anāgate evaṃ ajjhāsayā kulaputtā iti paṭisañcikkhissanti, ‘bhagavā mahāgosiṅgasuttaṃ kathento idha, sāriputta, bhikkhu pacchābhattaṃ…pe… evarūpena kho, sāriputta, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṃ sobheyyāti āha, mayaṃ bhagavato ajjhāsayaṃ gaṇhissāmā’ti pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantā caturaṅgavīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhāya daḷhasamādānā hutvā ‘arahattaṃ appatvā imaṃ pallaṅkaṃ na bhindissāmā’ti samaṇadhammaṃ kātabbaṃ maññissanti, te evaṃ paṭipannā katipāheneva jātijarāmaraṇassa antaṃ karissantī’’ti, imaṃ pacchimaṃ janataṃ anukampamāno paṭipattisāraṃ puthujjanakalyāṇakaṃ dassento evamāha. Evarūpena kho, sāriputta, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṃ sobheyyāti, sāriputta, evarūpena bhikkhunā nippariyāyeneva gosiṅgasālavanaṃ sobheyyāti yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesīti.
三、《大牧牛人经》的注释解说显示巴利原文
3. Mahāgopālakasuttavaṇṇanā
346 “如是我闻”等即是《大牧牛人经》。关于这部经,有三种讲说方式:一管式、四方形式、安坐式。其中,先诵出经文,再逐一解释每个词句的意义,称为“一管式”。先讲愚牧牛人,再讲愚比丘,接着讲智牧牛人,再讲智比丘,如此结成四组而讲说,称为“四方形式”。先讲愚牧牛人而到达终点,先讲愚比丘而到达终点,先讲智牧牛人而到达终点,先讲智比丘而到达终点,称为“安坐式”。这是此处一切老师所惯用的方式。显示巴利原文
346.Evaṃme sutanti mahāgopālakasuttaṃ. Tattha tisso kathā ekanāḷikā, caturassā, nisinnavattikāti. Tattha pāḷiṃ vatvā ekekapadassa atthakathanaṃ ekanāḷikā nāma. Apaṇḍitaṃ gopālakaṃ dassetvā, apaṇḍitaṃ bhikkhuṃ dassetvā, paṇḍitaṃ gopālakaṃ dassetvā, paṇḍitaṃ bhikkhuṃ dassetvāti catukkaṃ bandhitvā kathanaṃ caturassā nāma. Apaṇḍitaṃ gopālakaṃ dassetvā pariyosānagamanaṃ, apaṇḍitaṃ bhikkhuṃ dassetvā pariyosānagamanaṃ, paṇḍitaṃ gopālakaṃ dassetvā pariyosānagamanaṃ, paṇḍitaṃ bhikkhuṃ dassetvā pariyosānagamananti ayaṃ nisinnavattikā nāma. Ayaṃ idha sabbācariyānaṃ āciṇṇā.
“诸比丘,以十一法”,即以十一种不善分。“牛群”指牛的群体。“护持”即统领而游走。“令增长”即令其得以增长。“此处”指此世间。“不辨色”是指从数量上或从颜色上都不能了知。从数量上不知,即不知道自己的牛群有百头、千头等数目。当牛被抢或走失时,他虽然点数,知道“今天少了这么多”,却不肯走过两三个村落或深入森林去寻找;当自己的牛混入别家牛群时,虽然点数也知道“这些不是我们的牛”,却不用棍棒将它们驱出。如此,他所丢失的牛便永远失去了。当牛主人们看见他驱赶着别人的牛,便呵斥道:“你这么久都抓着我们的母牛!”随即把自己的牛带走。他的牛群便衰减,也被排除在五种牛味的受用之外。从颜色上不知,即不知道“这些牛是白色,这些是红色,这些是黑色,这些是斑驳,这些是青色”。当牛被抢……(中略)……也被排除在五种牛味受用之外。显示巴利原文
Ekādasahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehīti ekādasahi aguṇakoṭṭhāsehi. Gogaṇanti gomaṇḍalaṃ. Pariharitunti pariggahetvā vicarituṃ. Phātiṃ kātunti vaḍḍhiṃ āpādetuṃ. Idhāti imasmiṃ loke. Na rūpaññū hotīti gaṇanato vā vaṇṇato vā rūpaṃ na jānāti. Gaṇanato na jānāti nāma attano gunnaṃ sataṃ vā sahassaṃ vāti saṅkhyaṃ na jānāti. So gāvīsu haṭāsu vā palātāsu vā gogaṇaṃ gaṇetvā, ajja ettikā na dissantīti dve tīṇi gāmantarāni vā aṭaviṃ vā vicaranto na pariyesati, aññesaṃ gāvīsu attano gogaṇaṃ paviṭṭhāsupi gogaṇaṃ gaṇetvā, ‘‘imā ettikā gāvo na amhāka’’nti yaṭṭhiyā pothetvā na nīharati, tassa naṭṭhā gāviyo naṭṭhāva honti. Paragāviyo gahetvā vicarantaṃ gosāmikā disvā, ‘‘ayaṃ ettakaṃ kālaṃ amhākaṃ dhenuṃ gaṇhātī’’ti tajjetvā attano gāviyo gahetvā gacchanti. Tassa gogaṇopi parihāyati, pañcagorasaparibhogatopi paribāhiro hoti. Vaṇṇato na jānāti nāma – ‘‘ettikā gāvo setā, ettikā rattā, ettikā kāḷā, ettikā kabarā ettikā nīlā’’ti na jānāti, so gāvīsu haṭāsu vā…pe… pañcagorasaparibhogatopi paribāhiro hoti.
“不善于相”:不知牛身上所刻的种种印记,如弓、枪、矛等。当牛被抢或走失时,他说:“今天不见有某相某相的牛。”……(中略)……亦被排除在五种牛味受用之外。显示巴利原文
Na lakkhaṇakusalo hotīti gāvīnaṃ sarīre kataṃ dhanusattisūlādibhedaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ na jānāti , so gāvīsu haṭāsu vā palātāsu vā ajja asukalakkhaṇā ca asukalakkhaṇā ca gāvo na dissanti…pe… pañcagorasaparibhogatopi paribāhiro hoti.
“不除蝇卵”:牛被树桩、荆棘等刺伤之处会生疮。青蝇在上面产卵,这些卵便称为“蝇卵”。应当用棍子将它们除去,再施以医药。愚牧牛人不这样做,因此说他是“不除蝇卵的人”。他的牛疮便因此增大、加深,小虫进入腹中,牛因病所逼,既不能足量吃草,也不能饮水。于是牛乳断绝,公牛的脚力衰退,两者都有生命危险。如此,他的牛群便衰减,从五种牛味的受用上也被排除在外。显示巴利原文
Na āsāṭikaṃ hāretāti gunnaṃ khāṇukaṇṭakādīhi pahaṭaṭṭhānesu vaṇo hoti. Tattha nīlamakkhikā aṇḍakāni pātenti, tesaṃ āsāṭikāti nāma. Tāni daṇḍena apanetvā bhesajjaṃ dātabbaṃ hoti. Bālo gopālako tathā na karoti, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘na āsāṭikaṃ hāretā hotī’’ti. Tassa gunnaṃ vaṇā vaḍḍhanti, gambhīrā honti, pāṇakā kucchiṃ pavisanti, gāvo gelaññābhibhūtā neva yāvadatthaṃ tiṇāni khādituṃ, na pānīyaṃ pātuṃ sakkonti. Tattha gunnaṃ khīraṃ chijjati, goṇānaṃ javo hāyati, ubhayesaṃ jīvitantarāyo hoti. Evamassa gogaṇopi parihāyati, pañcagorasatopi paribāhiro hoti.
“不包扎疮”:如前述方式,牛身上所生之疮,应在给药后用树皮或布片包扎覆盖。愚牧牛人不这样做,那些牛的疮便流出脓液,牛只相互摩擦,由此其余牛也只也生出疮来。牛就这般因病所逼,既不能足量吃草……(中略)……被排除在外。显示巴利原文
Na vaṇaṃ paṭicchādetā hotīti gunnaṃ vuttanayeneva sañjāto vaṇo bhesajjaṃ datvā vākena vā cīrakena vā bandhitvā paṭicchādetabbo hoti. Bālo gopālako tathā na karoti, athassa gunnaṃ vaṇehi yūsā paggharanti, tā aññamaññaṃ nighaṃsenti, tena aññesampi vaṇā jāyanti. Evaṃ gāvo gelaññābhibhūtā neva yāvadatthaṃ tiṇāni khādituṃ…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
“不作烟”:在雨季,虻蚊等猖獗之时,当牛群进入牛栏,便应当在各处生烟。愚牧牛人不做这件事。牛群整夜被虻等逼恼,不得睡眠,第二天便在林中各处树根等处躺卧睡眠,既不能足量吃草……(中略)……从五种牛味的受用上也被排除在外。显示巴利原文
Na dhūmaṃ kattā hotīti antovasse ḍaṃsamakasādīnaṃ ussannakāle gogaṇe vajaṃ paviṭṭhe tattha tattha dhūmo kātabbo hoti, apaṇḍito gopālako taṃ na karoti. Gogaṇo sabbarattiṃ ḍaṃsādīhi upadduto niddaṃ alabhitvā punadivase araññe tattha tattha rukkhamūlādīsu nipajjitvā niddāyati, neva yāvadatthaṃ tiṇāni khādituṃ…pe… pañcagorasaparibhogatopi paribāhiro hoti.
「不知浅滩」:指他不知道浅滩哪里平坦、哪里险恶,何处安全、何处有危险。他把牛群赶到不合适的浅滩。牛在布满石块等的险恶浅滩上行走,脚会受伤;若误入有鳄鱼等捕获者的深水浅滩,便会被抓住。于是,他就落到这样的境地:‘今天少了这么多头牛,今天又少了这么多头……’如此,牛群逐渐衰减,他自己也被排除在五种牛味的享受之外。显示巴利原文
Na titthaṃ jānātīti titthaṃ samanti vā visamanti vā sagāhanti vā niggāhanti vā na jānāti, so atitthena gāviyo otāreti. Tāsaṃ visamatitthe pāsāṇādīni akkamantīnaṃ pādā bhijjanti, sagāhaṃ gambhīraṃ titthaṃ otiṇṇā kumbhīlādayo gāhā gaṇhanti. Ajja ettikā gāvo naṭṭhā, ajja ettikāti vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Evamassa gogaṇopi parihāyati, pañcagorasatopi paribāhiro hoti.
「不知饮水」:指他不知道牛群中哪些饮了水、哪些未饮。牧牛人理当了知:‘这头牛已饮水,这头未饮;这头在饮水处得到了位置,这头没有。’然而这牧牛人白天在林中守护牛群之后,心想‘我带它们去喝水吧’,便领着牛群去河流或湖泊。到了那里,大公牛、小公牛和强壮的母牛用角或胁部把弱牛和老牛撞开,为自己腾出位置,踏入齐膝深的水中恣意畅饮。其余的牛得不到位置,只能站在岸边喝些混着泥浆的水,或者一口也喝不到。随后牧牛人用棍棒驱打它们,再把它们赶回林中。在那里,没有喝到水的牛焦渴难耐,无法吃饱草料。于是牛乳断流,牛的精力衰退……他也就被排除在外了。显示巴利原文
Napītaṃ jānātīti pītampi apītampi na jānāti. Gopālakena hi ‘‘imāya gāviyā pītaṃ, imāya na pītaṃ, imāya pānīyatitthe okāso laddho, imāya na laddho’’ti evaṃ pītāpītaṃ jānitabbaṃ hoti. Ayaṃ pana divasabhāgaṃ araññe gogaṇaṃ rakkhitvā pānīyaṃ pāyessāmīti nadiṃ vā taḷākaṃ vā gahetvā gacchati. Tattha mahāusabhā ca anuusabhā ca balavagāviyo ca dubbalāni ceva mahallakāni ca gorūpāni siṅgehi vā phāsukāhi vā paharitvā attano okāsaṃ katvā ūruppamāṇaṃ udakaṃ pavisitvā yathākāmaṃ pivanti. Avasesā okāsaṃ alabhamānā tīre ṭhatvā kalalamissakaṃ udakaṃ pivanti, apītā eva vā honti. Atha ne gopālako piṭṭhiyaṃ paharitvā puna araññaṃ paveseti, tattha apītagāviyo pipāsāya sukkhamānā yāvadatthaṃ tiṇāni khādituṃ na sakkonti, tattha gunnaṃ khīraṃ chijjati, goṇānaṃ javo hāyati…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
「不知道路」:他不知道‘这条路平坦安稳,那条路崎岖、危险可怖’。他避开平坦安稳的路,反而把牛群引上另一条路。在那里,牛群被狮子、老虎等猛兽的气味摧毁,或遭盗贼之灾厄侵袭,像受惊的鹿一样昂首僵立,既不能饱食草料,也无法饮水。于是牛乳断绝……他也被排除在外。显示巴利原文
Na vīthiṃ jānātīti ‘‘ayaṃ maggo samo khemo, ayaṃ visamo sāsaṅko sappaṭibhayo’’ti na jānāti. So samaṃ khemaṃ maggaṃ vajjetvā gogaṇaṃ itaraṃ maggaṃ paṭipādeti, tattha gāvo sīhabyagghādīnaṃ gandhena coraparissayena vā abhibhūtā bhantamigasappaṭibhāgā gīvaṃ ukkhipitvā tiṭṭhanti, neva yāvadatthaṃ tiṇāni khādanti, na pānīyaṃ pivanti, tattha gunnaṃ khīraṃ chijjati…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
所谓“不善于行境”:牧牛人本应善知放牧的区域,通晓五日或七日轮换的规矩。若在某处放过牛群,第二天便不该再去。因为庞大的牛群反复踩踏过的地方,如同鼓面般光秃,寸草不生,连水也会变得浑浊。因此,应等到第五天或第七天,才能再去那里放牧,这样草才能重新长出来,水也才能澄清。可是这个牧牛人不知这五日、七日轮换的道理,日复一日地守在同一处放牛。牛群吃不到青草,只能啃干草、喝混杂泥浆的水。如此一来,牛乳便枯竭了……他也就被排除在外。显示巴利原文
Na gocarakusalo hotīti gopālakena hi gocarakusalena bhavitabbaṃ, pañcāhikavāro vā sattāhikavāro vā jānitabbo, ekadisāya gogaṇaṃ cāretvā punadivase tattha na cāretabbo. Mahatā hi gogaṇena ciṇṇaṭṭhānaṃ bheritalaṃ viya suddhaṃ hoti nittiṇaṃ, udakampi āluḷīyati. Tasmā pañcame vā sattame vā divase puna tattha cāretuṃ vaṭṭati, ettakena hi tiṇampi paṭiviruhati, udakampi pasīdati. Ayaṃ pana imaṃ pañcāhikavāraṃ vā sattāhikavāraṃ vā na jānāti, divase divase rakkhitaṭṭhāneyeva rakkhati. Athassa gogaṇo haritatiṇaṃ na labhati, sukkhatiṇaṃ khādanto kalalamissakaṃ udakaṃ pivati, tattha gunnaṃ khīraṃ chijjati…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
所谓“挤奶不留剩余”:明智的牧牛人在小牛犊的血肉未长结实之前,应当留出一两个乳头不挤,做到挤奶而留有剩余。可这个人却挤得一滴不剩,什么也没给小牛留下。吃奶的牛犊因渴望母乳而干瘦,站立不稳,颤颤巍巍地倒在母牛面前死去。母牛见了牛犊,心想:“我的孩子连自己母亲的一口奶都尝不到啊!”由于丧子之痛,它既无心吃草,也喝不下水,乳汁也由此断绝。这样一来,牛群便衰败了,而他本人也被排除在五种牛乳制品之外。显示巴利原文
Anavasesadohī ca hotīti paṇḍitagopālakena yāva vacchakassa maṃsalohitaṃ saṇṭhāti, tāva ekaṃ dve thane ṭhapetvā sāvasesadohinā bhavitabbaṃ. Ayaṃ vacchakassa kiñci anavasesetvā duhati, khīrapako vaccho khīrapipāsāya sukkhati, saṇṭhātuṃ asakkonto kampamāno mātu purato patitvā kālaṅkaroti. Mātā puttakaṃ disvā, ‘‘mayhaṃ puttako attano mātukhīraṃ pātumpi na labhatī’’ti puttasokena na yāvadatthaṃ tiṇāni khādituṃ, na pānīyaṃ pātuṃ sakkoti, thanesu khīraṃ chijjati. Evamassa gogaṇopi parihāyati, pañcagorasatopi paribāhiro hoti.
那些为牛群提供父亲般依靠的人,称为“牛群之父”。那些随心所欲带领牛群行走的牛,称为“牛群向导”。所谓“不加以特别恭敬”:明智的牧牛人对这样的领头公牛,本应给予特别的恭敬——供给最上等的牛食,用香与五指印装饰它,为它戴上花环,在牛角上套上金银的套子,夜里点亮灯火,让它睡在布幔之下。可是这个人,对公牛连丝毫的敬意都不表示。公牛得不到特别的恭敬,便不用心守护牛群,也不去阻挡危险。这样一来,牛群便衰败了,而他本人也被排除在五种牛乳制品之外。显示巴利原文
Gunnaṃ pituṭṭhānaṃ karontīti gopitaro. Gāvo pariṇayanti yathāruciṃ gahetvā gacchantīti gopariṇāyakā. Na atirekapūjāyāti paṇḍito hi gopālako evarūpe usabhe atirekapūjāya pūjeti, paṇītaṃ gobhattaṃ deti, gandhapañcaṅgulikehi maṇḍeti, mālaṃ pilandheti, siṅge suvaṇṇarajatakosake ca dhāreti, rattiṃ dīpaṃ jāletvā celavitānassa heṭṭhā sayāpeti. Ayaṃ pana tato ekasakkārampi na karoti, usabhā atirekapūjaṃ alabhamānā gogaṇaṃ na rakkhanti, parissayaṃ na vārenti. Evamassa gogaṇo parihāyati, pañcagorasato paribāhiro hoti.
347 「于此」是指在此教法中。「不知色」是指,对于所说的色——即「四大与四大所造色」——他不能以两种方式了知:从计数方面及从生起方面。从计数方面不了知,是指他不知道圣典中所说的二十五个色聚,即:眼处、耳处、鼻处、舌处、身处、色处、声处、香处、味处、触处、女根、男根、命根、身表、语表、虚空界、水界、色轻快性、色柔软性、色适业性、色积集、色相续、色老性、色无常性、段食。正如那位牧牛人从计数方面不了知牛的色身,这位比丘也是如此。由于从计数方面不了知色,他便不能把握色、不能确立非色、不能总括地把握色与非色、不能观察缘、不能安立共相、不能将业处修至圆满。正如那位牧牛人的牛群不增长,在此教法中,这位比丘在戒、定、观、道、果、涅槃上也不增长;又如那位牧牛人被排除在五种牛乳制品之外,这位比丘也就被排除在五种法蕴之外,即:无学戒蕴、无学定蕴、无学慧蕴、无学解脱蕴、无学解脱知见蕴。显示巴利原文
347.Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Na rūpaññū hotīti, ‘‘cattāri mahābhūtāni catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyarūpa’’nti evaṃ vuttarūpaṃ dvīhākārehi na jānāti gaṇanato vā samuṭṭhānato vā. Gaṇanato na jānāti nāma, ‘‘cakkhāyatanaṃ, sota-ghāna-jivhā-kāyāyatanaṃ, rūpa-sadda-gandha-rasa-phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ, itthindriyaṃ, purisindriyaṃ, jīvitindriyaṃ, kāyaviññatti, vacīviññatti, ākāsadhātu, āpodhātu, rūpassa lahutā, mudutā, kammaññatā, upacayo, santati, jaratā, rūpassa aniccatā, kabaḷīkāro āhāro’’ti evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āgatā pañcavīsati rūpakoṭṭhāsāti na jānāti. Seyyathāpi so gopālako gaṇanato gunnaṃ rūpaṃ na jānāti, tathūpamo ayaṃ bhikkhu. So gaṇanato rūpaṃ ajānanto rūpaṃ pariggahetvā arūpaṃ vavatthapetvā rūpārūpaṃ pariggahetvā paccayaṃ sallakkhetvā lakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetuṃ na sakkoti. So yathā tassa gopālakassa gogaṇo na vaḍḍhati, evaṃ imasmiṃ sāsane sīlasamādhivipassanāmaggaphalanibbānehi na vaḍḍhati, yathā ca so gopālako pañcahi gorasehi paribāhiro hoti, evaṃ asekkhena sīlakkhandhena, asekkhena samādhi, paññā, vimutti, vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhenāti pañcahi dhammakkhandhehi paribāhiro hoti.
从生起方面不了知,是指他不了知:「如此量的色由一种生起,如此量的色由二种生起,如此量的色由三种生起,如此量的色由四种生起,如此量的色不从任何处生起。」正如那位牧牛人从颜色上不了知牛的色身,这位比丘也是如此。由于从生起方面不了知色,他便不能把握色、不能确立非色……乃至……被排除在外。显示巴利原文
Samuṭṭhānato na jānāti nāma, ‘‘ettakaṃ rūpaṃ ekasamuṭṭhānaṃ, ettakaṃ dvisamuṭṭhānaṃ, ettakaṃ tisamuṭṭhānaṃ, ettakaṃ catusamuṭṭhānaṃ, ettakaṃ na kutocisamuṭṭhātī’’ti na jānāti. Seyyathāpi so gopālako vaṇṇato gunnaṃ rūpaṃ na jānāti, tathūpamo ayaṃ bhikkhu. So samuṭṭhānato rūpaṃ ajānanto rūpaṃ pariggahetvā arūpaṃ vavatthapetvā…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
「不善于相」是指,他不了知「愚者以业为相,贤者以业为相」——如此所说的善与不善业即是贤者与愚者之相。由于不了知,他便不远离愚者、不亲近贤者;不远离愚者、不亲近贤者,他便不了知适宜与不适宜、善与不善、有过失与无过失、重与轻、可治疗与不可治疗、因与非因;不了知这些,他便不能摄取业处而令之增长。正如那位牧牛人的牛群不增长,在此教法中,这位比丘在如前所述的戒等上也不增长;又如那位牧牛人被排除在五种牛乳制品之外,这位比丘也就被排除在五种法蕴之外。显示巴利原文
Na lakkhaṇakusalo hotīti kammalakkhaṇo bālo, kammalakkhaṇo paṇḍitoti evaṃ vuttaṃ kusalākusalaṃ kammaṃ paṇḍitabālalakkhaṇanti na jānāti. So evaṃ ajānanto bāle vajjetvā paṇḍite na sevati, bāle vajjetvā paṇḍite asevanto kappiyākappiyaṃ kusalākusalaṃ sāvajjānavajjaṃ garukalahukaṃ satekicchaatekicchaṃ kāraṇākāraṇaṃ na jānāti; taṃ ajānanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti. So yathā tassa gopālakassa gogaṇo na vaḍḍhati, evaṃ imasmiṃ sāsane yathāvuttehi sīlādīhi na vaḍḍhati, gopālako viya ca pañcahi gorasehi pañcahi dhammakkhandhehi paribāhiro hoti.
「不驱除牛虻」是指,对于那些生起的欲寻等,如所说不予驱除,不驱除这些不善寻之牛虻,他便为寻所奴役而四处游走,不能执取业处加以增长。正如那个牧牛人……乃至……被排除在外。显示巴利原文
Na āsāṭikaṃ hāretā hotīti uppannaṃ kāmavitakkanti evaṃ vutte kāmavitakkādike na vinodeti, so imaṃ akusalavitakkaṃ āsāṭikaṃ ahāretvā vitakkavasiko hutvā vicaranto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti, so yathā tassa gopālakassa…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
「不隐藏伤口」是指,如同以眼见色后成为执取相者,于一切所缘之中执取诸相。正如那个牧牛人不隐藏伤口,他同样不成就防护。他根门敞开而游走,不能执取业处加以增长……乃至……被排除在外。显示巴利原文
Na vaṇaṃ paṭicchādetā hotīti cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā nimittaggāhī hotītiādinā nayena sabbārammaṇesu nimittaṃ gaṇhanto yathā so gopālako vaṇaṃ na paṭicchādeti, evaṃ saṃvaraṃ na sampādeti. So vivaṭadvāro vicaranto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
「不制造烟」是指,他不像牧牛人制造烟那样制造说法之烟,即不说法、不诵经、不共座谈论、不作随喜。因此,人们不知他是多闻而有功德者,由于不知功德与过失,便不以四资具来摄受他。他因资具匮乏而疲惫,不能修习佛语,不能圆满行持,不能执取业处加以增长……乃至……被排除在外。显示巴利原文
Na dhūmaṃ kattā hotīti so gopālako dhūmaṃ viya dhammadesanādhūmaṃ na karoti, dhammakathaṃ vā sarabhaññaṃ vā upanisinnakathaṃ vā anumodanaṃ vā na karoti . Tato naṃ manussā bahussuto guṇavāti na jānanti, te guṇāguṇaṃ ajānantā catūhi paccayehi saṅgahaṃ na karonti . So paccayehi kilamamāno buddhavacanaṃ sajjhāyaṃ kātuṃ vattapaṭipattiṃ pūretuṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
“不知渡口”是指,他不前往亲近作为渡口的多闻比丘;即便前往亲近,也不如此遍问、遍审:“尊者,这些文句应如何安立?这话说的是什么意思?此处圣典说什么?此处义理指明什么?”不使他了知,就是这个意思。对于这样不遍问的人,那些多闻比丘既不开启未开启的,也不分别开示,不把晦涩处变得明了,不让不明显的事变得清楚。并且在诸多疑惑处法中,对于种种疑惑,连一个疑惑也不为他消除。因为疑惑本身就称为疑惑处法。这里的意思是一个疑惑也不去除。他这样不亲近多闻的渡口,自己有疑惑,不能取业处而令其增长。正如那牧牛人不知渡口,同样地,这位比丘也不知法渡口,因为不知道而在不适当的领域发问:去亲近阿毗达摩师却问开遮,去亲近持律者却问色与非色的区分。他们在不适当的领域被问,不能讲说。他自己有疑惑,不能取业处而令其增长……乃至……成为匮乏者。显示巴利原文
Na titthaṃ jānātīti titthabhūte bahussutabhikkhū na upasaṅkamati, upasaṅkamanto, ‘‘idaṃ, bhante, byañjanaṃ kathaṃ ropetabbaṃ, imassa bhāsitassa ko attho, imasmiṃ ṭhāne pāḷi kiṃ vadeti, imasmiṃ ṭhāne attho kiṃ dīpetī’’ti evaṃ na paripucchati na paripañhati, na jānāpetīti attho. Tassa te evaṃ aparipucchato avivaṭañceva na vivaranti, bhājetvā na dassenti, anuttānīkatañca na uttānīkaronti, apākaṭaṃ na pākaṭaṃ karonti. Anekavihitesu ca kaṅkhāṭhāniyesu dhammesūti anekavidhāsu kaṅkhāsu ekaṃ kaṅkhampi na paṭivinodenti. Kaṅkhā eva hi kaṅkhāṭhāniyā dhammā nāma. Tattha ekaṃ kaṅkhampi na nīharantīti attho. So evaṃ bahussutatitthaṃ anupasaṅkamitvā sakaṅkho kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti. Yathā ca so gopālako titthaṃ na jānāti, evaṃ ayampi bhikkhu dhammatitthaṃ na jānāti, ajānanto avisaye pañhaṃ pucchati, abhidhammikaṃ upasaṅkamitvā kappiyākappiyaṃ pucchati, vinayadharaṃ upasaṅkamitvā rūpārūpaparicchedaṃ pucchati. Te avisaye puṭṭhā kathetuṃ na sakkonti, so attanā sakaṅkho kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
“不知饮水者”:如同那牧牛人不知可饮与不可饮,他既不知也不获得与法相应的欢悦,不以闻所成福行事为依处感受利益,不去听闻法会,不恭敬听法;安坐时便瞌睡、说闲话、心不在焉。如此不恭敬听法,他便不能取业处令其增长……乃至……成为匮乏者。显示巴利原文
Na pītaṃ jānātīti yathā so gopālako pītāpītaṃ na jānāti, evaṃ dhammūpasañhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ na jānāti na labhati, savanamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthuṃ nissāya ānisaṃsaṃ na vindati, dhammassavanaggaṃ gantvā sakkaccaṃ na suṇāti, nisinno niddāyati, kathaṃ katheti, aññavihitako hoti, so sakkaccaṃ dhammaṃ asuṇanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
“不知道路者”:正如那牧牛人不知路与非路,他不如实了知‘此是世间,此是出世间’的圣八支道。由于不了知,他执著于世间道,而不能证得出世间道……乃至……成为匮乏者。显示巴利原文
Na vīthiṃ jānātīti so gopālako maggāmaggaṃ viya, – ‘‘ayaṃ lokiyo ayaṃ lokuttaro’’ti ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ yathābhūtaṃ na pajānāti. Ajānanto lokiyamagge abhinivisitvā lokuttaraṃ nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
“不善于行境者”:如同牧牛人在五日一轮、七日一轮的放牧中,不如实地了知四念处中“这些是世间,这些是出世间”。因为不了知,便无法让自己的智慧在微细之处运作,而执著于世间念处,不能证得出世间……乃至成为匮乏者。显示巴利原文
Na gocarakusalo hotīti so gopālako pañcāhikavāre sattāhikavāre viya cattāro satipaṭṭhāne , ‘‘ime lokiyā ime lokuttarā’’ti yathābhūtaṃ na pajānāti. Ajānanto sukhumaṭṭhānesu attano ñāṇaṃ carāpetvā lokiyasatipaṭṭhāne abhinivisitvā lokuttaraṃ nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
“成为无残留挤乳者”,是指在接受资具时不知限量,无有余留地挤取。而释义中说:“人们拿来并邀请”——即拿物品来并邀请。这里有二种拿来:言语的拿来与资具的拿来。言语的拿来,即人们来到比丘面前邀请说:“尊者,若需什么,请说。”资具的拿来,即人们拿着布匹、油、糖等来到比丘面前说:“尊者,无论需要什么,请取用。”此处,比丘不知量,是指对于这些资具不知限量,不依照《火车经》所说的方式:“应知施主之意,应知所施法之性质,应知自身之能力”,不取适量的部分,而是凡是他们带来的,全都收取,这就是意思所在。因此,人们感到后悔,不再拿来邀请。他因资具匮乏而受困,不能执取业处令其增长……乃至成为匮乏者。显示巴利原文
Anavasesadohī ca hotīti paṭiggahaṇe mattaṃ ajānanto anavasesaṃ duhati. Niddesavāre panassa abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavārentīti abhiharitvā pavārenti. Ettha dve abhihārā vācābhihāro ca paccayābhihāro ca. Vācābhihāro nāma manussā bhikkhussa santikaṃ gantvā, ‘‘vadeyyātha, bhante, yenattho’’ti pavārenti. Paccayābhihāro nāma vatthādīni vā telaphāṇitādīni vā gahetvā bhikkhussa santikaṃ gantvā, ‘‘gaṇhatha, bhante, yāvatakena attho’’ti vadanti. Tatra bhikkhu mattaṃ na jānātīti bhikkhu tesu paccayesu pamāṇaṃ na jānāti, – ‘‘dāyakassa vaso veditabbo, deyyadhammassa vaso veditabbo, attano thāmo veditabbo’’ti rathavinīte vuttanayena pamāṇayuttaṃ aggahetvā yaṃ āharanti, taṃ sabbaṃ gaṇhātīti attho. Manussā vippaṭisārino na puna abhiharitvā pavārenti. So paccayehi kilamanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
“不以额外供养礼敬者”:如同牧牛人不对大公牛格外恭敬,该比丘也同样不以或明或暗的慈身业等额外供养来礼敬那些长老比丘。因此,长老们心想:“这些比丘对我们没有尊重恭敬。”便不以两种摄受摄受新学比丘:不以财物摄受——即不给予衣服、钵、钵中之物或住所;即便他们疲倦憔悴,也不看望照顾;不教授他们学习巴利圣典、注释书、法说结集及密典。新学比丘从长老那里全然得不到这两种摄受,无法立足于此教法。如同牧牛人的牛群不增长,这些比丘的戒等功德也不增长。又如同牧牛人缺少五种牛味,这些比丘也缺少五种法蕴。白分的内容应通过与黑分所说相反的方式联系理解。显示巴利原文
Te na atirekapūjāya pūjetā hotīti so gopālako mahāusabhe viya te there bhikkhū imāya āvi ceva raho ca mettāya kāyakammādikāya atirekapūjāya na pūjeti. Tato therā, – ‘‘ime amhesu garucittīkāraṃ na karontī’’ti navake bhikkhū dvīhi saṅgahehi na saṅgaṇhanti, na āmisasaṅgahena cīvarena vā pattena vā pattapariyāpannena vā vasanaṭṭhānena vā. Kilamante milāyantepi nappaṭijagganti. Pāḷiṃ vā aṭṭhakathaṃ vā dhammakathābandhaṃ vā guyhaganthaṃ vā na sikkhāpenti. Navakā therānaṃ santikā sabbaso ime dve saṅgahe alabhamānā imasmiṃ sāsane patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Yathā tassa gopālakassa gogaṇo na vaḍḍhati, evaṃ sīlādīni na vaḍḍhanti. Yathā ca so gopālako pañcahi gorasehi paribāhiro hoti, evaṃ pañcahi dhammakkhandhehi paribāhirā honti. Sukkapakkho kaṇhapakkhe vuttavipallāsavasena yojetvā veditabboti.
第四《小牧牛人经》注疏显示巴利原文
4. Cūḷagopālakasuttavaṇṇanā
350 「如是我闻」等,是《小牧牛人经》的开头。其中,「在乌迦车拉」是指一座名为乌迦车拉的城市。据说,在建造该城时,有一晚,一条鱼从恒河的水流中跃到岸上。人们把布浸在油盆里制成火把,借此捕得此鱼。城池建成后,在命名时他们说:「我们在选定城址的那一天,用布火把捕到了鱼,」因此便称此城为「乌迦车拉」。
「对比丘们说」:世尊在傍晚时分,坐在恒河岸边的一处沙丘上——从那里能清楚地眺望整条恒河——由大比丘僧团围绕,望着浩浩荡荡、奔流不息的恒河水,心中思惟:「过去可有人依这条恒河而经历了兴盛与衰败吗?」他观察到,过去有一位愚笨的牧牛人,带领着数十万头牛,那些牛因那位牧牛人而陷入了恒河的漩涡,最终掉进大海;而另一位聪明的牧牛人,则令数十万头牛平安、增长、健康。世尊见此,便想以此因缘为比丘们说法,于是对比丘们说了以下的话。显示巴利原文
350.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷagopālakasuttaṃ. Tattha ukkacelāyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tasmiṃ kira māpiyamāne rattiṃ gaṅgāsotato maccho thalaṃ patto. Manussā celāni telapātiyaṃ temetvā ukkā katvā macchaṃ gaṇhiṃsu. Nagare niṭṭhite tassa nāmaṃ karonte amhehi nagaraṭṭhānassa gahitadivase celukkāhi maccho gahitoti ukkacelā-tvevassa nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Bhikkhū āmantesīti yasmiṃ ṭhāne nisinnassa sabbā gaṅgā pākaṭā hutvā paññāyati, tādise vālikussade gaṅgātitthe sāyanhasamaye mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivuto nisīditvā mahāgaṅgaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ sandamānaṃ olokento, – ‘‘atthi nu kho imaṃ gaṅgaṃ nissāya koci pubbe vaḍḍhiparihāniṃ patto’’ti āvajjitvā, pubbe ekaṃ bālagopālakaṃ nissāya anekasatasahassā gogaṇā imissā gaṅgāya āvaṭṭe patitvā samuddameva paviṭṭhā, aparaṃ pana paṇḍitagopālakaṃ nissāya anekasatasahassagogaṇassa sotthi jātā vaḍḍhi jātā ārogyaṃ jātanti addasa. Disvā imaṃ kāraṇaṃ nissāya bhikkhūnaṃ dhammaṃ desessāmīti cintetvā bhikkhū āmantesi.
「摩揭陀人」:指摩揭陀国的居民。「劣慧性」:指无智慧之本性,迟钝、极为愚钝。「未观察」:指不加留意、不仔细思惟。「试图渡」:即尝试让牛群渡河。「向对岸——善毗提诃人的对岸」:恒河的此岸是摩揭陀国,彼岸是毗提诃国;牧牛人想把牛从此岸的摩揭陀国带到彼岸的毗提诃国去护养,于是试图渡往对岸,因此说「向对岸——善毗提诃人的对岸」。「形成漩涡」:牛群回转,使河水形成漩涡。「遭遇不幸与毁灭」:它们遭遇了不幸与毁灭,最终掉进大海。事实上,那位牧牛人赶牛渡河时,本该先在恒河此岸观察平坦的渡口和不平的渡口,在河中央留意两三处沙洲以便牛群休息,对岸也须留意三四处的上岸口,心中思量:「那些未能从这个渡口上去的,就会抓住那个渡口;未能从那个渡口上去的,便会抓住这个。」然而,这个愚笨的牧牛人既未观察此岸牛群下水的渡口是平是险,也未在河中央留心供牛群休息的两三处沙洲,更没观察对岸四五处可上岸的地方,就在不该渡河之处把牛赶下了水。这时,一头大公牛因为速度飞快且体力强壮,横向冲断了恒河的水流,到达对岸后看见陡峭的河岸和荆棘显示巴利原文
Māgadhakoti magadharaṭṭhavāsī. Duppaññajātikoti nippaññasabhāvo dandho mahājaḷo. Asamavekkhitvāti asallakkhetvā anupadhāretvā. Patāresīti tāretuṃ ārabhi. Uttaraṃ tīraṃ suvidehānanti gaṅgāya orime tīre magadharaṭṭhaṃ, pārime tīre videharaṭṭhaṃ, gāvo magadharaṭṭhato videharaṭṭhaṃ netvā rakkhissāmīti uttaraṃ tīraṃ patāresi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘uttaraṃ tīraṃ suvidehāna’’nti. Āmaṇḍalikaṃ karitvāti maṇḍalikaṃ katvā. Anayabyasanaṃ āpajjiṃsūti avaḍḍhiṃ vināsaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, mahāsamuddameva pavisiṃsu. Tena hi gopālakena gāvo otārentena gaṅgāya orimatīre samatitthañca visamatitthañca oloketabbaṃ assa, majjhe gaṅgāya gunnaṃ vissamaṭṭhānatthaṃ dve tīṇi vālikatthalāni sallakkhetabbāni assu. Tathā pārimatīre tīṇi cattāri titthāni, imasmā titthā bhaṭṭhā imaṃ titthaṃ gaṇhissanti, imasmā bhaṭṭhā imanti. Ayaṃ pana bālagopālako orimatīre gunnaṃ otaraṇatitthaṃ samaṃ vā visamaṃ vā anoloketvāva majjhe gaṅgāya gunnaṃ vissamaṭṭhānatthaṃ dve tīṇi vālikatthalānipi asallakkhetvāva paratīre cattāri pañca uttaraṇatitthāni asamavekkhitvāva atittheneva gāvo otāresi. Athassa mahāusabho javanasampannatāya ceva thāmasampannatāya ca tiriyaṃ gaṅgāya sotaṃ chetvā pārimaṃ tīraṃ patvā chinnataṭañceva kaṇṭakagumbagahanañca disvā, ‘‘dubbiniviṭṭhameta’’nti ñatvā dhuragga-patiṭṭhānokāsampi alabhitvā paṭinivatti. Gāvo mahāusabho nivatto mayampi nivattissāmāti nivattā. Mahato gogaṇassa nivattaṭṭhāne udakaṃ chijjitvā majjhe gaṅgāya āvaṭṭaṃ uṭṭhapesi. Gogaṇo āvaṭṭaṃ pavisitvā samuddameva patto. Ekopi goṇo arogo nāma nāhosi. Tenāha – ‘‘tattheva anayabyasanaṃ āpajjiṃsū’’ti.
「于此世间不善巧者」:指对此世间的蕴、界、处不善巧、不熟练;对他世间也是如此。「魔罗的领域」指三地诸法,「非魔罗的领域」指九种出世间法。「死王的领域」同样是三地诸法,「非死王的领域」则是九种出世间法。对于这些,他们不善巧、不熟练。从词义上说,「魔罗的领域」即魔罗的领域,「领域」指处所、事物、住所、行境。「死王领域」也是同样的道理。「他们」:指如此这般的沙门、婆罗门;由此可知,这里指的是六师外道。显示巴利原文
Akusalā imassa lokassāti idha loke khandhadhātāyatanesu akusalā achekā, paralokepi eseva nayo. Māradheyyaṃ vuccati tebhūmakadhammā. Amāradheyyaṃ nava lokuttaradhammā. Maccudheyyampi tebhūmakadhammāva. Amaccudheyyaṃ nava lokuttaradhammā. Tattha akusalā achekā. Vacanatthato pana mārassa dheyyaṃ māradheyyaṃ. Dheyyanti ṭhānaṃ vatthu nivāso gocaro. Maccudheyyepi eseva nayo. Tesanti tesaṃ evarūpānaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ, iminā cha satthāro dassitāti veditabbā.
351 如上说完黑暗的部分后,为了显示光明的部分,世尊宣说:“诸比丘,过去……”等语。其中,“强壮牛”指已调伏的公牛与母牛。“应调伏牛”指尚待调伏的公牛及未曾产犊的母牛。“幼牛”指过了牛犊阶段、已长得壮健的小牛。“犊子”指尚在吃奶的幼小牛犊。“瘦弱无力者”指肉少、力弱、气微的牛。“当日初生者”即指当日刚出生的小牛。“被母牛的叫声冲荡”:母牛跑在前面,发出“吽吽”的低吼,像是在展示自己的尊贵并发信号,同时以胸膛分开河水前进;小牛犊因母牛这种示现尊贵的叫声,或被母牛胸膛分开的水流推送而行,故称为“被母牛的叫声冲荡”。显示巴利原文
351. Evaṃ kaṇhapakkhaṃ niṭṭhapetvā sukkapakkhaṃ dassento bhūtapubbaṃ, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha balavagāvoti dantagoṇe ceva dhenuyo ca. Dammagāvoti dametabbagoṇe ceva avijātagāvo ca. Vacchatareti vacchabhāvaṃ taritvā ṭhite balavavacche. Vacchaketi dhenupake taruṇavacchake . Kisābalaketi appamaṃsalohite mandathāme. Tāvadeva jātakoti taṃdivase jātako. Mātugoravakena vuyhamānoti mātā purato purato huṃhunti goravaṃ katvā saññaṃ dadamānā urena udakaṃ chindamānā gacchati, vacchako tāya goravasaññāya dhenuyā vā urena chinnodakena gacchamāno ‘‘mātugoravakena vuyhamāno’’ti vuccati.
352 “已断魔罗之流”:即以阿拉汉道断除魔罗的渴爱之流。“已达彼岸”:犹如大公牛到达河之彼岸,到达了轮回彼岸——涅槃。“已至彼岸”:当那些大公牛到达彼岸时,于恒河水流中越过了三段激流后停住的大公牛,见他们已至彼岸,便循其所行之道而行,亦达于彼岸。“将达彼岸”:那些已灭尽四道所应断烦恼之三分而安住者,今将以阿拉汉道断除残余的渴爱之流,犹如强壮牛到达河之彼岸,将抵达轮回彼岸——涅槃。依此理趣,于一切句皆应如是了知。“法随行”与“信随行”者,乃是具足第一道的修行人。显示巴利原文
352.Mārassasotaṃ chetvāti arahattamaggena mārassa taṇhāsotaṃ chetvā. Pāraṃ gatāti mahāusabhā nadīpāraṃ viya saṃsārapāraṃ nibbānaṃ gatā. Pāraṃ agamaṃsūti mahāusabhānaṃ pāraṅgatakkhaṇe gaṅgāya sotassa tayo koṭṭhāse atikkamma ṭhitā mahāusabhe pāraṃ patte disvā tesaṃ gatamaggaṃ paṭipajjitvā pāraṃ agamaṃsu. Pāraṃ gamissantīti catumaggavajjhānaṃ kilesānaṃ tayo koṭṭhāse khepetvā ṭhitā idāni arahattamaggena avasesaṃ taṇhāsotaṃ chetvā balavagāvo viya nadīpāraṃ saṃsārapāraṃ nibbānaṃ gamissantīti. Iminā nayena sabbavāresu attho veditabbo. Dhammānusārino, saddhānusārinoti ime dve paṭhamamaggasamaṅgino.
“由知者”:指那位了知一切法的佛陀。“善开示”:即善为演说。“已开启”:已开启。“甘露门”:此即圣道,为证得涅槃而开启。“已除去慢之竹”:已除却我慢之竹。“应希求安稳”:应以欲作的愿心希求阿拉汉果,意思是:你们当发起“我当作”的决意,当发起“我当成就”的决意。也有异读作“已得者”,其意思是:得到这样的导师,便可谓已得。其余各处文义甚明。世尊即如是随顺脉络,结束开示。显示巴利原文
Jānatāti sabbadhamme jānantena buddhena. Suppakāsitoti sukathito. Vivaṭanti vivaritaṃ. Amatadvāranti ariyamaggo. Nibbānapattiyāti tadatthāya vivaṭaṃ. Vinaḷīkatanti vigatamānanaḷaṃ kataṃ. Khemaṃ patthethāti kattukamyatāchandena arahattaṃ patthetha, kattukāmā nibbattetukāmā hothāti attho. ‘‘Patta’tthā’’tipi pāṭho. Evarūpaṃ satthāraṃ labhitvā tumhe pattāyeva nāmāti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānameva. Bhagavā pana yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesīti.
第五、《小萨遮迦经》的注疏显示巴利原文
5. Cūḷasaccakasuttavaṇṇanā
353 「如是我闻」即指《小萨遮迦经》。其中「大林重阁讲堂」:「大林」是指自然生长、未经栽植、有边界的大森林。然而,迦毗罗卫附近的大林与雪山连成一片,无有边际,一直延伸到大海。此处所说的「大林」并非如此,而是有边界的大森林。「重阁讲堂」则是在依大林而建的寺院中,以一座重阁为主体,覆盖雁颈瓦,具足一切庄严的世尊香室——应如此理解。显示巴利原文
353.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷasaccakasuttaṃ. Tattha mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyanti mahāvanaṃ nāma sayaṃjātaṃ aropimaṃ saparicchedaṃ mahantaṃ vanaṃ. Kapilavatthusāmantā pana mahāvanaṃ himavantena saha ekābaddhaṃ aparicchedaṃ hutvā mahāsamuddaṃ āhacca ṭhitaṃ. Idaṃ tādisaṃ na hoti. Saparicchedaṃ mahantaṃ vananti mahāvanaṃ. Kūṭāgārasālā pana mahāvanaṃ nissāya kate ārāme kūṭāgāraṃ antokatvā haṃsavaṭṭakacchannena katā sabbākārasampannā buddhassa bhagavato gandhakuṭi veditabbā.
「萨遮迦尼干陀子」:据说,从前有一位尼干陀和一位尼干陀女,各自掌握五百论题,心想:“我们要驳倒他人。”便在赡部洲中四处游历。他们在毗舍离相遇时,离车族的王族们看见了,便问:“你是谁?”“你又是谁?”尼干陀答道:“我游历赡部洲,就是为了驳倒别人。”尼干陀女也这样回答。离车族人们便说:“那你们就在这里彼此辩论一番吧。”于是,尼干陀女以自己学得的五百论题问难,尼干陀一一解说;轮到尼干陀问难时,尼干陀女也一一解说。两人既未分出胜负,谁也不曾输给谁,完全势均力敌。离车族人们便说:“既然你们俩水平相当,四处游历又有何用?就住在这里吧。”于是给了他们住所,并安排供养。两人共同生活后,生了四个女儿:一个名叫真实,一个名叫贪爱,一个名叫护衣,一个名叫具行。这几个女儿也都十分聪慧,把父母各自学得的五百论题全都学会了。成年后,她们对父母说:“在我们家族里,女儿家从来不会收了金银财宝就被嫁到夫家去。如果有在家人能驳倒她们的论说,她们就成为他的女仆;如果有出家人能驳倒,她们就在他那里出家。你们打显示巴利原文
Saccakonigaṇṭhaputtoti pubbe kira eko nigaṇṭho ca nigaṇṭhī ca pañca pañca vādasatāni uggahetvā, vādaṃ āropessāmāti jambudīpe vicarantā vesāliyaṃ samāgatā. Licchavirājāno disvā, – ‘‘tvaṃ ko, tvaṃ kā’’ti pucchiṃsu. Nigaṇṭho – ‘‘ahaṃ vādaṃ āropessāmīti jambudīpe vicarāmī’’ti āha. Nigaṇṭhīpi tathā āha. Licchavino, ‘‘idheva aññamaññaṃ vādaṃ āropethā’’ti āhaṃsu. Nigaṇṭhī attanā uggahitāni pañcavādasatāni pucchi, nigaṇṭho kathesi. Nigaṇṭhena pucchitepi nigaṇṭhī kathesiyeva. Ekassapi na jayo, na parājayo, ubho samasamāva ahesuṃ. Licchavino, – ‘‘tumhe ubhopi samasamā āhiṇḍitvā kiṃ karissatha, idheva vasathā’’ti gehaṃ datvā baliṃ paṭṭhapesuṃ. Tesaṃ saṃvāsamanvāya catasso dhītaro jātā, – ekā saccā nāma, ekā lolā nāma, ekā paṭācārā nāma, ekā ācāravatī nāma. Tāpi paṇḍitāva ahesuṃ, mātāpitūhi uggahitāni pañca pañca vādasatāni uggahesuṃ. Tā vayapattā mātāpitaro avocuṃ – ‘‘amhākaṃ ammā kule dārikā nāma hiraññasuvaṇṇādīni datvā kulagharaṃ pesitapubbā nāma natthi. Yo pana agāriko tāsaṃ vādaṃ maddituṃ sakkoti, tassa pādaparicārikā honti. Yo pabbajito tāsaṃ maddituṃ sakkoti, tassa santike pabbajanti. Tumhe kiṃ karissathā’’ti? Mayampi evameva karissāmāti. Catassopi paribbājikavesaṃ gahetvā, ‘‘ayaṃ jambudīpo nāma jambuyā paññāyatī’’ti jambusākhaṃ gahetvā cārikaṃ pakkamiṃsu. Yaṃ gāmaṃ pāpuṇanti, tassa dvāre paṃsupuñje vā vālikapuñje vā jambudhajaṃ ṭhapetvā, – ‘‘yo vādaṃ āropetuṃ sakkoti, so imaṃ maddatū’’ti vatvā gāmaṃ pavisanti. Evaṃ gāmena gāmaṃ vicarantiyo sāvatthiṃ pāpuṇitvā tatheva gāmadvāre jambudhajaṃ ṭhapetvā sampattamanussānaṃ ārocetvā antonagaraṃ paviṭṭhā.
那时,世尊正依止舍卫城,住在祇园精舍。当时,尊者舍利弗既要探望病人,看护那些熬夜照料病患的人,自身的职责也特别繁重,因此他先于其他比丘入村乞食。在村口,他望见了那面瞻部旗,便问孩童们:“这是什么?”孩童们把缘由告诉了他。尊者说:“那你们就把它打破吧。”孩童们说:“尊者,我们不敢,心里害怕。”尊者说:“孩子们别怕,若有人问:‘是谁打破了我们的瞻部旗?’你们就说:‘是佛陀的弟子舍利弗尊者打破的。想辩论的人,请到祇园精舍尊者那里去。’”孩童们照着尊者的话,打破旗帜扔掉了。尊者乞食完毕后,便回寺院去了。女游行者们从村里出来,问道:“是谁打破了我们的旗?”孩童们便将事情告诉了她们。女游行者们再次进村,沿街挨巷地宣布:“听说佛陀有位叫舍利弗的弟子,要与我们辩论。想听闻的人,都出来吧!”于是,众多民众纷纷涌出,跟随女游行者们,一同前往祇园精舍。显示巴利原文
Tena samayena bhagavā sāvatthiṃ nissāya jetavane viharati. Athāyasmā sāriputto gilāne pucchanto ajaggitaṭṭhānaṃ jagganto attano kiccamahantatāya aññehi bhikkhūhi divātaraṃ gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisanto gāmadvāre jambudhajaṃ disvā, – ‘‘kimida’’nti dārake pucchi. Te tamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Tena hi maddathāti. Na sakkoma, bhante, bhāyāmāti. ‘‘Kumārā mā bhāyatha, ‘kena amhākaṃ jambudhajo maddāpito’ti vutte, buddhasāvakena sāriputtattherena maddāpito, vādaṃ āropetukāmā jetavane therassa santikaṃ gacchathāti vadeyyāthā’’ti āha. Te therassa vacanaṃ sutvā jambudhajaṃ madditvā chaḍḍesuṃ. Thero piṇḍāya caritvā vihāraṃ gato. Paribbājikāpi gāmato nikkhamitvā, ‘‘amhākaṃ dhajo kena maddāpito’’ti pucchiṃsu. Dārakā tamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Paribbājikā puna gāmaṃ pavisitvā ekekaṃ vīthiṃ gahetvā, – ‘‘buddhasāvako kira sāriputto nāma amhehi saddhiṃ vādaṃ karissati, sotukāmā nikkhamathā’’ti ārocesuṃ. Mahājano nikkhami, tena saddhiṃ paribbājikā jetavanaṃ agamiṃsu.
长老心想:“若有女人来到我们的住处,实为不便。”于是他便坐在寺院中央。女游行者们来到后,问长老:“是您打破了我们的旗吗?”长老回答:“是的,是我打破的。”她们说:“我们要与您辩论。”长老说:“善哉,来辩就是。那么,由谁提问,谁回答呢?”长老接着说:“提问理应由你们,但你们是女人,便请你们先问吧。”于是,四位姐妹各据一方站定,把从父母处学来的一千道论题全部提出。长老犹如以利剑齐根斩断睡莲茎干一般,将一个个问题剖析得清晰明了、毫无滞碍地作了回答。讲毕,长老又说:“请再提问。”她们连忙说:“尊者,我们所知的就这些了。”长老便说:“你们问了我千题,我皆已解答。现在,我只问一个问题,请你们来解释吧。”她们见识到长老的智慧境界,不敢说“尊者请问,我们会回答”,只是反复地说:“尊者,请说吧,我们知道的,便作答。”
},
{显示巴利原文
Thero – ‘‘amhākaṃ vasanaṭṭhāne mātugāmassa āgamanaṃ nāma aphāsuka’’nti vihāramajjhe nisīdi. Paribbājikāyo gantvā theraṃ pucchiṃsu – ‘‘tumhehi amhākaṃ dhajo maddāpito’’ti? Āma, mayā maddāpitoti. Mayaṃ tumhehi saddhiṃ vādaṃ karissāmāti. Sādhu karotha, kassa pucchā kassa vissajjanaṃ hotūti? Pucchā nāma amhākaṃ pattā, tumhe pana mātugāmā nāma paṭhamaṃ pucchathāti āha. Tā catassopi catūsu disāsu ṭhatvā mātāpitūnaṃ santike uggahitaṃ vādasahassaṃ pucchiṃsu. Thero khaggena kumudanāḷaṃ chindanto viya pucchitaṃ pucchitaṃ nijjaṭaṃ niggaṇṭhiṃ katvā kathesi, kathetvā puna pucchathāti āha. Ettakameva, bhante, mayaṃ jānāmāti. Thero āha – ‘‘tumhehi vādasahassaṃ pucchitaṃ mayā kathitaṃ, ahaṃ pana ekaṃ yeva pañhaṃ pucchissāmi, taṃ tumhe kathethā’’ti. Tā therassa visayaṃ disvā, ‘‘pucchatha, bhante, byākarissāmā’’ti vattuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu. ‘‘Vada, bhante, jānamānā byākarissāmā’’ti puna āhaṃsu.
长老说:“这是让善男子出家后首先应教导的问题。”于是问道:“‘一’是什么?”她们既找不到头绪,也摸不着边。长老说:“你们解说啊。”她们回答:“尊者,我们说不出来。”长老说:“你们问我千题,我都一一解说了,我只问你们一个问题,你们却无法解说。既然如此,谁胜谁负?”她们说:“尊者您胜,我们输了。”长老又问:“现在你们打算怎么办?”她们把父母先前说的话讲了一遍,然后说:“我们想在您这里出家。”长老说:“你们是女人,不能在我这里出家,但可以接受我们的教法,然后去比丘尼僧团那里出家。”她们说好,接受了长老的教法,去到比丘尼僧团那里出家。出家后,她们不放逸,精勤努力,不久便证得了阿拉汉果。显示巴利原文
Thero ayaṃ pana kulaputte pabbājetvā paṭhamaṃ sikkhāpetabbapañhoti vatvā, – ‘‘ekaṃ nāma ki’’nti pucchi. Tā neva antaṃ, na koṭiṃ addasaṃsu. Thero kathethāti āha. Na passāma, bhanteti. Tumhehi vādasahassaṃ pucchitaṃ mayā kathitaṃ, mayhaṃ tumhe ekaṃ pañhampi kathetuṃ na sakkotha, evaṃ sante kassa jayo kassa parājayoti? Tumhākaṃ, bhante, jayo, amhākaṃ parājayoti. Idāni kiṃ karissathāti? Tā mātāpitūhi vuttavacanaṃ ārocetvā, ‘‘tumhākaṃ santike pabbajissāmā’’ti āhaṃsu. Tumhe mātugāmā nāma amhākaṃ santike pabbajituṃ na vaṭṭati, amhākaṃ pana sāsanaṃ gahetvā bhikkhuniupassayaṃ gantvā pabbajathāti. Tā sādhūti therassa sāsanaṃ gahetvā bhikkhunisaṅghassa santikaṃ gantvā pabbajiṃsu. Pabbajitā ca pana appamattā ātāpiniyo hutvā nacirasseva arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu.
这位萨遮迦是她们四姐妹的幼弟。他的聪慧更胜四位姐姐,不仅从父母那里学习了一千种论题,更广学外道教义。他未往他处,就在毗舍离教授王子技艺。他因智慧过于满溢,唯恐腹部胀裂,便以铁板护腹而行。他便是因此被称为“萨遮迦尼乾陀子”。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ saccako tāsaṃ catunnampi kaniṭṭhabhātiko. Tāhi catūhipi uttaritarapañño, mātāpitūnampi santikā vādasahassaṃ, tato bahutarañca bāhirasamayaṃ uggahetvā katthaci agantvā rājadārake sippaṃ sikkhāpento tattheva vesāliyaṃ vasati, paññāya atipūritattā kucchi me bhijjeyyāti bhīto ayapaṭṭena kucchiṃ parikkhipitvā carati, imaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘saccako nigaṇṭhaputto’’ti.
“谈论者”:“谈论”即言说之道,他宣说、解说,故称“谈论者”。“辩才者”:即宣称“我是智者”的言论。“众人所敬信”:凡他依据星宿运行所指示的,大多确实如此应验,因此大众都敬信他是获得吉祥的善人。“以论破论”:即通过言说之道,指出对方的过失。尊者阿说示:是舍利弗长老的老师阿说示长老。“正在经行往来”:指他为了从一家离车王族走到另一家,而这样来回经行。他到尊者阿说示那里去:为什么去?为的是了解适当的时机。显示巴利原文
Bhassappavādakoti bhassaṃ vuccati kathāmaggo, taṃ pavadati kathetīti bhassappavādako. Paṇḍitavādoti ahaṃ paṇḍitoti evaṃ vādo. Sādhusammato bahujanassāti yaṃ yaṃ nakkhattacārena ādisati, taṃ taṃ yebhuyyena tatheva hoti, tasmā ayaṃ sādhuladdhiko bhaddakoti evaṃ sammato mahājanassa. Vādena vādaṃ samāraddhoti kathāmaggena dosaṃ āropito. Āyasmā assajīti sāriputtattherassa ācariyo assajitthero. Jaṅghāvihāraṃ anucaṅkamamānoti tato tato licchavirājagehato taṃ taṃ gehaṃ gamanatthāya anucaṅkamamāno. Yenāyasmā assaji tenupasaṅkamīti kasmā upasaṅkami? Samayajānanatthaṃ.
据说他心里这样想:“我为了驳倒沙门乔达摩的论说而四处奔走,却因不知他的时机,始终未能驳倒。驳倒别人,只有在了解时机后提出反驳,才算得上善巧的驳斥。这位尊者阿说示是沙门乔达摩的弟子,应该了解他自己老师的时机;我问过他之后,先确立自己的论旨,再去驳倒沙门乔达摩。”因此他便过去了。他问的是“教导”:即“你教导什么、训练什么?”长老心中思惟:如果直接说“苦”,便会给对方留下可指责的把柄;道与果在某种角度也可以假名为苦;而这人若听到“苦”,就会质问长老:“阿说示尊者,你们为什么出家?”如果回答说“为了道果”,他就可以指责说:“阿说示尊者,你们这个教法可不是什么善教,简直如同大屠场,是地狱之流,你们根本没有快乐的指望,只是不断折磨自己,让苦成熟,到处游荡罢了。”因此,对于外来的辩论者,不应用间接委婉的说法,应直截了当,令对方找不到立足之处。如此思惟后,便只按“色是无常的”等方式,纯粹从无常、无我的角度来开示。“恶闻”:意思是这不适合听闻。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘ahaṃ ‘samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṃ āropessāmī’ti āhiṇḍāmi, ‘samayaṃ panassa na jānāmī’ti na āropesiṃ. Parassa hi samayaṃ ñatvā āropito vādo svāropito nāma hoti. Ayaṃ pana samaṇassa gotamassa sāvako paññāyati assajitthero ; so attano satthu samaye kovido, etāhaṃ pucchitvā kathaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṃ āropessāmī’’ti. Tasmā upasaṅkami. Vinetīti kathaṃ vineti, kathaṃ sikkhāpetīti pucchati. Thero pana yasmā dukkhanti vutte upārambhassa okāso hoti, maggaphalānipi pariyāyena dukkhanti āgatāni, ayañca dukkhanti vutte theraṃ puccheyya – ‘‘bho assaji, kimatthaṃ tumhe pabbajitā’’ti. Tato ‘‘maggaphalatthāyā’’ti vutte, – ‘‘nayidaṃ, bho assaji, tumhākaṃ sāsanaṃ nāma, mahāāghātanaṃ nāmetaṃ, nirayussado nāmesa, natthi tumhākaṃ sukhāsā, uṭṭhāyuṭṭhāya dukkhameva jirāpentā āhiṇḍathā’’ti dosaṃ āropeyya, tasmā paravādissa pariyāyakathaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Yathā esa appatiṭṭho hoti, evamassa nippariyāyakathaṃ kathessāmīti cintetvā, ‘‘rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, anicca’’nti imaṃ aniccānattavaseneva kathaṃ katheti. Dussutanti sotuṃ ayuttaṃ.
354 “集会堂”:指王族用来宣布教令的集会大堂。他到那些离车族人那里去:他心里这样想:“我先前因为不了解时机,没能驳倒沙门乔达摩。现在从他大弟子的话里知道了时机,而且我的五百离车族学童也聚集在一起了,正好和他们一起去驳倒沙门乔达摩。”因此他就过去了。“以某著名者”:指在那些有名望、为人所知的五群比丘长老中,随取某一位。“安立”:按照他所安立的那样。他想:假如就这样安立,而他又说出别的什么来,那时我又能怎样?这么一想,便转身背向而说。“拉过来”:指向自己的方向拉过来。“拖过来”:指向前推开。“来回拖拽”:指时而拉过来,时而推过去。“酒肆的草席”:指酒馆里的草垫。“酒馆恶人”:就是酒徒。“抓住袋耳的毛”:指为了清洗滤酒袋、去掉渣滓,就抓住两边袋耳。“向下甩”:面朝下甩。“向上甩”:面朝上甩。“反复拍打”:一再地拍打。“麻洗游戏”:当地人为做麻布衣,取来麻皮,扎成小把,放入水中。到第三天,麻把充分泡透了,人们就带上酸粥、酒之类的东西来到那里,抓起麻把,在三块板——右边一块、左边一显示巴利原文
354.Santhāgāreti rājakulānaṃ atthānusāsanasanthāgārasālāyaṃ. Yena te licchavī tenupasaṅkamīti evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘ahaṃ pubbe samayaṃ ajānanabhāvena samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṃ na āropesiṃ, idāni panassa mahāsāvakena kathitaṃ samayaṃ jānāmi, ime ca mama antevāsikā pañcasatā licchavī sannipatitā. Etehi saddhiṃ gantvā samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṃ āropessāmī’’ti tasmā upasaṅkami. Ñātaññatarenāti ñātesu abhiññātesu pañcavaggiyattheresu aññatarena. Patiṭṭhitanti yathā tena patiṭṭhitaṃ. Sace evaṃ patiṭṭhissati, atha pana aññadeva vakkhati, tatra mayā kiṃ sakkā kātunti idāneva piṭṭhiṃ parivattento āha. Ākaḍḍheyyāti attano abhimukhaṃ kaḍḍheyya. Parikaḍḍheyyāti purato paṭipaṇāmeyya. Samparikaḍḍheyyāti kālena ākaḍḍheyya, kālena parikaḍḍheyya. Soṇḍikākilañjanti surāghare piṭṭhakilañjaṃ. Soṇḍikādhuttoti surādhutto. Vālaṃ kaṇṇe gahetvāti surāparissāvanatthavikaṃ dhovitukāmo kasaṭanidhunanatthaṃ ubhosu kaṇṇesu gahetvā. Odhuneyyāti adhomukhaṃ katvā dhuneyya. Niddhuneyyāti uddhaṃmukhaṃ katvā dhuneyya. Nipphoṭeyyāti punappunaṃ papphoṭeyya. Sāṇadhovikaṃ nāmāti ettha manussā sāṇasāṭakakaraṇatthaṃ sāṇavāke gahetvā muṭṭhiṃ muṭṭhiṃ bandhitvā udake pakkhipanti. Te tatiyadivase suṭṭhu kilinnā honti. Atha manussā ambilayāgusurādīni ādāya tattha gantvā sāṇamuṭṭhiṃ gahetvā, dakkhiṇato vāmato sammukhā cāti tīsu phalakesu sakiṃ dakkhiṇaphalake, sakiṃ vāmaphalake, sakiṃ sammukhaphalake paharantā ambilayāgusurādīni bhuñjantā pivantā khādantā dhovanti. Mahantā kīḷā hoti. Rañño nāgo taṃ kīḷaṃ disvā gambhīraṃ udakaṃ anupavisitvā soṇḍāya udakaṃ gahetvā sakiṃ kumbhe sakiṃ piṭṭhiyaṃ sakiṃ ubhosu passesu sakiṃ antarasatthiyaṃ pakkhipanto kīḷittha. Tadupādāya taṃ kīḷitajātaṃ sāṇadhovikaṃ nāma vuccati , taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘sāṇadhovikaṃ nāma kīḷitajātaṃ kīḷatī’’ti. Kiṃ so bhavamāno saccako nigaṇṭhaputto, yo bhagavato vādaṃ āropessatīti yo saccako nigaṇṭhaputto bhagavato vādaṃ āropessati, so kiṃ bhavamāno kiṃ yakkho bhavamāno udāhu indo, udāhu brahmā bhavamāno bhagavato vādaṃ āropessati? Na hi sakkā pakatimanussena bhagavato vādaṃ āropetunti ayamettha adhippāyo.
355 「那时」指的是萨遮迦进入僧园的时候。他在什么时候进入的呢?正午时分。为什么世尊在那个时间经行?为了消除因食用精美食物的缘而引起的惛沉睡眠。又或者,他们本就是日间精勤修习的人。对于这样的人而言,午后经行、沐浴,让身体适应时节后,再坐下来修习沙门法,心便能达到专注一境。「到那些比丘处」:据说他到处问“沙门乔达摩在哪里?”,从一个院落找到另一个院落,想进去见他。他看见那些穿着粪扫衣的比丘,如同森林里的大象一般在经行处经行,于是朝他们走去。因此说“到那些比丘处”等。“在哪里,尊者?”意思是“在哪间住所或哪个厅堂?”“阿耆毗舍那,彼世尊。”那时,世尊于清晨入大悲定,将一切知智之网遍满一万个世界,观察应得度的众生,便看见:“明天萨遮迦尼干陀子将带着一大群离车族人前来,想要驳倒我。”因此他一大早就整理好身体,由比丘僧团围绕,进入毗舍离城乞食。用完斋饭后,心想:“我应到一个方便大众就坐的舒适地方坐下。”于是就没有进香室,而是来到大森林中,在某棵树下作昼日安坐。那些比丘对世尊尽了义务后回来,被萨遮迦问起,就指显示巴利原文
355.Tena kho pana samayenāti yasmiṃ samaye saccako ārāmaṃ pāvisi, tasmiṃ. Kismiṃ pana samaye pāvisīti? Mahāmajjhanhikasamaye. Kasmā pana tasmiṃ samaye caṅkamantīti? Paṇītabhojanapaccayassa thinamiddhassa vinodanatthaṃ. Divāpadhānikā vā te. Tādisānañhi pacchābhattaṃ caṅkamitvā nhatvā sarīraṃ utuṃ gaṇhāpetvā nisajja samaṇadhammaṃ karontānaṃ cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti. Yena te bhikkhūti so kira kuhiṃ samaṇo gotamoti pariveṇato pariveṇaṃ gantvā pucchitvā pavisissāmīti vilokento araññe hatthī viya caṅkame caṅkamamāne paṃsukūlikabhikkhū disvā tesaṃ santikaṃ agamāsi. Taṃ sandhāya, ‘‘yena te bhikkhū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kahaṃnu kho, bhoti katarasmiṃ āvāse vā maṇḍape vāti attho. Esa, aggivessana, bhagavāti tadā kira bhagavā paccūsakāle mahākaruṇā samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā dasasahassacakkavāḷe sabbaññutaññāṇajālaṃ pattharitvā bodhaneyyasattaṃ olokento addasa – ‘‘sve saccako nigaṇṭhaputto mahatiṃ licchaviparisaṃ gahetvā mama vādaṃ āropetukāmo āgamissatī’’ti. Tasmā pātova sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā bhikkhusaṅghaparivāro vesāliyaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto mahāparisāya nisīdituṃ sukhaṭṭhāne nisīdissāmīti gandhakuṭiṃ apavisitvā mahāvane aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle divāvihāraṃ nisīdi. Te bhikkhū bhagavato vattaṃ dassetvā āgatā, saccakena puṭṭhā dūre nisinnaṃ bhagavantaṃ dassentā, ‘‘esa aggivessana bhagavā’’ti āhaṃsu.
「与庞大的离车族大众一起」:这就是后面所说的“被大约五百位离车族青年围绕着”。这些人正是他的学童。据说萨遮迦在毗舍离城内带了大约五百位离车王族,众人听说“他是为了辩论去见世尊的”,纷纷心想“我们要去听两位智者的对话”,便都出来了,因此那人群极其庞大,数量不可胜数。所说的“庞大的离车族大众”即指这个。「合掌后」:这些人合掌致敬之后,心里两边都想讨好。他们这样想:“如果邪见者指责说:‘你们为什么礼敬沙门乔达摩?’我们就回答:‘只是合掌一下,怎么算得上是礼敬?’如果正见者指责说:‘你们为什么不礼敬世尊?’我们就回答:‘难道非要用头触地才算礼敬吗?合掌之礼不也是一种礼敬?’”“名与姓”:有人来时通报名字说:“乔达摩尊者,我是某人的儿子,名叫达陀、名叫密陀。”也有人通报姓氏说:“乔达摩尊者,我是瓦悉塔种姓,是迦旃延种姓。”据说这些都是些家道中落的破落子弟,想在众人中间借着名姓来显扬自己,才这样做的。至于那些默然坐着的人,则有两类:狡诈者和愚痴者。其中的狡诈者心想:“要是跟人说上一两句话,就会变成显示巴利原文
Mahatiyā licchaviparisāya saddhinti heṭṭhā pañcamattehi licchavisatehi parivutoti vuttaṃ. Te etassa antevāsikāyeva, antovesāliyaṃ pana saccako pañcamattāni licchavirājasatāni gahetvā, ‘‘vādatthiko bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamanto’’ti sutvā dvinnaṃ paṇḍitānaṃ kathāsallāpaṃ sossāmāti yebhuyyena manussā nikkhantā, evaṃ sā parisā mahatī aparicchinnagaṇanā ahosi. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Añjaliṃ paṇāmetvāti ete ubhatopakkhikā, te evaṃ cintesuṃ – ‘‘sace no micchādiṭṭhikā codessanti, ‘kasmā tumhe samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ vanditthā’ti, tesaṃ, ‘kiṃ añjalimattakaraṇenapi vanditaṃ hotī’ti vakkhāma. Sace no sammādiṭṭhikā codessanti, ‘kasmā bhagavantaṃ na vanditthā’ti, ‘kiṃ sīsena bhūmiṃ paharanteneva vanditaṃ hoti, nanu añjalikammampi vandanā evā’ti vakkhāmā’’ti. Nāma gottanti, bho gotama, ahaṃ asukassa putto datto nāma mitto nāma idha āgatoti vadantā nāmaṃ sāventi nāma. Bho gotama, ahaṃ vāsiṭṭho nāma kaccāno nāma idha āgatoti vadantā gottaṃ sāventi nāma. Ete kira daliddā jiṇṇakulaputtā parisamajjhe nāmagottavasena pākaṭā bhavissāmāti evaṃ akaṃsu. Ye pana tuṇhībhūtā nisīdiṃsu, te kerāṭikā ceva andhabālā ca. Tattha kerāṭikā, ‘‘ekaṃ dve kathāsallāpe karonto vissāsiko hoti, atha vissāse sati ekaṃ dve bhikkhā adātuṃ na yutta’’nti tato attānaṃ mocentā tuṇhī nisīdanti. Andhabālā aññāṇatāyeva avakkhittamattikāpiṇḍo viya yattha katthaci tuṇhībhūtā nisīdanti.
356 他(萨遮迦)只是稍微让出一点空间,给出了一点理由;于是世尊为了激发他提问的勇气,便说:“阿耆毗舍那,你想问什么就问吧。”这句话的含义是:“你若想问就问,我解答问题毫无负担。”或者:“你想问什么就问,我将为你解答一切。”世尊如此作了唯有佛陀才具备的“一切知者之开许”——这是独觉佛、上首弟子和大弟子们所没有的。因为他们不会说“你想问什么”,而是说“我们听过之后就会明白”。然而诸佛则会说:“贤友,你想问什么就问吧。”或者说:“大王,你想问什么就问吧。”显示巴利原文
356.Kiñcideva desanti kañci okāsaṃ kiñci kāraṇaṃ, athassa bhagavā pañhapucchane ussāhaṃ janento āha – puccha, aggivessana, yadākaṅkhasīti. Tassattho – ‘‘puccha yadi ākaṅkhasi, na me pañhavissajjane bhāro atthi’’. Atha vā ‘‘puccha yaṃ ākaṅkhasi, sabbaṃ te vissajjessāmī’’ti sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavāresi asādhāraṇaṃ paccekabuddhaaggasāvamahāsāvakehi. Te hi yadākaṅkhasīti na vadanti, sutvā vedissāmāti vadanti. Buddhā pana ‘‘pucchāvuso, yadākaṅkhasī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.237) vā, ‘‘puccha, mahārāja, yadākaṅkhasī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.162) vā,
‘‘Puccha vāsava maṃ pañhaṃ, yaṃ kiñci manasicchasi; Tassa tasseva pañhassa, ahaṃ antaṃ karomi te’’ iti. (dī. ni. 2.356) vā,
那么,比丘,你且在自己座位上安坐,想问什么便问吧。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tena hi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, sake āsane nisīditvā puccha yadākaṅkhasī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.85) vā,
对于婆和利和你,以及所有人,一切疑惑,
已给予机会,你们心中有任何疑问,就请问吧。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bāvarissa ca tuyhaṃ vā, sabbesaṃ sabbasaṃsayaṃ; Katāvakāsā pucchavho, yaṃ kiñci manasicchathā’’ti. (su. ni. 1036) vā, ‘‘Puccha maṃ sabhiya pañhaṃ, yaṃ kiñci manasicchasi; Tassa tasseva pañhassa, ahaṃ antaṃ karomi te’’ iti. (su. ni. 517) vā –
对于一切夜叉、人王、天神、沙门、婆罗门、游方者,诸佛发出一切知智之邀请。世尊既证佛地而作此邀请,此事并非稀有——即便住于菩萨地、仅得一分智者,……显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ tesaṃ yakkhanarindadevasamaṇabrāhmaṇaparibbājakānaṃ sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavārenti. Anacchariyañcetaṃ, yaṃ bhagavā buddhabhūmiṃ patvā etaṃ pavāraṇaṃ pavāreyya. Yo bodhisattabhūmiyaṃ padesañāṇepi ṭhito
憍陈如,这就是人间的法:
当渐至年长时,这重担便落在他身上。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Koṇḍañña pañhāni viyākarohi, Yācanti taṃ isayo sādhurūpā; Koṇḍañña eso manujesu dhammo, Yaṃ vuddhamāgacchati esa bhāro’’ti. (jā. 2.17.60) –
就这样,仙人们为了帝释天等的利益而向他祈请:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sakkādīnaṃ atthāya isīhi yācito
“时机已至,请尊者们提问——
任何心中所欲问的问题;
我必将为你们一一解答那些问题。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Katāvakāsā pucchantu bhonto, Yaṃ kiñci pañhaṃ manasābhipatthitaṃ; Ahañhi taṃ taṃ vo viyākarissaṃ, Ñatvā sayaṃ lokamimaṃ parañcā’’ti. (jā. 2.17.61);
同样地,在萨罗邦伽时代与桑巴瓦本生中,他曾三次游遍整个赡部洲,却始终未能见到能究竟解答问题的人。过了很久以后,有一位婆罗门向他提问,在得到许可之后,当时年仅七岁的孩子正于街道上玩着泥土,便结跏趺坐,就那样坐在了路中间——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sarabhaṅgakāle, sambhavajātake ca sakalajambudīpaṃ tikkhattuṃ vicaritvā pañhānaṃ antakaraṃ adisvā suciratena brāhmaṇena pañhaṃ puṭṭho okāse kārite, jātiyā sattavasso rathikāyaṃ paṃsuṃ kīḷanto pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā antaravīthiyaṃ nisinnova –
我必为你解说,犹如善巧者那般;
而国王亦知晓他,无论他能否做到。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Taggha te ahamakkhissaṃ, yathāpi kusalo tathā; Rājā ca kho taṃ jānāti, yadi kāhati vā na vā’’ti. (jā. 1.16.172) –
他发出了一切知者的邀请。显示巴利原文
Sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavāresi.
当世尊如此以一切知者的身份发出邀请时,他满心欢喜地提问,说道:“那么,乔达摩尊者,如何……”等等。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavatā sabbaññupavāraṇāya pavāritāya attamano pañhaṃ pucchanto, ‘‘kathaṃ pana, bho gotamā’’tiādimāha.
于是,世尊为了不让尼干陀有插话的机会,便按阿说示长老先前所说那样说道:“阿耆毗舍那,我是这样……”等等。他心里想:“你们看,各位贤者!弟子所讲的是一回事,导师所讲的又是另一回事。我先前不是说过吗:‘如果他依弟子所确立的观点来辩,我就会把论辩的矛头指向他。’而现在他说的全然不同,对此我又能做什么呢?”尼干陀说:“乔达摩尊者,有一个譬喻在我心中浮现。”意思是:“乔达摩尊者,我有一个譬喻现前,请让我提出这个譬喻。”世尊说:“阿耆毗舍那,让那譬喻现前吧!阿耆毗舍那,让它现前吧!放心说出你的譬喻。”在这里,“需要依靠力量才能做的”指依靠臂力从事的农耕、经商等工作。“以物质身为我的人”指执取“物质身(色)就是我”的人。“立足于物质身”指立足于那个被执为“我”的物质身。“产生福德或非福德”即获得善或不善。对于受等(受、想、行、识)的解释,也是同样的道理。这说明了什么呢?这五蕴如同大地,是这些众生的立足处;他们依此五蕴,造作善与不善业。而你们在明明有“我”存在的情况显示巴利原文
Athassa bhagavā, ‘‘passatha, bho, aññaṃ sāvakena kathitaṃ, aññaṃ satthā katheti, nanu mayā paṭikacceva vuttaṃ, ‘sace tathā patiṭṭhissati, yathāssa sāvakena patiṭṭhitaṃ, evāhaṃ vādaṃ āropessāmī’ti. Ayaṃ pana aññameva katheti, tattha kiṃ mayā sakkā kātu’’nti evaṃ nigaṇṭhassa vacanokāso mā hotūti heṭṭhā assajittherena kathitaniyāmeneva kathento, evaṃ kho ahaṃ, aggivessanātiādimāha. Upamā maṃ, bho gotama, paṭibhātīti, bho gotama, mayhaṃ ekā upamā upaṭṭhāti, āharāmi taṃ upamanti vadati. Paṭibhātu taṃ, aggivessanāti upaṭṭhātu te, aggivessana, āhara taṃ upamaṃ visatthoti bhagavā avoca. Balakaraṇīyāti bāhubalena kattabbā kasivāṇijjādikā kammantā. Rūpattāyaṃ purisapuggaloti rūpaṃ attā assāti rūpattā, rūpaṃ attāti gahetvā ṭhitapuggalaṃ dīpeti. Rūpe patiṭṭhāyāti tasmiṃ attāti gahitarūpe patiṭṭhahitvā. Puññaṃ vā apuññaṃ vā pasavatīti kusalaṃ vā akusalaṃ vā paṭilabhati. Vedanattādīsupi eseva nayo. Iminā kiṃ dīpeti? Ime pañcakkhandhā imesaṃ sattānaṃ pathavī viya patiṭṭhā, te imesu pañcasu khandhesu patiṭṭhāya kusalākusalakammaṃ nāma āyūhanti. Tumhe evarūpaṃ vijjamānameva attānaṃ paṭisedhento pañcakkhandhā anattāti dīpethāti ativiya sakāraṇaṃ katvā upamaṃ āhari. Iminā ca nigaṇṭhena āhaṭaopammaṃ niyatameva , sabbaññubuddhato añño tassa kathaṃ chinditvā vāde dosaṃ dātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Duvidhā hi puggalā buddhaveneyyā ca sāvakaveneyyā ca. Sāvakaveneyye sāvakāpi vinenti buddhāpi. Buddhaveneyye pana sāvakā vinetuṃ na sakkonti, buddhāva vinenti. Ayampi nigaṇṭho buddhaveneyyo, tasmā etassa vādaṃ chinditvā añño dosaṃ dātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Tenassa bhagavā sayameva vāde dosadassanatthaṃ nanu tvaṃ, aggivessanātiādimāha.
这时,尼干陀心想:“沙门乔达摩极力支持我的观点,倘若往后出现什么漏洞,他必定只会呵斥我一人。也罢,我就把这个观点推到大众头上。”因此他这样说:“乔达摩尊者,我也这样说:色是我……识是我,而且这大群人也这么认为。”然而,世尊比尼干陀远为殊胜,百倍、千倍乃至十万倍,是论师中最为卓越者,于是他心想:“这个尼干陀想自己脱身,把观点扣到大众头上。我不会让他脱身,我要把矛头从大众那里转回来,单单呵斥他一人。”接着,世尊便对他说:“阿耆毗舍那,那又有什么用呢?”等等。这句话的意思是:“这群人来这里并非为了问责于我,只有你独自跑来质疑我,所以你自己承担自己的观点,不要推到大众头上。”尼干陀便承认说:“乔达摩尊者,确实是我……”等等。显示巴利原文
Atha nigaṇṭho cintesi – ‘‘ativiya samaṇo gotamo mama vādaṃ patiṭṭhapeti, sace upari koci doso bhavissati, mamaṃ ekakaṃyeva niggaṇhissati. Handāhaṃ imaṃ vādaṃ mahājanassāpi matthake pakkhipāmī’’ti, tasmā evamāha – ahampi, bho gotama, evaṃ vadāmi rūpaṃ me attā…pe… viññāṇaṃ me attāti, ayañca mahatī janatāti. Bhagavā pana nigaṇṭhato sataguṇenapi sahassaguṇenapi satasahassaguṇenapi vādīvarataro, tasmā cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ nigaṇṭho attānaṃ mocetvā mahājanassa matthake vādaṃ pakkhipati, nāssa attānaṃ mocetuṃ dassāmi, mahājanato nivattetvā ekakaṃyeva naṃ niggaṇhissāmī’’ti. Atha naṃ kiñhi te, aggivessanātiādimāha. Tassattho – nāyaṃ janatā mama vādaṃ āropetuṃ āgatā, tvaṃyeva sakalaṃ vesāliṃ saṃvaṭṭitvā mama vādaṃ āropetuṃ āgato, tasmā tvaṃ sakameva vādaṃ niveṭhehi, mā mahājanassa matthake pakkhipasīti. So paṭijānanto ahañhi, bho gotamātiādimāha.
357 就这样,世尊先确立了尼干陀的主张,然后问道:「那么,阿耆毗舍那……」以此开始了提问。这里,「那么」(tena hi)是表示原因的虚词,意思是:因为你承认五蕴即是我,所以我才如此发问。「于自领土内」(sakasmiṃ vijite):即在自己统辖的国境之内。「该杀的就杀或教人杀」(ghātetāyaṃ vā ghātetuṃ):指对于应受死刑、罪有应得者,可行杀戮或教人杀戮。「该罚没财产的就罚没或教人罚没」(jāpetāyaṃ vā jāpetuṃ):指对于应被剥夺财产、罪有应得者,可罚没其财产、令其破产。「该驱逐的就驱逐或教人驱逐」(pabbājetāyaṃ vā pabbājetuṃ):指对于应从本国逐出、应被流放者,便加以驱逐,将其撵走。「他也拥有这样做的权力」(vattituñca arahati):是指他实际上正这样施行,并且有权如此施行,这是在显示他拥有这些权力。就这样,尼干陀如同一个愚人,为了摧毁自己的主张,反而把对方递来的论据大加发挥,就好比为了杀死自己……显示巴利原文
357. Iti bhagavā nigaṇṭhassa vādaṃ patiṭṭhapetvā, tena hi, aggivessanāti pucchaṃ ārabhi. Tattha tena hīti kāraṇatthe nipāto. Yasmā tvaṃ pañcakkhandhe attato paṭijānāsi, tasmāti attho. Sakasmiṃ vijiteti attano raṭṭhe. Ghātetāyaṃ vā ghātetunti ghātārahaṃ ghātetabbayuttakaṃ ghātetuṃ . Jāpetāyaṃ vā jāpetunti dhanajānirahaṃ jāpetabbayuttaṃ jāpetuṃ jiṇṇadhanaṃ kātuṃ. Pabbājetāyaṃ vā pabbājetunti sakaraṭṭhato pabbājanārahaṃ pabbājetuṃ, nīharituṃ. Vattituñca arahatīti vattati ceva vattituñca arahati. Vattituṃ yuttoti dīpeti. Iti nigaṇṭho attano vādabhedanatthaṃ āhaṭakāraṇameva attano māraṇatthāya āvudhaṃ tikhiṇaṃ karonto viya visesetvā dīpeti, yathā taṃ bālo. Evaṃ me rūpaṃ hotūti mama rūpaṃ evaṃvidhaṃ hotu, pāsādikaṃ abhirūpaṃ alaṅkatappaṭiyattaṃ suvaṇṇatoraṇaṃ viya susajjitacittapaṭo viya ca manāpadassananti. Evaṃ me rūpaṃmā ahosīti mama rūpaṃ evaṃvidhaṃ mā hotu, dubbaṇṇaṃ dussaṇṭhitaṃ valitapalitaṃ tilakasamākiṇṇanti.
「他沉默了」:尼干陀在这一关键时刻自知已经失策,心想:「沙门乔达摩为了攻破我的主张,举出了一个理由。而我却因愚昧,反而特意将它发挥了一通。如今我已彻底输了。我若说『有权主宰』,在场的这些国王便会站起来说:『阿耆毗舍那,你说你对你的色身有权主宰。若你于色身真有主宰权,为何你不能如这些离车族的王族一般,拥有像三十三天神那样光彩照人、端严俊美的身体呢?』我若说『无权主宰』,沙门乔达摩便会站起来说:『阿耆毗舍那,你先前说你对色身有权主宰,如今又改口否定。』他便会这样将论辩的矛头转向我。因此,承认『有权』也有过失,承认『无权』也有过失。」于是他只得沉默不语。世尊第二次发问,他依然沉默。然而,倘若世尊问到第三次而他仍拒不回答,他的头将会裂成七瓣。不过,由于诸佛为饶益众生,历经四不可数劫又十万大劫修满了种种波罗蜜,他们对众生怀有极其深重的悲悯。因此,世尊没有问到第三次,接着便对萨遮迦尼干陀子说了下面这番话——也就是说了「现在你回答吧!」等等的话。显示巴利原文
Tuṇhī ahosīti nigaṇṭho imasmiṃ ṭhāne viraddhabhāvaṃ ñatvā, ‘‘samaṇo gotamo mama vādaṃ bhindanatthāya kāraṇaṃ āhari, ahaṃ bālatāya tameva visesetvā dīpesiṃ, idāni naṭṭhomhi, sace vattatīti vakkhāmi, ime rājāno uṭṭhahitvā, ‘aggivessana, tvaṃ mama rūpe vaso vattatīti vadasi, yadi te rūpe vaso vattati, kasmā tvaṃ yathā ime licchavirājāno tāvatiṃsadevasadisehi attabhāvehi virocanti abhirūpā pāsādikā, evaṃ na virocasī’ti. Sace na vattatīti vakkhāmi, samaṇo gotamo uṭṭhahitvā, ‘aggivessana, tvaṃ pubbe vattati me rūpasmiṃ vasoti vatvā idāni paṭikkhipasī’ti vādaṃ āropessati. Iti vattatīti vuttepi eko doso, na vattatīti vuttepi eko doso’’ti tuṇhī ahosi. Dutiyampi bhagavā pucchi, dutiyampi tuṇhī ahosi. Yasmā pana yāvatatiyaṃ bhagavatā pucchite abyākarontassa sattadhā muddhā phalati, buddhā ca nāma sattānaṃyeva atthāya kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni pāramīnaṃ pūritattā sattesu balavaanuddayā honti. Tasmā yāvatatiyaṃ apucchitvā atha kho bhagavā saccakaṃ nigaṇṭhaputtaṃ etadavoca – etaṃ ‘‘byākarohī dānī’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.
这里,「有理有据的」(sahadhammikaṃ):即有原因、有根据的。「手中持金刚杵者」(vajirapāṇi):即手执金刚杵。「夜叉」:并非指普通夜叉,而当知他就是帝释天。「炽燃的」(ādittaṃ):犹如火焰之色。「猛烈燃烧的」(sampajjalitaṃ):即烧得极为旺盛。「成一团火聚」(sajotibhūtaṃ):即周身遍放光明,化作一整团火焰。「站立着」(ṭhito hoti):是指他化现出硕大的头颅、宛如芭蕉花蕾的獠牙,以及恐怖的眼鼻等种种怪异可怖的形象,如此站立着。那么,他为何特地来此呢?是为了逼迫萨遮迦回答问题。还有另一层原因:当世尊心中生起「我若演说正法而他人却无法理解」的想法,于说法感到些许意兴阑珊时,帝释天曾与大梵天一同前来,许下承诺道:「世尊,请您说法吧!对于不遵从您教令的人,我们自有办法让他们遵从。转动法轮之事属于您,而转动教令轮之事便交给我们吧。」正是由于有此承诺,他今日才特意前来恐吓萨遮迦,以令他回答问题。显示巴利原文
Tattha sahadhammikanti sahetukaṃ sakāraṇaṃ. Vajiraṃ pāṇimhi assāti vajirapāṇi. Yakkhoti na yo vā so vā yakkho, sakko devarājāti veditabbo. Ādittanti aggivaṇṇaṃ. Sampajjalitanti suṭṭhu pajjalitaṃ. Sajotibhūtanti samantato jotibhūtaṃ, ekaggijālabhūtanti attho. Ṭhito hotīti mahantaṃ sīsaṃ, kandalamakulasadisā dāṭhā, bhayānakāni akkhināsādīnīti evaṃ virūparūpaṃ māpetvā ṭhito. Kasmā panesa āgatoti? Diṭṭhivissajjāpanatthaṃ. Apica, ‘‘ahañceva kho pana dhammaṃ deseyyaṃ, pare ca me na ājāneyyu’’nti evaṃ dhammadesanāya appossukkabhāvaṃ āpanne bhagavati sakko mahābrahmunā saddhiṃ āgantvā, ‘‘bhagavā dhammaṃ desetha, tumhākaṃ āṇāya avattamāne mayaṃ vattāpessāma, tumhākaṃ dhammacakkaṃ hotu, amhākaṃ āṇācakka’’nti paṭiññamakāsi. Tasmā ‘‘ajja saccakaṃ tāsetvā pañhaṃ vissajjāpessāmī’’ti āgato.
「世尊看得见,萨遮迦尼干陀子也看得见」:这是说,如果当时其他人也能看见那个夜叉,倒也无妨;然而他们可能会这样非议:「沙门乔达摩知道萨遮迦不会落入自己的言说圈套,便召来夜叉显现出来,萨遮迦是因为害怕才开口的。」因此,只有世尊和萨遮迦两人看见。萨遮迦一见此景,顿时全身汗流如注,腹中剧烈翻腾,发出巨大声响。他环顾四周,想察看旁人是否也看见了,却发现众人连一根毫毛都没有竖起。于是他心想:「这等恐怖之事只落在我一人身上!我若说有夜叉,他们必定会讥笑我:'莫非只有你生着眼睛?只有你一个人看见了夜叉?你先前没见夜叉时,不就已经被沙门乔达摩在论辩中被套住了么?怎么如今倒见着夜叉了?'」思及此处,他心中暗道:「如今在此,除了沙门乔达摩,我再无别的依靠了。」就这样,萨遮迦尼干陀子对世尊说了那番话。「寻求救护」:即寻找保护;「救护」是保护的意思。「寻求庇护」:即寻找藏身之处;「庇护」是人们避难的地方。显示巴利原文
Bhagavāceva passati, saccako ca nigaṇṭhaputtoti yadi hi taṃ aññepi passeyyuṃ. Taṃ kāraṇaṃ agaru assa, ‘‘samaṇo gotamo saccakaṃ attano vāde anotarantaṃ ñatvā yakkhaṃ āvāhetvā dassesi, tato saccako bhayena kathesī’’ti vadeyyuṃ. Tasmā bhagavā ceva passati saccako ca. Tassa taṃ disvāva sakalasarīrato sedā mucciṃsu, antokucchi viparivattamānā mahāravaṃ ravi. So ‘‘aññepi nu kho passantī’’ti olokento kassaci lomahaṃsamattampi na addasa. Tato – ‘‘idaṃ bhayaṃ mameva uppannaṃ. Sacāhaṃ yakkhoti vakkhāmi, ‘kiṃ tuyhameva akkhīni atthi, tvameva yakkhaṃ passasi, paṭhamaṃ yakkhaṃ adisvā samaṇena gotamena vādasaṅghāṭe khittova yakkhaṃ passasī’ti vadeyyu’’nti cintetvā – ‘‘na dāni me idha aññaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ atthi, aññatra samaṇā gotamā’’ti maññamāno, atha kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto…pe… bhagavantaṃ etadavoca. Tāṇaṃ gavesīti tāṇanti gavesamāno. Leṇaṃ gavesīti leṇanti gavesamāno. Saraṇaṃ gavesīti saraṇanti gavesamāno. Ettha ca tāyati rakkhatīti tāṇaṃ. Nilīyanti etthāti leṇaṃ. Saratīti saraṇaṃ, bhayaṃ hiṃsati viddhaṃsetīti attho.
358 「如理作意后」:指将事情放在心中,反复省察、思量、确定之后。「愿我的感受是这样」:即愿它成为善的、乐的。「愿我的想是这样」:即愿它成为善的、乐的,愿它与喜悦相伴。对于「行」与「识」,也是同样的道理。而「愿不要成为这样」这一句,在此应取其相反的意义。「是否妥当呢」:即询问「是不是合乎道理」。「能被视为」:是以「这是我的、我就是这个、这是我的我」这样的贪爱、我慢和邪见来看待。「不,乔达摩尊上,并非如此」:意思是「这不合道理,乔达摩尊上」。就这样,世尊犹如一位善巧的捕蛇人,用同一条蛇让那曾被蛇咬而过毒的人再次被咬,从而将其制伏。同样地,世尊就在那大众之中,令萨遮迦尼干陀子亲口说出了「五取蕴是无常、是苦、是无我」这番话。显示巴利原文
358.Manasi karitvāti manamhi katvā paccavekkhitvā upadhāretvā. Evaṃ me vedanā hotūti kusalāva hotu, sukhāva hotu. Evaṃ me saññā hotūti kusalāva hotu, sukhāva hotu, somanassasampayuttāva hotūti. Saṅkhāraviññāṇesupi eseva nayo. Mā ahosīti ettha pana vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. Kallaṃ nūti yuttaṃ nu. Samanupassitunti ‘‘etaṃ mama esohamasmi eso me attā’’ti evaṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena passituṃ. No hidaṃ, bho gotamāti na yuttametaṃ, bho gotama. Iti bhagavā yathā nāma cheko ahituṇḍiko sappadaṭṭhavisaṃ teneva sappena puna ḍaṃsāpetvā ubbāheyya, evaṃ tassaṃyeva parisati saccakaṃ nigaṇṭhaputtaṃ teneva mukhena pañcakkhandhā aniccā dukkhā anattāti vadāpesi. Dukkhaṃ allīnoti imaṃ pañcakkhandhadukkhaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhīhi allīno. Upagato ajjhositotipi taṇhādiṭṭhivaseneva veditabbo. Dukkhaṃ etaṃ mamātiādīsu pañcakkhandhadukkhaṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena samanupassatīti attho. Parijāneyyāti aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti tīraṇapariññāya parito jāneyya. Parikkhepetvāti khayaṃ vayaṃ anuppādaṃ upanetvā.
359 「嫩」(nava):就是幼嫩的。「没有虫瘿结成的」(akukkukajāta):是指在应该开花的时候,里面会长出一根拇指大小的硬茎,而它是没有这种硬茎的,也就是没有那个硬茎的意思。「空心的」(ritta):指内部空虚无有坚实。「因为空心,所以是空的」(tuccha):正是因为空心的缘故,所以被称为「虚的」。「失败了」(aparaddho):就是被打败了。「可是你刚才已经说过……了呀」(bhāsitā kho pana te):这是世尊为了揭露他多嘴的毛病,以折服他而说的。据说,这个人以前曾经去拜访富楼那等六位外道师,向他们提问。那些人都答不上来。于是,他就在那些人的会众当中,大大羞辱了他们一番,然后起身,宣称自己获得了胜利,扬长而去。他也抱着同样的想法:「我也要像那样去刁难正自觉者。」于是就前来,说了那些话。这就好比一只习惯了啄击不坚实树木的软嘴鸟,这次去啄击质地坚硬的儿茶树,结果把嘴给啄裂了一样。同样地,他碰上了一切知智的坚实,结果撞得智慧之嘴破裂,这才明白了一切知智的坚固程度。因此,他在这会众中,把这事暴露了出来,说了「可是你刚才已经说过……了呀」等等的话。「现在没了」(natthi etarahi):并不是说他的执受之身上从来不出汗,而是单单指「现在这个时候」没有汗。「显露金色身」(suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ kāyaṃ vivarīti):并不是把整个身体都露出来。诸佛通常是系好衣纽,覆盖身体在会众中说法。那一次,世尊是在喉颈的正对面,把衣服稍微提起来,只垂下大约四指宽的一小部分。就在那垂下的一瞬间,金色的光芒一团团地从那里放射出来,就像从金瓶中流出的红金色液体,又像从红色云层中射出的闪电一样,环绕着大肩膀、环绕着最尊贵的头向右旋转,然后跃入虚空。世尊为什么要这样做呢?为了消除大众的疑惑。因为大众会想:「沙门乔达摩说自己没有汗,可尼干陀子萨遮迦的汗却像被榨油机压出来一样流淌。沙门乔达摩穿着两层厚密的衣服坐在那里,里面到底有汗没汗,我们又怎能知道呢?」世尊就是为了消除他们的这种疑惑,才这样做的。「丧气」(maṅkubhūto):就是垂头丧气,没了气势。「垂肩」(pattakkhandho):就是耷拉着肩膀。「无言以对」(appaṭibhāno):就是再也说不出话来。「坐下」(nisīdi):就是灰溜溜地用脚趾在地上划拉着,坐了下来。显示巴利原文
359.Navanti taruṇaṃ. Akukkukajātanti pupphaggahaṇakāle anto aṅguṭṭhappamāṇo eko ghanadaṇḍako nibbattati, tena virahitanti attho. Rittoti suñño antosāravirahito. Rittattāva tuccho. Aparaddhoti parājito. Bhāsitā kho pana teti idaṃ bhagavā tassa mukharabhāvaṃ pakāsetvā niggaṇhanto āha. So kira pubbe pūraṇādayo cha satthāro upasaṅkamitvā pañhaṃ pucchati. Te vissajjetuṃ na sakkonti. Atha nesaṃ parisamajjhe mahantaṃ vippakāraṃ āropetvā uṭṭhāya jayaṃ pavedento gacchati. So sammāsambuddhampi tatheva viheṭhessāmīti saññāya upasaṅkamitvā –
「杜姆卡」(dummukha)此名,并非指他容貌丑陋;实际上,他相貌端正,颇为好看,这只是他的名字而已。「他再也不能进入那个池塘了」(abhabbo taṃ pokkharaṇiṃ puna otarituṃ):指它的翅膀与羽毛全部折断,前路已断,无法再入,便在那里成了乌鸦、老鹰的食物。「见解上的歪曲路径」(visūkāyikāni):即种种邪见的歪曲之路。「所游历过的地方」(visevitāni):就是以邪见为依止而游走之处。「种种的挣扎纷扰」(vipphanditāni):便是在邪见上的种种冲动与纷争。「之所以会说这些论诤的想法」(yadidaṃ vādādhippāyo):此处「yadidaṃ」仅为语气虚词。整句的意思是说:如果满怀着辩论的念头,抱着‘我要发起一场论战’的心态前来,他是做不到的;但若是抱着听闻正法的心情而来,那便可以。「他对离车族的杜姆卡这样说」——他为何这样说呢?因为当杜姆卡引用譬喻时,其余那些离车族的年轻人都在想:「我们学艺显示巴利原文
‘‘Ambho ko nāma yaṃ rukkho, sinnapatto sakaṇṭako;
「请止住这种说法吧,乔达摩尊者!」(tiṭṭhatesā, bho gotamā),意思是:乔达摩尊者,你们这种说法,以及我们和众多沙门、婆罗门所持的说法,都请暂止。「我觉得这全是在说胡话」(vilāpaṃ vilapitaṃ maññe):也就是说,这些话如同胡言乱语一般,与讲说虚妄不实的废语没有差别。又或者,在「且止」一词处应补出「谈论」(kathā)之意。而后一句「我觉得这全是在说胡话」,则是指这样的发言纯属虚妄之言。显示巴利原文
Yattha ekappahārena, uttamaṅgaṃ vibhijjita’’nti.
正如一只惯于啄击不坚实树木的软嘴鸟,去啄那质地坚硬的儿茶树,结果喙嘴破裂一般。同样地,他触碰到一切知智的坚实,致使智慧之嘴折断,这才了知一切知智的坚不可摧。因此,他在这会众之中,将此事暴露出来,说出「可是你刚才已经说过……了」等语。「现在没了」(natthi etarahi):并非说他的执受之身从不流汗,而是单指「现在这一刻」没有汗。「显露金色身」(suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ kāyaṃ vivarīti):并不是把整个身体都显露出来。诸佛通常系好衣纽,覆盖身体在会众中说法。那一次,世尊只是在喉颈正对面,将衣服稍稍提开,只垂下约四指宽度的一小部分。就在那垂下的一瞬间,金色的光芒一团团地从那里放射而出,宛如从金瓶中流出的红金色液体,又如从赤色云层中射出的闪电,环绕着如同金鼓般的宽厚肩膀、环绕着最尊贵的头顶向右旋绕,而后跃入虚空。世尊为何要这样做呢?是为了消除大众的疑惑。因为大众会想:「沙门乔达摩自称没有汗,可尼乾陀子萨遮迦的汗却像被榨油机压出来一样流淌显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ khadiraṃ āhacca asārakarukkhaparicito mudutuṇḍasakuṇo viya sabbaññutaññāṇasāraṃ āhacca ñāṇatuṇḍabhedaṃ patto sabbaññutaññāṇassa thaddhabhāvaṃ aññāsi. Tadassa parisamajjhe pakāsento bhāsitā kho pana tetiādimāha. Natthi etarahīti upādinnakasarīre sedo nāma natthīti na vattabbaṃ, etarahi pana natthīti vadati. Suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ kāyaṃ vivarīti na sabbaṃ kāyaṃ vivari. Buddhā nāma gaṇṭhikaṃ paṭimuñcitvā paṭicchannasarīrā parisati dhammaṃ desenti. Atha bhagavā galavāṭakasammukhaṭṭhāne cīvaraṃ gahetvā caturaṅgulamattaṃ otāresi. Otāritamatte pana tasmiṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇā rasmiyo puñjapuñjā hutvā suvaṇṇaghaṭato rattasuvaṇṇarasadhārā viya, rattavaṇṇavalāhakato vijjulatā viya ca nikkhamitvā suvaṇṇamurajasadisaṃ mahākhandhaṃ uttamasiraṃ padakkhiṇaṃ kurumānā ākāse pakkhandiṃsu. Kasmā pana bhagavā evamakāsīti? Mahājanassa kaṅkhāvinodanatthaṃ. Mahājano hi samaṇo gotamo mayhaṃ sedo natthīti vadati, saccakassa tāva nigaṇṭhaputtassa yantāruḷhassa viya sedā paggharanti. Samaṇo pana gotamo ghanadupaṭṭacīvaraṃ pārupitvā nisinno, anto sedassa atthitā vā natthitā vā kathaṃ sakkā ñātunti kaṅkhaṃ kareyya, tassa kaṅkhāvinodanatthaṃ evamakāsi. Maṅkubhūtoti nittejabhūto. Pattakkhandhoti patitakkhandho. Appaṭibhānoti uttari appassanto. Nisīdīti pādaṅguṭṭhakena bhūmiṃ kasamāno nisīdi.
360 「丑面」并非指他面容丑陋,他其实相貌端正、令人愉悦,这只是他的名字。「不能再进入那池塘」的意思是,由于所有莲藕的茎都已折断,去路断绝,无法再进入,他便只能留在原处,成为乌鸦、鹰鹫等的食物,以此说明。所说的「邪曲」,是指见解上的歪曲。「妄动」,是指见解上的游移。「挣扎」,是指见解上的动荡。「也就是以论诤为目的」之中的「也就是」,只是一个语助词;整句话的意思是,他不可能抱着“我要把论诤强加于你”的意图去接近世尊;这是为了表明,他仅仅是为了听闻正法才会前去。「对丑面离车族之子这么说」:为何要这样说呢?据说,当丑面正在举出譬喻之时,其余的离车族青年们心里也在想:“这个尼干陀在我们学习技艺之处,长久以来都蔑视我们,现在正是看这个仇敌受挫的好时机。我们也要每人各自举出一个譬喻,如同用杵在臼中捣打跌落的谷粒那样对付他,让他从此再也无法在众人面前抬起头来。”于是他们各自想好了种种譬喻,坐着等待丑面把话说完。萨遮迦知道了他们的心思,心想:“这些家伙全都伸长脖子、嘴唇颤抖地站着;要是让他们有机会各自去讲说譬喻,那我就再也别想显示巴利原文
360.Dummukhoti na virūpamukho, abhirūpo hi so pāsādiko. Nāmaṃ panassa etaṃ. Abhabbo taṃ pokkharaṇiṃ puna otaritunti sabbesaṃ aḷānaṃ bhaggattā pacchinnagamano otarituṃ abhabbo, tattheva kākakulalādīnaṃ bhattaṃ hotīti dasseti. Visūkāyikānīti diṭṭhivisūkāni. Visevitānīti diṭṭhisañcaritāni. Vipphanditānīti diṭṭhivipphanditāni. Yadidaṃ vādādhippāyoti ettha yadidanti nipātamattaṃ; vādādhippāyo hutvā vādaṃ āropessāmīti ajjhāsayena upasaṅkamituṃ abhabbo; dhammassavanāya pana upasaṅkameyyāti dasseti. Dummukhaṃ licchaviputtaṃ etadavocāti kasmā avoca ? Dummukhassa kirassa upamāharaṇakāle sesa licchavikumārāpi cintesuṃ – ‘‘iminā nigaṇṭhena amhākaṃ sippuggahaṇaṭṭhāne ciraṃ avamāno kato, ayaṃ dāni amittassa piṭṭhiṃ passituṃ kālo. Mayampi ekekaṃ upamaṃ āharitvā pāṇippahārena patitaṃ muggarena pothento viya tathā naṃ karissāma, yathā na puna parisamajjhe sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ sakkhissatī’’ti, te opammāni karitvā dummukhassa kathāpariyosānaṃ āgamayamānā nisīdiṃsu. Saccako tesaṃ adhippāyaṃ ñatvā, ime sabbeva gīvaṃ ukkhipitvā oṭṭhehi calamānehi ṭhitā; sace paccekā upamā harituṃ labhissanti, puna mayā parisamajjhe sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ na sakkā bhavissati, handāhaṃ dummukhaṃ apasādetvā yathā aññassa okāso na hoti, evaṃ kathāvāraṃ pacchinditvā samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ pañhaṃ pucchissāmīti tasmā etadavoca. Tattha āgamehīti tiṭṭha, mā puna bhaṇāhīti attho.
361 「且让它停在那里吧,乔达摩贤者」的意思是:乔达摩贤者啊,让这句我们以及其他众多沙门婆罗门所说的话,就停在那里吧。将其「看作是哀号妄语」,因为这话犹如哀号一般,意思只是胡乱说说而已。或者,在理解「且让它停在那里吧」这句话时,应当将「谈论」一词补充进去来理解。而「把言语的哀号当作妄语」这句话的意思则是:我认为这种言语的发出,就仅仅是哀号罢了。显示巴利原文
361.Tiṭṭhatesā, bho gotamāti, bho gotama, esā amhākañceva aññesañca puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ vācā tiṭṭhatu. Vilāpaṃ vilapitaṃ maññeti etañhi vacanaṃ vilapitaṃ viya hoti, vippalapitamattaṃ hotīti attho. Atha vā tiṭṭhatesāti ettha kathāti āharitvā vattabbā. Vācāvilāpaṃ vilapitaṃ maññeti ettha panidaṃ vācānicchāraṇaṃ vilapitamattaṃ maññe hotīti attho.
现在,提问时,他开始说道「做到怎样」等语。此中,「达到自信者」的意思是已证得智慧。「不依他者」是指不依赖他人教说之人。接着,世尊在解答问题时,说出了「在此,火种居士」等开头的话,其义浅显明了。然而,因为此处使用了「他看见」这样的表述,所以显示的是有学地。因此,为了进一步询问无学地,他又问了第二个问题,世尊也为他作了解答。在此,「见无上」等说法中,「见无上」是指世间与出世间的智慧;「行道无上」是指世间与出世间的行道;「解脱无上」是指世间与出世间的解脱。或者,仅就纯粹的出世间而言:「见无上」即是阿拉汉道的正见;「行道无上」即是其余的道支;「解脱无上」即是最殊胜的果证解脱。或者,应当了知,诸漏尽者对涅槃的观见,称为「见无上」;道支是「行道无上」;最殊胜的果证是「解脱无上」。显示巴利原文
Idāni pañhaṃ pucchanto kittāvatātiādimāha. Tattha vesārajjapattoti ñāṇapatto. Aparappaccayoti aparappattiyo. Athassa bhagavā pañhaṃ vissajjento idha, aggivessanātiādimāha, taṃ uttānatthameva. Yasmā panettha passatīti vuttattā sekkhabhūmi dassitā. Tasmā uttari asekkhabhūmiṃ pucchanto dutiyaṃ pañhaṃ pucchi, tampissa bhagavā byākāsi . Tattha dassanānuttariyenātiādīsu dassanānuttariyanti lokiyalokuttarā paññā. Paṭipadānuttariyanti lokiyalokuttarā paṭipadā. Vimuttānuttariyanti lokiyalokuttarā vimutti. Suddhalokuttarameva vā gahetvā dassanānuttariyanti arahattamaggasammādiṭṭhi. Paṭipadānuttariyanti sesāni maggaṅgāni. Vimuttānuttariyanti aggaphalavimutti. Khīṇāsavassa vā nibbānadassanaṃ dassanānuttariyaṃ nāma. Maggaṅgāni paṭipadānuttariyaṃ. Aggaphalaṃ vimuttānuttariyanti veditabbaṃ. Buddho so bhagavāti so bhagavā sayampi cattāri saccāni buddho. Bodhāyāti paresampi catusaccabodhāya dhammaṃ deseti. Dantotiādīsu dantoti nibbisevano. Damathāyāti nibbisevanatthāya. Santoti sabbakilesavūpasamena santo. Samathāyāti kilesavūpasamāya. Tiṇṇoti caturoghatiṇṇo. Taraṇāyāti caturoghataraṇāya. Parinibbutoti kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto. Parinibbānāyāti kilesaparinibbānatthāya.
362 「毁坏者」(Dhaṃsī):指毁坏功德的人。「鲁莽者」(Pagabbā):指言辞鲁莽的人。「可被触恼者」(Āsādetabbaṃ):意为可被触怒、冒犯的。「触恼之后」(Āsajjā):即冒犯、冲撞之后。「又怎能不冒犯乔达摩尊者而脱身呢」(Natveva bhavantaṃ gotamanti):这表明,在触恼乔达摩尊者之后,没有人能带着自己那套未被驳倒的完整言论全身而退。因为,世尊并不会像大象等那样,去危害任何人的生命。然而,这位尼干陀举出这三个譬喻,用意并非赞叹世尊,而是在赞叹他自己。这就好比一位国王处决了某个敌人后,又去称赞那个敌人说‘如此英勇、如此有力量的人,必是一位英雄吧’,表面上是称赞敌人,实则是为了彰显自己的功绩。同样地,他也是如此:他所说的‘乔达摩尊者啊,可能会有……’云云,表面上看像是在赞叹世尊,说‘如同发情的大象、如同燃烧的火堆、如同竖起颈部的毒蛇一般,我们这些勇敢、智慧、多闻的人,就这样为了辩论而来亲近正自觉者。’但实际上,他这番话全是在赞美他自己。如此称赞完自己后,他邀请世尊时,便说了「请接受」(adhivāsetu me)等话语。显示巴利原文
362.Dhaṃsīti guṇadhaṃsakā. Pagabbāti vācāpāgabbiyena samannāgatā. Āsādetabbanti ghaṭṭetabbaṃ. Āsajjāti ghaṭṭetvā. Natveva bhavantaṃ gotamanti bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ āsajja kassaci attano vādaṃ anupahataṃ sakalaṃ ādāya pakkamituṃ thāmo natthīti dasseti. Na hi bhagavā hatthiādayo viya kassaci jīvitantarāyaṃ karoti. Ayaṃ pana nigaṇṭho imā tisso upamā na bhagavato ukkaṃsanatthaṃ āhari, attukkaṃsanatthameva āhari. Yathā hi rājā kañci paccatthikaṃ ghātetvā evaṃ nāma sūro evaṃ thāmasampanno puriso bhavissatīti paccatthikaṃ thomentopi attānameva thometi. Evameva sopi siyā hi, bho gotama, hatthiṃ pabhinnantiādīhi bhagavantaṃ ukkaṃsentopi mayameva sūrā mayaṃ paṇḍitā mayaṃ bahussutāyeva evaṃ pabhinnahatthiṃ viya, jalitaaggikkhandhaṃ viya, phaṇakataāsīvisaṃ viya ca vādatthikā sammāsambuddhaṃ upasaṅkamimhāti attānaṃyeva ukkaṃseti. Evaṃ attānaṃ ukkaṃsetvā bhagavantaṃ nimantayamāno adhivāsetu metiādimāha. Tattha adhivāsetūti sampaṭicchatu. Svātanāyāti yaṃ me tumhesu kāraṃ karoto sve bhavissati puññañca pītipāmojjañca, tadatthāya. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvenāti bhagavā kāyaṅgaṃ vā vācaṅgaṃ vā acopetvā abbhantareyeva khantiṃ dhārento tuṇhībhāvena adhivāsesi. Saccakassa anuggahakaraṇatthaṃ manasāva sampaṭicchīti vuttaṃ hoti.
363 「你们若认为什么是适合他的」(Yamassa patirūpaṃ maññeyyāthā):据说,那些离车族人日常会固定供养萨遮迦五百锅饭。针对此事,他这么说:‘明天,你们若认为有什么食物是适合沙门乔达摩、为他所许可的,就供养那些吧。毕竟你们是沙门乔达摩的侍者,知道何为适宜、何为不适宜,何为恰当、何为不恰当。’「他们进行了饮食供养」(Bhattābhihāraṃ abhihariṃsū):意为他们供养了应当被供养的食物。「以殊妙的」(paṇītena):即以精致的饮食。「亲手」(Sahatthā):用自己的手进行供养。「令饱足」(Santappetvā):让他充分地吃饱,全然满足,所需无缺。「请辞」(Sampavāretvā):请他明确示意‘已经足够,不用了’,即通过手势表示拒绝,请他不再接受。「食讫」(Bhuttāvin):已经吃完了。「钵已离手」(Onītapattapāṇi):手已从钵上移开,即手已经放下钵。另有一处读作‘Onittapattapāṇi’,其含义是:洗净了钵,钵已清净。显示巴利原文
363.Yamassa patirūpaṃ maññeyyāthāti te kira licchavī tassa pañcathālipākasatāni niccabhattaṃ āharanti . Tadeva sandhāya esa sve tumhe yaṃ assa samaṇassa gotamassa patirūpaṃ kappiyanti maññeyyātha, taṃ āhareyyātha; samaṇassa hi gotamassa tumhe paricārakā kappiyākappiyaṃ yuttāyuttaṃ jānāthāti vadati. Bhattābhihāraṃ abhihariṃsūti abhiharitabbaṃ bhattaṃ abhihariṃsu. Paṇītenāti uttamena. Sahatthāti sahatthena. Santappetvāti suṭṭhu tappetvā, paripuṇṇaṃ suhitaṃ yāvadatthaṃ katvā. Sampavāretvāti suṭṭhu pavāretvā, alaṃ alanti hatthasaññāya paṭikkhipāpetvā. Bhuttāvinti bhuttavantaṃ. Onītapattapāṇinti pattato onītapāṇiṃ, apanītahatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Onittapattapāṇi’’ntipi pāṭho, tassattho, onittaṃ nānābhūtaṃ pattaṃ pāṇito assāti onittapattapāṇī. Taṃ onittapattapāṇiṃ, hatthe ca pattañca dhovitvā ekamante pattaṃ nikkhipitvā nisinnanti attho. Ekamantaṃ nisīdīti bhagavantaṃ evaṃbhūtaṃ ñatvā ekasmiṃ okāse nisīdīti attho. Puññañcāti yaṃ imasmiṃ dāne puññaṃ, āyatiṃ vipākakkhandhāti attho. Puññamahīti vipākakkhandhānaṃyeva parivāro. Taṃ dāyakānaṃ sukhāya hotūti taṃ imesaṃ licchavīnaṃ sukhatthāya hotu. Idaṃ kira so ahaṃ pabbajito nāma, pabbajitena ca na yuttaṃ attano dānaṃ niyyātetunti tesaṃ niyyātento evamāha. Atha bhagavā yasmā licchavīhi saccakassa dinnaṃ, na bhagavato. Saccakena pana bhagavato dinnaṃ, tasmā tamatthaṃ dīpento yaṃ kho, aggivessanātiādimāha. Iti bhagavā nigaṇṭhassa matena vināyeva attano dinnaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ nigaṇṭhassa niyyātesi, sā cassa anāgate vāsanā bhavissatīti.
第六、《大萨遮迦经》注释显示巴利原文
6. Mahāsaccakasuttavaṇṇanā
364 「如是我闻」等,即是《大萨遮迦经》。其中,「一时」、「尔时」和「午前时分」这三句,所指的其实是同一个时间。要知道,比丘们履行完义务,洗脸,取钵与衣,礼敬塔庙,而后站在思虑处,心中正思量‘我们要进哪个村子呢?’——那便正是此处所说的那个时刻。世尊正是在这样的时分,穿上双层下衣,系好腰带,将粪扫衣偏袒右肩披好,从香室出来,由比丘僧团围绕,站在香室之前。正是由于这样的背景,才说「一时」、「尔时」、「午前时分」。「欲入」:指已经生起了‘我要进村乞食’的决定。「即往世尊处」——他为何而去?因为他怀着挑起辩论的意图。据说他心中这样思量:‘过去我因为愚蠢,带着整个毘舍离的会众去到沙门乔达摩那里,结果在大众面前丢尽了脸。现在我不再做那样的傻事了,我要单独去见他,发起辩论。如果我能击败沙门乔达摩,便可以阐扬自己的主张,取得胜利;而如果沙门乔达摩赢了……’显示巴利原文
364.Evaṃme sutanti mahāsaccakasuttaṃ. Tattha ekaṃ samayanti ca tena kho pana samayenāti ca pubbaṇhasamayanti ca tīhi padehi ekova samayo vutto. Bhikkhūnañhi vattapaṭipattiṃ katvā mukhaṃ dhovitvā pattacīvaramādāya cetiyaṃ vanditvā kataraṃ gāmaṃ pavisissāmāti vitakkamāḷake ṭhitakālo nāma hoti. Bhagavā evarūpe samaye rattadupaṭṭaṃ nivāsetvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ ekaṃsaṃ pārupitvā gandhakuṭito nikkhamma bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto gandhakuṭipamukhe aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ sandhāya, – ‘‘ekaṃ samayanti ca tena kho pana samayenāti ca pubbaṇhasamaya’’nti ca vuttaṃ. Pavisitukāmoti piṇḍāya pavisissāmīti evaṃ katasanniṭṭhāno. Tenupasaṅkamīti kasmā upasaṅkamīti? Vādāropanajjhāsayena. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘pubbepāhaṃ apaṇḍitatāya sakalaṃ vesāliparisaṃ gahetvā samaṇassa gotamassa santikaṃ gantvā parisamajjhe maṅku jāto. Idāni tathā akatvā ekakova gantvā vādaṃ āropessāmi. Yadi samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ parājetuṃ sakkhissāmi, attano laddhiṃ dīpetvā jayaṃ karissāmi. Yadi samaṇassa gotamassa jayo bhavissati, andhakāre naccaṃ viya na koci jānissatī’’ti niddāpañhaṃ nāma gahetvā iminā vādajjhāsayena upasaṅkami.
“出于悲愍”(anukampaṃ upādāya),是指出于对尼干陀子萨遮迦的悲愍。据说阿难长老那时心中这样想:“只要世尊稍坐片刻,他就能获得见佛、闻法的机会,这会带给他长远的利益与安乐。”因此,他请求世尊后,将粪扫衣四折叠好铺开,说:“请世尊坐。”世尊观察到“阿难这么说是有原因的”,便在敷好的座位上坐下。“他对世尊这样说”——他原本将那个问题当作压轴利器带来,却先搁置一旁,暂且避开,说出了“沙门乔达摩,有这样一种寂静……”那番话。显示巴利原文
Anukampaṃ upādāyāti saccakassa nigaṇṭhaputtassa anukampaṃ paṭicca. Therassa kirassa evaṃ ahosi – ‘‘bhagavati muhuttaṃ nisinne buddhadassanaṃ dhammassavanañca labhissati. Tadassa dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya saṃvattissatī’’ti. Tasmā bhagavantaṃ yācitvā paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ catugguṇaṃ paññapetvā nisīdatu bhagavāti āha. ‘‘Kāraṇaṃ ānando vadatī’’ti sallakkhetvā nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane. Bhagavantaṃ etadavocāti yaṃ pana pañhaṃ ovaṭṭikasāraṃ katvā ādāya āgato taṃ ṭhapetvā passena tāva pariharanto etaṃ santi, bho gotamātiādivacanaṃ avoca.
365 “沙门乔达摩,他们确实感受”(phusanti hi te, bho gotama),意指那些沙门、婆罗门感受、经验、体验身体内生起的身受苦受。“双腿僵直”(ūrukkhambho),指双腿如柱般僵硬,即大腿僵直。此处是因感叹而使用未来式“将会发生”(bhavissatī)。“随逐于身”(kāyanvayaṃ hoti),指随逐身体、被身体所支配。然而,这里所说的“身修习”(kāyabhāvanā)实指观(vipassanā),修观决不可能导致心散乱。可见尼干陀所说是无有、虚妄、全无实义之事。所谓“心修习”(cittabhāvanā),是指止(samatha);一个安住于定的人,根本不可能出现腿僵直等现象。因此,尼干陀又说了不实之事。注疏中还提到:“如同他先说‘过去发生过’,接着又说‘乃至双腿僵硬也会发生’之类的话,前后完全不符未来事理,于此义理也根本说不通,纯属无有、虚妄、全无实义之说。”显示巴利原文
365.Phusanti hi te, bho gotamāti te samaṇabrāhmaṇā sarīre uppannaṃ sārīrikaṃ dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ phusanti labhanti, anubhavantīti attho. Ūrukkhambhoti khambhakataūrubhāvo, ūruthaddhatāti attho. Vimhayatthavasena panettha bhavissatīti anāgatavacanaṃ kataṃ. Kāyanvayaṃ hotīti kāyānugataṃ hoti kāyassa vasavatti. Kāyabhāvanāti pana vipassanā vuccati, tāya cittavikkhepaṃ pāpuṇanto nāma natthi, iti nigaṇṭho asantaṃ abhūtaṃ yaṃ natthi, tadevāha. Cittabhāvanātipi samatho vuccati, samādhiyuttassa ca puggalassa ūrukkhambhādayo nāma natthi, iti nigaṇṭho idaṃ abhūtameva āha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘yatheva ‘bhūtapubbanti vatvā ūrukkhambhopi nāma bhavissatī’tiādīni vadato anāgatarūpaṃ na sameti, tathā atthopi na sameti, asantaṃ abhūtaṃ yaṃ natthi, taṃ kathetī’’ti.
“没有身修习”(no kāyabhāvanā),是针对五火炙身等自我折磨的苦行而说的,因为在他们看来,那才称为“身修习”。那么,他究竟是看到了什么,才这样讲呢?据说,他于日间来到僧园,那时比丘们正好收起钵和衣,各自回到夜间或白昼的住处,进入独处禅修。他看到比丘们独处禅修的情形,便以为:“这些人只修心修习,根本没有身修习。”于是说出这番话。显示巴利原文
No kāyabhāvananti pañcātapatappanādiṃ attakilamathānuyogaṃ sandhāyāha. Ayañhi tesaṃ kāyabhāvanā nāma. Kiṃ pana so disvā evamāha? So kira divādivassa vihāraṃ āgacchati, tasmiṃ kho pana samaye bhikkhū pattacīvaraṃ paṭisāmetvā attano attano rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānesu paṭisallānaṃ upagacchanti. So te paṭisallīne disvā cittabhāvanāmattaṃ ete anuyuñjanti, kāyabhāvanā panetesaṃ natthīti maññamāno evamāha.
366 于是,世尊追问他:“阿耆毗舍那,你所听说的身修习又是怎样的呢?”他便详细说明,诸如“难陀婆阇”等。其中,“难陀”是名,“婆阇”是姓;“基娑”是名,“僧柯阇”是姓;末迦梨·瞿舍罗前面已提过。“这些”即指此三人,据说他们在染污苦行中达到了极点。“粗大、粗大”意为极胜妙、极殊胜。“令人执取”指让人获得力量。“令增长”即使之增广。“令生脂肪”即使人长胖。“舍弃前一种”指放弃先前的苦行。“然后积累”指后来以精美食物等滋养、增补。“有积集与损减”即指有增长与减少。他就这样指出:这个身体只是一时增长,一时减损,所显现的无非是增减的变化。显示巴利原文
366. Atha naṃ bhagavā anuyuñjanto kinti pana te, aggivessana, kāyabhāvanā sutāti āha. So taṃ vitthārento seyyathidaṃ, nando vacchotiādimāha. Tattha nandoti tassa nāmaṃ. Vacchoti gottaṃ. Kisoti nāmaṃ. Saṃkiccoti gottaṃ. Makkhaligosālo heṭṭhā āgatova. Eteti ete tayo janā, te kira kiliṭṭhatapānaṃ matthakapattā ahesuṃ. Uḷārāni uḷārānīti paṇītāni paṇītāni. Gāhenti nāmāti balaṃ gaṇhāpenti nāma. Brūhentīti vaḍḍhenti. Medentīti jātamedaṃ karonti. Purimaṃ pahāyāti purimaṃ dukkarakāraṃ pahāya. Pacchā upacinantīti pacchā uḷārakhādanīyādīhi santappenti, vaḍḍhenti. Ācayāpacayo hotīti vaḍḍhi ca avaḍḍhi ca hoti, iti imassa kāyassa kālena vaḍḍhi, kālena parihānīti vaḍḍhiparihānimattameva paññāyati, kāyabhāvanā pana na paññāyatīti dīpetvā cittabhāvanaṃ pucchanto, ‘‘kinti pana te, aggivessana, cittabhāvanā sutā’’ti āha. Na sampāyāsīti sampādetvā kathetuṃ nāsakkhi, yathā taṃ bālaputhujjano.
367 “你又怎能……”意思是:你连如此粗重、衰弱的身修习都不了解,又怎能了知那微细、深妙的心修习呢?在这点上,执责长老说:“这句话根本不像佛语。”便放下扇子,准备起身离去。这时,大尸婆长老对他说:“诸比丘,可以见到这个由四大种构成的身体,有积集、有损减、有执取、有舍弃。”执责长老听了这句话后,便确定地想:“当以粗重之身为所缘时,将由此生起的观称为‘粗’,是说得通的。”显示巴利原文
367.Kutopana tvanti yo tvaṃ evaṃ oḷārikaṃ dubbalaṃ kāyabhāvanaṃ na jānāsi? So tvaṃ kuto saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ cittabhāvanaṃ jānissasīti. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne codanālayatthero, ‘‘abuddhavacanaṃ nāmetaṃ pada’’nti bījaniṃ ṭhapetvā pakkamituṃ ārabhi. Atha naṃ mahāsīvatthero āha – ‘‘dissati, bhikkhave, imassa cātumahābhūtikassa kāyassa ācayopi apacayopi ādānampi nikkhepanampī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.62). Taṃ sutvā sallakkhesi – ‘‘oḷārikaṃ kāyaṃ pariggaṇhantassa uppannavipassanā oḷārikāti vattuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti.
368 “贪着乐”:即具足对乐的贪染。“从乐受的灭,生起苦受”——这并不是说乐受消失后,苦受便无间地生起,因为在《发趣论》中,乐与苦之间并不存在无间缘的关系。然而,由于乐尚未灭时,苦便不会生起,故在此处作此表述。“遍取而住立”:是指耗尽乐、执取乐之后,便那样地保持不动。“两方的”:乐为一方,苦为另一方,如此成为相对的两方。显示巴利原文
368.Sukhasārāgīti sukhasārāgena samannāgato. Sukhāya vedanāya nirodhā uppajjati dukkhā vedanāti na anantarāva uppajjati, sukhadukkhānañhi anantarapaccayatā paṭṭhāne (paṭṭhā. 1.2.45-46) paṭisiddhā. Yasmā pana sukhe aniruddhe dukkhaṃ nuppajjati, tasmā idha evaṃ vuttaṃ. Pariyādāya tiṭṭhatīti khepetvā gaṇhitvā tiṭṭhati. Ubhatopakkhanti sukhaṃ ekaṃ pakkhaṃ dukkhaṃ ekaṃ pakkhanti evaṃ ubhatopakkhaṃ hutvā.
369 已生起的乐受不能制伏心而持续存在,是因为身已修习;已生起的苦受不能制伏心而持续存在,是因为心已修习。此处,身修习是观,心修习是定。观是乐的对治,却近于苦;定是苦的对治,却近于乐。何以故?安住于观而坐的人,在长时间持续中,身体各处如火烧燃,腋下流汗,头顶仿佛冒出热气,心被摧击、被折磨、动荡不安。如此,观确实是乐的对治,而亲近于苦。然而,当身体或心理的苦生起时,进入等至而镇伏彼苦,在等至的刹那,苦便远远离去,无量的乐渗入。如此,定确实是苦的对治,而亲近于乐。正如观是乐的对治、亲近于苦,定却并非如此;正如定是苦的对治、亲近于乐,观也并非如此。因此说:‘已生起的乐受不能制伏心而持续存在,是因为身已修习;已生起的苦受不能制伏心而持续存在,是因为心已修习。’显示巴利原文
369.Uppannāpi sukhā vedanā cittaṃ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, bhāvitattā kāyassa. Uppannāpi dukkhā vedanā cittaṃ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, bhāvitattā cittassāti ettha kāyabhāvanā vipassanā, cittabhāvanā samādhi. Vipassanā ca sukhassa paccanīkā, dukkhassa āsannā. Samādhi dukkhassa paccanīko, sukhassa āsanno. Kathaṃ? Vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā nisinnassa hi addhāne gacchante gacchante tattha tattha aggiuṭṭhānaṃ viya hoti, kacchehi sedā muccanti, matthakato usumavaṭṭiuṭṭhānaṃ viya hotīti cittaṃ haññati vihaññati vipphandati. Evaṃ tāva vipassanā sukhassa paccanīkā, dukkhassa āsannā. Uppanne pana kāyike vā cetasike vā dukkhe taṃ dukkhaṃ vikkhambhetvā samāpattiṃ samāpannassa samāpattikkhaṇe dukkhaṃ dūrāpagataṃ hoti, anappakaṃ sukhaṃ okkamati. Evaṃ samādhi dukkhassa paccanīko, sukhassa āsanno. Yathā vipassanā sukhassa paccanīkā, dukkhassa āsannā, na tathā samādhi. Yathā samādhi dukkhassa paccanīko, sukhassa āsanno, na ca tathā vipassanāti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘uppannāpi sukhā vedanā cittaṃ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, bhāvitattā kāyassa. Uppannāpi dukkhā vedanā cittaṃ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, bhāvitattā cittassā’’ti.
370 Āsajjaupanīyā 意为:触犯功德之后,又将其导引过来。Taṃ vata me 则意为:那确实就是我的心。显示巴利原文
370.Āsajjaupanīyāti guṇe ghaṭṭetvā ceva upanetvā ca. Taṃ vata meti taṃ vata mama cittaṃ.
371 “Kiñhi no siyā, aggivessana”:阿耆毗舍那!怎么会没有呢?必定会有。你不要这样想,我的确生起了乐受与苦受,然而对于已生起的受,我不让心被它控制而持续存在。此时,为阐明此义,世尊欲宣说令人增长净信的法教,于是从头开始讲述大出离。其中“阿耆毗舍那!在我未成正觉之前……就在那里坐下了,这足以精勤了”这一段,完全可依《帕萨拉西经》中所说的方式来理解。不过,这里有一处差别:彼处是坐于菩提座下,而此处乃是说修苦行。显示巴利原文
371.Kiñhi no siyā, aggivessanāti, aggivessana, kiṃ na bhavissati, bhavissateva, mā evaṃ saññī hohi, uppajjiyeva me sukhāpi dukkhāpi vedanā, uppannāya panassā ahaṃ cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhātuṃ na demi. Idānissa tamatthaṃ pakāsetuṃ upari pasādāvahaṃ dhammadesanaṃ desetukāmo mūlato paṭṭhāya mahābhinikkhamanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha idha me, aggivessana, pubbeva sambodhā…pe… tattheva nisīdiṃ, alamidaṃ padhānāyāti idaṃ sabbaṃ heṭṭhā pāsarāsisutte vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso, tattha bodhipallaṅke nisajjā, idha dukkarakārikā.
374 「Allakaṭṭha」指湿的乌敦跋罗木。「Sasneha」指带有树脂的。「Kāmehi」指事欲。「Avūpakaṭṭhā」指未远离的。在「欲贪」等词中,因欲求的作用而称“欲”,因润泽的作用而称“爱”,因迷醉的作用而称“痴”,因焦渴的作用而称“渴”,因持续燃烧的作用而称“热恼”。「Opakkamikā」指由精勤所产生的。「Ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya」:所有这些都是出世间道的同义词。显示巴利原文
374.Allakaṭṭhanti allaṃ udumbarakaṭṭhaṃ. Sasnehanti sakhīraṃ. Kāmehīti vatthukāmehi. Avūpakaṭṭhāti anapagatā. Kāmacchandotiādīsu kilesakāmova chandakaraṇavasena chando. Sinehakaraṇavasena sneho. Mucchākaraṇavasena mucchā. Pipāsākaraṇavasena pipāsā. Anudahanavasena pariḷāhoti veditabbo. Opakkamikāti upakkamanibbattā. Ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāyāti sabbaṃ lokuttaramaggavevacanameva.
这里的譬喻衔接如下:湿而带树脂的乌敦跋罗木,恰如那些尚未从烦恼欲和事欲中出离的人。被投入水中,恰如被烦恼欲所浸透;即使摩擦也无法生火,恰如未从事欲中出离的人,纵然有精勤所生的种种感受,也无法证得出世间道;同样,连摩擦都不做自然更不能生火,这些人即使没有那些精勤的感受,也一样无法证得出世间道。第二个譬喻也应依此道理来理解。不过有一处差别:前一个譬喻是针对携带妻儿一同出家的情形;后一个譬喻则是在婆罗门法家中出家的情形。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ panettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ – allaṃ sakhīraṃ udumbarakaṭṭhaṃ viya hi kilesakāmena vatthukāmato anissaṭapuggalā. Udake pakkhittabhāvo viya kilesakāmena tintatā; manthanenāpi aggino anabhinibbattanaṃ viya kilesakāmena vatthukāmato anissaṭānaṃ opakkamikāhi vedanāhi lokuttaramaggassa anadhigamo. Amanthanenāpi aggino anabhinibbattanaṃ viya tesaṃ puggalānaṃ vināpi opakkamikāhi vedanāhi lokuttaramaggassa anadhigamo. Dutiyaupamāpi imināva nayena veditabbā. Ayaṃ pana viseso, purimā saputtabhariyapabbajjāya upamā; pacchimā brāhmaṇadhammikapabbajjāya.
376 在第三个譬喻中,「Koḷāpa」指已断树脂、无湿润的木头。「Thale nikkhitta」指放在高地或平地上。这里的譬喻衔接如下:干枯无湿润的木头,恰如已从烦恼欲和事欲中出离的人;放在远离水的高地上,恰如未被烦恼欲所润湿;即使摩擦也能生火,恰如已出离欲的人,通过露地住、常坐不卧等方式,即使有精勤所生的那些感受,也能够证得出世间道;而仅用另一棵树的干枝摩擦就能生火,则恰如即使没有精勤所生的感受,单凭乐行道也能够证得出世间道。这个譬喻是世尊为说明自身情况而举的。显示巴利原文
376. Tatiyaupamāya koḷāpanti chinnasinehaṃ nirāpaṃ. Thale nikkhittanti pabbatathale vā bhūmithale vā nikkhittaṃ. Etthāpi idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – sukkhakoḷāpakaṭṭhaṃ viya hi kilesakāmena vatthukāmato nissaṭapuggalā, ārakā udakā thale nikkhittabhāvo viya kilesakāmena atintatā. Manthanenāpi aggino abhinibbattanaṃ viya kilesakāmena vatthukāmato nissaṭānaṃ abbhokāsikanesajjikādivasena opakkamikāhipi vedanāhi lokuttaramaggassa adhigamo. Aññassa rukkhassa sukkhasākhāya saddhiṃ ghaṃsanamatteneva aggino abhinibbattanaṃ viya vināpi opakkamikāhi vedanāhi sukhāyeva paṭipadāya lokuttaramaggassa adhigamoti. Ayaṃ upamā bhagavatā attano atthāya āhaṭā.
377 现在,为了显示自己的苦行,世尊说出「Tassa mayha」等语。那么,世尊不修苦行就无法成佛吗?修不修苦行,他都能成佛。那他为何还要修呢?世尊说:‘我要向含天在内的世间展示自己的精进力,而这精进力会让我生起大喜悦。’正如一位刹帝利虽在宫中依传统继承王位,也不会因此感到那般欢喜,远不如他亲率大军出征,经过两三次交锋击破敌军而夺得王位时那样欢喜。因为他会在享受王权富贵、环顾眷属时,回忆起自己的奋斗,心想:‘我曾在那个地方做了那些事,如此射穿、如此打击了某个敌人,才获得这王位荣华。’这样想时,心中便会生起强烈的喜悦。同样地,世尊想:‘我要向含天在内的世间展示精进力,这精进力会让我极为欢喜,令喜悦生起。’于是他修了苦行。显示巴利原文
377. Idāni attano dukkarakārikaṃ dassento, tassa mayhantiādimāha. Kiṃ pana bhagavā dukkaraṃ akatvā buddho bhavituṃ na samatthoti? Katvāpi akatvāpi samatthova. Atha kasmā akāsīti? Sadevakassa lokassa attano parakkamaṃ dassessāmi. So ca maṃ vīriyanimmathanaguṇo hāsessatīti. Pāsāde nisinnoyeva hi paveṇiāgataṃ rajjaṃ labhitvāpi khattiyo na tathāpamudito hoti, yathā balakāyaṃ gahetvā saṅgāme dve tayo sampahāre datvā amittamathanaṃ katvā pattarajjo. Evaṃ pattarajjassa hi rajjasiriṃ anubhavantassa parisaṃ oloketvā attano parakkamaṃ anussaritvā, ‘‘asukaṭṭhāne asukakammaṃ katvā asukañca asukañca amittaṃ evaṃ vijjhitvā evaṃ paharitvā imaṃ rajjasiriṃ pattosmī’’ti cintayato balavasomanassaṃ uppajjati. Evamevaṃ bhagavāpi sadevakassa lokassa parakkamaṃ dassessāmi, so hi maṃ parakkamo ativiya hāsessati, somanassaṃ uppādessatīti dukkaramakāsi.
再者,他这样做也是出于对后世众生的哀愍。因为后世众生会这样想:‘正自觉者圆满了一百千劫又四阿僧祇的波罗蜜,尚且要修习精进才证得一切知智,何况是我们呢?’由此,他们便会认为应当勤行精进,这样就能迅速终结生老死。正是出于对后世众生的哀愍,他才修了苦行。显示巴利原文
Apica pacchimaṃ janataṃ anukampamānopi akāsiyeva, pacchimā hi janatā sammāsambuddho kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni pāramiyo pūretvāpi padhānaṃ padahitvāva sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ patto, kimaṅgaṃ pana mayanti padhānavīriyaṃ kattabbaṃ maññissati; evaṃ sante khippameva jātijarāmaraṇassa antaṃ karissatīti pacchimaṃ janataṃ anukampamāno akāsiyeva.
「齿与齿相合」是说将上齿合于下齿之上。「以心制心」是说以善心制伏不善心。「应制御」是指应加以控制、调伏。「应压制」是指应加以压伏、抑制。「应令其热恼」是指应让它感到热恼、痛苦,也就是作精进的磨砺。「有热恼的」是指带有不安、烦热的状态。「被精进所逼的」是指被精勤之力所逼迫、贯穿的心。显示巴利原文
Dantebhidantamādhāyāti heṭṭhādante uparidantaṃ ṭhapetvā. Cetasā cittanti kusalacittena akusalacittaṃ. Abhiniggaṇheyyanti niggaṇheyyaṃ. Abhinippīḷeyyanti nippīḷeyyaṃ. Abhisantāpeyyanti tāpetvā vīriyanimmathanaṃ kareyyaṃ. Sāraddhoti sadaratho. Padhānābhitunnassāti padhānena abhitunnassa, viddhassa satoti attho.
378 “无呼吸的”即无气息的。“铁匠风箱”是比喻铁匠用来鼓风的风箱管子。所说的“头痛生起”,是指由于体内的风大无处排出,因而激起的剧烈头痛。“应施以头部包扎”是指应当用布把头包扎起来。“天神”是指住在菩萨经行道尽头以及叶屋附近的那些天神。显示巴利原文
378.Appāṇakanti nirassāsakaṃ. Kammāragaggariyāti kammārassa gaggaranāḷiyā. Sīsavedanā hontīti kutoci nikkhamituṃ alabhamānehi vātehi samuṭṭhāpitā balavatiyo sīsavedanā honti. Sīsaveṭhaṃ dadeyyāti sīsaveṭhanaṃ dadeyya. Devatāti bodhisattassa caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ paṇṇasālapariveṇasāmantā ca adhivatthā devatā.
据说那时,菩萨身上生起极为强烈的灼热感,接着便昏厥过去。他就在经行道上坐着倒下了。看到这一幕,有些天神这样说:“这必定只是阿拉汉的住立威仪罢了。”他们是怀着“所谓的阿拉汉,就像这样如同死人一般”的见地而说的。其中,那些说“他死了”的天神,便跑去禀告净饭大王说:“您的儿子死了。”国王问:“我的儿子是成佛之后死的,还是没有成佛就死了?”“他没能成佛,就在精进修行的地方倒下死了。”“我不信。我的儿子若未证得菩提便会死去,这是绝不可能的事。”显示巴利原文
Tadā kira bodhisattassa adhimatte kāyadāhe uppanne mucchā udapādi. So caṅkameva nisinno hutvā papati. Taṃ disvā devatā evamāhaṃsu – ‘‘vihārotveva so arahato’’ti, ‘‘arahanto nāma evarūpā honti matakasadisā’’ti laddhiyā vadanti. Tattha yā devatā ‘‘kālaṅkato’’ti āhaṃsu, tā gantvā suddhodanamahārājassa ārocesuṃ – ‘‘tumhākaṃ putto kālaṅkato’’ti. Mama putto buddho hutvā kālaṅkato, no ahutvāti? Buddho bhavituṃ nāsakkhi, padhānabhūmiyaṃyeva patitvā kālaṅkatoti. Nāhaṃ saddahāmi, mama puttassa bodhiṃ apatvā kālaṅkiriyā nāma natthīti.
后来,正自觉者转动了法轮,次第游化而往王舍城,最后回到迦毗罗卫时,净饭大王接过世尊的钵,迎请至宫殿,供养了粥与硬食。在用斋之间的休息时间,大王向世尊提起此事:“世尊,您精勤修行时,有天神跑来对我说:‘大王,您的儿子死了。’”世尊问:“大王,您相信吗?”“世尊,我不信。”世尊说:“如今,大王,您从接纳梦兆开始,便一路见证种种稀有之事,那时又怎会相信呢?我也成就了佛陀,您也成了佛陀之父。然而,往昔我智慧尚未成熟、仍行菩萨道时,也就是我做为法护王子的那一世,我外出学习技艺,有人拿来了山羊的骨头对您说:‘您的儿子法护王子死了,这是他的骨骸。’那时您也说过:‘我的儿子绝无中途夭折之理,我不信。’大王啊。”以此事为缘起,世尊讲述了《大法护本生》的故事。显示巴利原文
Aparabhāge sammāsambuddhassa dhammacakkaṃ pavattetvā anupubbena rājagahaṃ gantvā kapilavatthuṃ anuppattassa suddhodanamahārājā pattaṃ gahetvā pāsādaṃ āropetvā yāgukhajjakaṃ datvā antarābhattasamaye etamatthaṃ ārocesi – tumhākaṃ bhagavā padhānakaraṇakāle devatā āgantvā, ‘‘putto te, mahārāja, kālaṅkato’’ti āhaṃsūti. Kiṃ saddahasi mahārājāti? Na bhagavā saddahinti. Idāni, mahārāja, supinappaṭiggahaṇato paṭṭhāya acchariyāni passanto kiṃ saddahissasi? Ahampi buddho jāto, tvampi buddhapitā jāto, pubbe pana mayhaṃ aparipakke ñāṇe bodhicariyaṃ carantassa dhammapālakumārakālepi sippaṃ uggahetuṃ gatassa, ‘‘tumhākaṃ putto dhammapālakumāro kālaṅkato, idamassa aṭṭhī’’ti eḷakaṭṭhiṃ āharitvā dassesuṃ, tadāpi tumhe, ‘‘mama puttassa antarāmaraṇaṃ nāma natthi, nāhaṃ saddahāmī’’ti avocuttha, mahārājāti imissā aṭṭhuppattiyā bhagavā mahādhammapālajātakaṃ kathesi.
379 “亲爱的,您别这样”这句话,是他们出于深切的爱护而说的。据说,这是天神之间表达亲切、喜爱的一个通用称呼,也就是“亲爱的”这个称呼。“不可食用的”是指不能当作食物的东西,即非食物。“我说‘够了’”,这里的“够了”就是“停止吧”的意思。完整的意思是:“够了,别再这样做了,我要维持你们的生计”,这是在表达制止、拒绝的意思。显示巴利原文
379.Mākho tvaṃ mārisāti sampiyāyamānā āhaṃsu. Devatānaṃ kirāyaṃ piyamanāpavohāro, yadidaṃ mārisāti. Ajajjitanti abhojanaṃ. Halanti vadāmīti alanti vadāmi, alaṃ iminā evaṃ mā karittha, yāpessāmahanti evaṃ paṭisedhemīti attho.
380-1 “如鲶鱼般灰暗的肤色”,是指皮肤的颜色像鲶鱼一样暗淡无光。“这便是极限了”,是说对于这些苦受来说,这就是极点、最高、最极限的程度了。“在父亲净饭王的耕作处……乃至……具足安住初禅”:据说,那天是国王的“播种吉祥日”,在这种日子里,人们会准备各种各样的嚼食和食物。他们清扫城里的街道,放置装满水的吉祥罐,竖起幢幡旗帜等,把整座城市装饰得像天宫一样。所有的奴隶、仆人、工人等,都穿上新衣服,用香、花鬘等装饰好,聚集到王宫来。国王的耕作处,通常要套上一千二百五十张犁来耕种。但在那一天,他们只套了少一张的八百张犁。所有的犁,连同牛轭和缰绳,都像生闻婆罗门的马车那样用白银镶边装饰。国王亲自掌控的那张领头的犁,则是用红金镶边。牛的角以及缰绳、刺棒也都用黄金装饰。国王在大批随从的簇拥下出城,也带上了他的儿子同行。显示巴利原文
380-1.Maṅguracchavīti maṅguramacchacchavi. Etāva paramanti tāsampi vedanānametaṃyeva paramaṃ, uttamaṃ pamāṇaṃ. Pitu sakkassa kammante…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharitāti rañño kira vappamaṅgaladivaso nāma hoti, tadā anekappakāraṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ paṭiyādenti. Nagaravīthiyo sodhāpetvā puṇṇaghaṭe ṭhapāpetvā dhajapaṭākādayo ussāpetvā sakalanagaraṃ devavimānaṃ viya alaṅkaronti. Sabbe dāsakammakarādayo ahatavatthanivatthā gandhamālādipaṭimaṇḍitā rājakule sannipatanti. Rañño kammante naṅgalasatasahassaṃ yojīyati. Tasmiṃ pana divase ekena ūnaṃ aṭṭhasataṃ yojenti. Sabbanaṅgalāni saddhiṃ balibaddarasmiyottehi jāṇussoṇissa ratho viya rajataparikkhittāni honti. Rañño ālambananaṅgalaṃ rattasuvaṇṇaparikkhittaṃ hoti. Balibaddānaṃ siṅgānipi rasmipatodāpi suvaṇṇaparikkhittā honti. Rājā mahāparivārena nikkhamanto puttaṃ gahetvā agamāsi.
在耕作处,有一棵枝叶茂密、树荫浓密的阎浮树。人们在树下为王子铺好卧床,上方悬挂着绣有金星的华盖,再围起布幔作为屏障,并安排了守卫。国王佩戴上全套的庄严饰品,在大臣们的围绕下,前往犁田的地方。到了那里,国王拿起金犁,大臣们则拿起少一张的一百零八具宝犁,在四处犁地。国王则从田的一头犁到另一头,或者从那边犁回来。这时的场面极为盛大。原本围着菩萨坐的保姆们心想:“我们也去看看国王那边的盛况吧”,于是就从布幔里走了出去。菩萨环顾四周,发现一个人也没有,便迅速地起身,结跏趺座,摄持入出息念,证入初禅。那些保姆们流连于种种饮食之间,稍稍耽搁了一会儿。这时,其他树的树影都移走了,唯独这棵阎浮树的树影,却保持着完整的圆形,静止不动。保姆们这才想起“少主还独自一人呢”,赶忙掀起布幔进去,看到菩萨在床上结跏趺坐着,又看到这树影不动的神变,便赶紧跑去报告国王:“王上,王子这样坐着,其他树的树影都移走了,只有阎浮树的树影还呈圆形停在那里。”国王急忙赶来,亲眼看到这神变后,便向儿子礼敬说:“孩子,这是你显示巴利原文
Kammantaṭṭhāne eko jamburukkho bahalapattapalāso sandacchāyo ahosi. Tassa heṭṭhā kumārassa sayanaṃ paññapetvā upari suvaṇṇatārakakhacitaṃ vitānaṃ bandhāpetvā sāṇipākārena parikkhipāpetvā ārakkhaṃ ṭhapetvā rājā sabbālaṅkāraṃ alaṅkaritvā amaccagaṇaparivuto naṅgalakaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ agamāsi. Tattha rājā suvaṇṇanaṅgalaṃ gaṇhāti. Amaccā ekenūnaaṭṭhasatarajatanaṅgalāni gahetvā ito cito ca kasanti. Rājā pana orato pāraṃ gacchati, pārato vā oraṃ gacchati. Etasmiṃ ṭhāne mahāsampatti hoti, bodhisattaṃ parivāretvā nisinnā dhātiyo rañño sampattiṃ passissāmāti antosāṇito bahi nikkhantā. Bodhisatto ito cito ca olokento kañci adisvā vegena uṭṭhāya pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā ānāpāne pariggahetvā paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattesi. Dhātiyo khajjabhojjantare vicaramānā thokaṃ cirāyiṃsu, sesarukkhānaṃ chāyā nivattā, tassa pana rukkhassa parimaṇḍalā hutvā aṭṭhāsi. Dhātiyo ayyaputto ekakoti vegena sāṇiṃ ukkhipitvā anto pavisamānā bodhisattaṃ sayane pallaṅkena nisinnaṃ tañca pāṭihāriyaṃ disvā gantvā rañño ārocayiṃsu – ‘‘kumāro deva, evaṃ nisinno aññesaṃ rukkhānaṃ chāyā nivattā, jamburukkhassa parimaṇḍalā ṭhitā’’ti. Rājā vegenāgantvā pāṭihāriyaṃ disvā, ‘‘idaṃ te, tāta, dutiyaṃ vandana’’nti puttaṃ vandi. Idametaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘pitu sakkassa kammante…pe… paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharitā’’ti. Siyā nu kho eso maggo bodhāyāti bhaveyya nu kho etaṃ ānāpānassatipaṭhamajjhānaṃ bujjhanatthāya maggoti. Satānusāriviññāṇanti nayidaṃ bodhāya maggo bhavissati, ānāpānassatipaṭhamajjhānaṃ pana bhavissatīti evaṃ ekaṃ dve vāre uppannasatiyā anantaraṃ uppannaviññāṇaṃ satānusāriviññāṇaṃ nāma. Yaṃ taṃ sukhanti yaṃ taṃ ānāpānassatipaṭhamajjhānasukhaṃ.
382 “现前侍奉”:他们通过打扫叶屋、清扫周边等日常义务的履行,而近前承事。“多事”:指在资具方面过度忙碌。“回转于多事”:指他们变成了贪着美味的人,为了获得精致的团食等供养,而退转于忙碌的杂事之中。“厌离而离去”:他们感到厌烦、不乐,便依着法性而离去。这其实是为了在菩萨证悟正觉时,为他提供身远离的机缘,他们才随顺法性而离去。当他们离开时,并没有去往别处,而是直接去了波罗奈。在他们离去后,菩萨获得了半个月的身远离,得以在菩提座那不可征服的金刚座上坐下,证悟了一切知智。显示巴利原文
382.Paccupaṭṭhitā hontīti paṇṇasālapariveṇasammajjanādivattakaraṇena upaṭṭhitā honti. Bāhullikoti paccayabāhulliko. Āvatto bāhullāyāti rasagiddho hutvā paṇītapiṇḍapātādīnaṃ atthāya āvatto. Nibbijja pakkamiṃsūti ukkaṇṭhitvā dhammaniyāmeneva pakkantā bodhisattassa sambodhiṃ pattakāle kāyavivekassa okāsadānatthaṃ dhammatāya gatā. Gacchantā ca aññaṭṭhānaṃ agantvā bārāṇasimeva agamaṃsu. Bodhisatto tesu gatesu addhamāsaṃ kāyavivekaṃ labhitvā bodhimaṇḍe aparājitapallaṅke nisīditvā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ paṭivijjhi.
383 关于“已离诸欲……”等文句,应按照《怖畏经》中所说的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
383.Vivicceva kāmehītiādi bhayabherave vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
387 “我尚能了知……”——这是一个独立的文脉。据说,尼犍子当时曾这样想:“我向沙门乔达摩提了一个问题,沙门乔达摩却只是说‘阿耆毗舍那,还有别的吗?阿耆毗舍那,还有别的吗?’始终不给出结论,说个不停。他是不是生气了呢?”于是,世尊为了显示:“阿耆毗舍那,当如来向成百上千的大众说法时,没有一个人会说‘沙门乔达摩生气了’。如来说法,纯粹是为了令他人觉悟、令他人证悟。”而在此处展开了法谈。这里所说的“以此开始”,正是指这一文脉。“只为此”:是对目的、作用及范围的限定与确认。也就是说,令他人了知,正是如来宣说正法的目的。因此,如来并非只为一人说法,只要是有能力了知的人,如来便为一切人说。那么,“于彼先前”又显示了什么呢?据说,萨遮迦心中曾闪过这样的念头:“沙门乔达摩相貌端严、威仪具足,牙齿齐密,舌头柔软,音声甜美,大概是为了博取大众的欢喜而游化的吧,实际上内心应当没有真正的专注与统一。”于是,世尊为了显示:“阿耆毗舍那,如来并非为了博取大众欢喜而游化;即使面对遍满整个轮围世界的无量大众,如来在说法时也同样毫不退缩、毫无染着。”显示巴利原文
387.Abhijānāmi kho panāhanti ayaṃ pāṭiyekko anusandhi. Nigaṇṭho kira cintesi – ‘‘ahaṃ samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ ekaṃ pañhaṃ pucchiṃ. Samaṇo gotamo ‘aparāpi maṃ, aggivessana, aparāpi maṃ, aggivessanā’ti pariyosānaṃ adassento kathetiyeva. Kupito nu kho’’ti? Atha bhagavā, aggivessana , tathāgate anekasatāya parisāya dhammaṃ desente kupito samaṇo gotamoti ekopi vattā natthi, paresaṃ bodhanatthāya paṭivijjhanatthāya eva tathāgato dhammaṃ desetīti dassento imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha ārabbhāti sandhāya. Yāvadevāti payojanavidhi paricchedaniyamanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – paresaṃ viññāpanameva tathāgatassa dhammadesanāya payojanaṃ, tasmā na ekasseva deseti, yattakā viññātāro atthi, sabbesaṃ desetīti. Tasmiṃyeva purimasminti iminā kiṃ dassetīti? Saccako kira cintesi – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo abhirūpo pāsādiko suphusitaṃ dantāvaraṇaṃ, jivhā mudukā, madhuraṃ vākkaraṇaṃ, parisaṃ rañjento maññe vicarati, anto panassa cittekaggatā natthī’’ti. Atha bhagavā, aggivessana, na tathāgato parisaṃ rañjento vicarati, cakkavāḷapariyantāyapi parisāya tathāgato dhammaṃ deseti, asallīno anupalitto ettakaṃ ekavihārī, suññataphalasamāpattiṃ anuyuttoti dassetuṃ evamāha.
“内”即所缘的内在。“我令止息”即令它们平息、安止。实际上,当大众发出善哉的喝彩时,如来于彼刻便以先前决意截断外缘,进入果等至;在喝彩声尚未间断之际,他已从等至中出定,并由原本站立之处继续说法。须知,诸佛在有分心的转换上极其迅捷,因此即使在入息与出息的间隙中,也能进入等至。而“以此恒常住”则是要显示:借由彼空果等至之力,我得以恒常安住;我将心安置于那定所缘之相,令其稳固地入定。显示巴利原文
Ajjhattamevāti gocarajjhattameva. Sannisādemīti sannisīdāpemi, tathāgato hi yasmiṃ khaṇe parisā sādhukāraṃ deti, tasmiṃ khaṇe pubbābhogena paricchinditvā phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, sādhukārasaddassa nigghose avicchinneyeva samāpattito vuṭṭhāya ṭhitaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya dhammaṃ deseti, buddhānañhi bhavaṅgaparivāso lahuko hotīti assāsavāre passāsavāre samāpattiṃ samāpajjanti. Yena sudaṃ niccakappanti yena suññena phalasamādhinā niccakālaṃ viharāmi, tasmiṃ samādhinimitte cittaṃ saṇṭhapemi samādahāmīti dasseti.
“可净信”即为值得相信。如此认可了世尊心一境性之后,他便将自己固执的见解作为核心提出问题,问道:“尊者乔达摩,您记得白天曾睡眠吗?”正如一只狗,即使以不掺水的牛乳粥加酥油喂至满腹,一见到粪便,便无法忍住不吃而走开;它边吃边走,哪怕只是嗅一嗅也会继续走;倘若连嗅都不嗅就走,据说它的头便会痛起来。同样地,这位外道导师虽然宣说了犹如不掺水牛乳粥般、从出家直至漏尽之间令人净信的法说,然而听闻了如此殊胜的法说之后,对导师竟未生起丝毫净信。因此,他放不下以固执见解为核心的问题,无法不问而走,便这样说了。在此,由于昏眠确实已被阿拉汉道所断除,于一切漏尽者皆然;但身体的疲劳,不论在有执受者还是无执受者身上,都会存在。正如莲花等,有时绽放,有时含苞;傍晚时分,有些树的叶子会闭合,清晨则又舒展。同样地,这个有执受身体的疲劳,以疲劳为因,有分流于此中断,即被称为“睡眠”,这种情况即使在漏尽者身上也会出现。正是针对这点,世尊才显示巴利原文
Okappaniyametanti saddahaniyametaṃ. Evaṃ bhagavato ekaggacittataṃ sampaṭicchitvā idāni attano ovaṭṭikasāraṃ katvā ānītapañhaṃ pucchanto abhijānāti kho pana bhavaṃ gotamo divā supitāti āha. Yathā hi sunakho nāma asambhinnakhīrapakkapāyasaṃ sappinā yojetvā udarapūraṃ bhojitopi gūthaṃ disvā akhāditvā gantuṃ na sakkā, akhādamāno ghāyitvāpi gacchati, aghāyitvāva gatassa kirassa sīsaṃ rujjati; evamevaṃ imassapi satthā asambhinnakhīrapakkapāyasasadisaṃ abhinikkhamanato paṭṭhāya yāva āsavakkhayā pasādanīyaṃ dhammadesanaṃ deseti. Etassa pana evarūpaṃ dhammadesanaṃ sutvā satthari pasādamattampi na uppannaṃ, tasmā ovaṭṭikasāraṃ katvā ānītapañhaṃ apucchitvā gantuṃ asakkonto evamāha. Tattha yasmā thinamiddhaṃ sabbakhīṇāsavānaṃ arahattamaggeneva pahīyati, kāyadaratho pana upādinnakepi hoti anupādinnakepi. Tathā hi kamaluppalādīni ekasmiṃ kāle vikasanti, ekasmiṃ makulāni honti, sāyaṃ kesañci rukkhānampi pattāni patilīyanti, pāto vipphārikāni honti. Evaṃ upādinnakassa kāyassa darathoyeva darathavasena bhavaṅgasotañca idha niddāti adhippetaṃ, taṃ khīṇāsavānampi hoti. Taṃ sandhāya, ‘‘abhijānāmaha’’ntiādimāha. Sammohavihārasmiṃ vadantīti sammohavihāroti vadanti.
389 “再三接触、撞击”即反复地碰触、撞击。“带着所说”即带着那些言辞去说。“以言语”即用各种言辞。“欢喜之后又随喜”:内心以“这已足够”的想法欣然接受,便是欢喜;又以言语加以称赞,便是随喜。世尊为这位尼干陀开示了两部经。前一部经有一个诵分,这一部经则是一个半诵分。如此,他听闻了整整两个半诵分,但这位尼干陀既未证得现观,也未出家,更没有皈依三宝。那么,世尊为何仍为他说法?是为了种下未来的潜在熏习。因为世尊预见:“此人现在虽无证悟的助缘,但在我般涅槃后二百余年,于铜掌岛,教法将得建立。彼时,他将生于良善之家,在适当的时机出家,通达全部三藏佛语,增长观智,最终证得与无碍解俱的阿拉汉果,成为一位名为黑佛护的大漏尽者。”世尊正因看到了这点,为未来潜在熏习而说法。显示巴利原文
389.Āsajja āsajjāti ghaṭṭetvā ghaṭṭetvā. Upanītehīti upanetvā kathitehi. Vacanappathehīti vacanehi. Abhinanditvā anumoditvāti alanti cittena sampaṭicchanto abhinanditvā vācāyapi pasaṃsanto anumoditvā. Bhagavatā imassa nigaṇṭhassa dve suttāni kathitāni. Purimasuttaṃ eko bhāṇavāro, idaṃ diyaḍḍho, iti aḍḍhatiye bhāṇavāre sutvāpi ayaṃ nigaṇṭho neva abhisamayaṃ patto, na pabbajito, na saraṇesu patiṭṭhito. Kasmā etassa bhagavā dhammaṃ desesīti? Anāgate vāsanatthāya. Passati hi bhagavā, ‘‘imassa idāni upanissayo natthi, mayhaṃ pana parinibbānato samadhikānaṃ dvinnaṃ vassasatānaṃ accayena tambapaṇṇidīpe sāsanaṃ patiṭṭhahissati. Tatrāyaṃ kulaghare nibbattitvā sampatte kāle pabbajitvā tīṇi piṭakāni uggahetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ patvā kāḷabuddharakkhito nāma mahākhīṇāsavo bhavissatī’’ti. Idaṃ disvā anāgate vāsanatthāya dhammaṃ desesi.
他后来也确是如此:就在铜掌岛,教法建立之后,他从天界去世,投生于南山寺乞食村中的一户大臣家。到了适合出家的青年时期,他出家为比丘,学通三藏佛语,开始领众,为大比丘僧团所围绕。有一回,他去拜见自己的亲教师。当时,亲教师为了警策这位共住弟子,看见这位学通三藏而来的弟子,竟一言不发。于是,他在破晓时分起身,到长老跟前问道:“尊者,我完成那些学习著作的任务之后来拜见您,您却对我一言不发,我有什么过失吗?”长老答道:“贤友佛护,你仅凭这点程度,就以为‘我出家的义务已至顶峰’了吗?”“尊者,那我该怎么做呢?”“你要遣散徒众,斩断那些世间戏论,前往支提山寺,专心修习沙门法。”他遵从亲教师的教诫,最终证得与无碍解俱的阿罗汉果,成为有大福德者,受国王恭敬供养,为大比丘僧团所围绕,安住于支提山寺。显示巴利原文
Sopi tattheva tambapaṇṇidīpamhi sāsane patiṭṭhite devalokato cavitvā dakkhiṇagirivihārassa bhikkhācāragāme ekasmiṃ amaccakule nibbatto pabbajjāsamatthayobbane pabbajitvā tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā gaṇaṃ pariharanto mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivuto upajjhāyaṃ passituṃ agamāsi. Athassa upajjhāyo saddhivihārikaṃ codessāmīti tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā āgatena tena saddhiṃ mukhaṃ datvā kathāmattampi na akāsi. So paccūsasamaye vuṭṭhāya therassa santikaṃ gantvā, – ‘‘tumhe, bhante, mayi ganthakammaṃ katvā tumhākaṃ santikaṃ āgate mukhaṃ datvā kathāmattampi na karittha, ko mayhaṃ doso’’ti pucchi. Thero āha – ‘‘tvaṃ, āvuso, buddharakkhita ettakeneva ‘pabbajjākiccaṃ me matthakaṃ patta’nti saññaṃ karosī’’ti. Kiṃ karomi, bhanteti? Gaṇaṃ vinodetvā tvaṃ papañcaṃ chinditvā cetiyapabbatavihāraṃ gantvā samaṇadhammaṃ karohīti. So upajjhāyassa ovāde ṭhatvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ patvā puññavā rājapūjito hutvā mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivāro cetiyapabbatavihāre vasi.
那时,提萨大王正在行布萨羯磨,住在支提山的王洞中。他事先向那位长老的侍者比丘示意说:“当尊者为我解答问题,或开示佛法时,你就给我一个信号。”在一个闻法日,那位长老由比丘僧团围绕着,登上迦塔卡支提的平台,礼敬支提后,站在一棵黑昙布鲁树下。这时,一位常行乞食的长老比丘就《黑园经》中的一个问题向他请教。长老说:“贤友,今天不是闻法日吗?”“是的,尊者,是闻法日。”“既然如此,取凳子来,我们便在这里坐下闻法吧。”于是,他们就在那棵树下为他铺设了座位。长老诵完起始偈颂后,便开始开示《黑园经》。他的一位年少侍者便去通报了国王。国王在起始偈颂尚未诵完时就赶到了。到达后,他穿着不显眼的便服,站在人群外围,就这样站着听法,整整站了三更(通宵)。当长老说到“这是世尊所说”时,他发出了随喜的善哉声。长老察觉后,问道:“大王,您是什么时候来的?”“就在您开始诵起始偈颂的时候,尊者。”“大王,这真是一件难能可贵的事。”“尊者,这不算什么难事。而且我在此立一个誓:如果从尊者开始说法”显示巴利原文
Tasmiñhi kāle tissamahārājā uposathakammaṃ karonto cetiyapabbate rājaleṇe vasati. So therassa upaṭṭhākabhikkhuno saññaṃ adāsi – ‘‘yadā mayhaṃ ayyo pañhaṃ vissajjeti, dhammaṃ vā katheti, tadā me saññaṃ dadeyyāthā’’ti. Theropi ekasmiṃ dhammassavanadivase bhikkhusaṅghaparivāro kaṇṭakacetiyaṅgaṇaṃ āruyha cetiyaṃ vanditvā kāḷatimbarurukkhamūle aṭṭhāsi. Atha naṃ eko piṇḍapātikatthero kāḷakārāmasuttante pañhaṃ pucchi. Thero nanu, āvuso, ajja dhammassavanadivasoti āha. Āma, bhante, dhammassavanadivasoti. Tena hi pīṭhakaṃ ānetha, idheva nisinnā dhammassavanaṃ karissāmāti. Athassa rukkhamūle āsanaṃ paññapetvā adaṃsu. Thero pubbagāthā vatvā kāḷakārāmasuttaṃ ārabhi. Sopissa upaṭṭhākadaharo rañño saññaṃ dāpesi. Rājā pubbagāthāsu aniṭṭhitāsuyeva pāpuṇi. Patvā ca aññātakaveseneva parisante ṭhatvā tiyāmarattiṃ ṭhitakova dhammaṃ sutvā therassa, idamavoca bhagavāti vacanakāle sādhukāraṃ adāsi. Thero ñatvā, kadā āgatosi, mahārājāti pucchi. Pubbagāthā osāraṇakāleyeva, bhanteti. Dukkaraṃ te mahārāja, katanti. Nayidaṃ, bhante, dukkaraṃ, yadi pana me ayyassa dhammakathaṃ āraddhakālato paṭṭhāya ekapadepi aññavihitabhāvo ahosi, tambapaṇṇidīpassa patodayaṭṭhinitudanamattepi ṭhāne sāmibhāvo nāma me mā hotūti sapathamakāsi.
而在这部经中,由于阐明了佛陀的功德,国王便问道:“尊者,佛陀的功德就只有这么多吗,还是另有其他?”长老回答:“大王,我所讲说的与未讲说的相比,只是极少部分,未讲说的却是无量无数。”“尊者,请作一个譬喻吧。”“大王,譬如在一片一千迦梨沙大的稻田里,比起单单一个稻穗上的谷粒,其余所有稻穗上的谷粒要多得多;同样地,我所讲说的功德很少,其余未说的却非常多。”“尊者,请再作一个譬喻。”“大王,又如恒河暴涨、水流充盈时,若有人拿针孔对着水流,则从针孔穿过的水极少,其余所有水却极多;同样道理,我所讲说的功德只是一小部分,其余未说的极其广大。”“尊者,请再作一个譬喻。”“大王,这世上有一种名叫遮陀迦的鸟,它们常在天空中游戏飞翔。这种鸟体型非常小巧,那么请问,那只鸟在虚空中展开双翅所占据的空间大,还是剩下的所有虚空大?”“尊者,您这说的什么话呢?它展开翅膀的空间当然极小,剩下的虚空要多得多了。”“正是如此,大王,我所讲述的佛陀功德就是这么一点点,其余未说的功德无量无边。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ pana sutte buddhaguṇā paridīpitā, tasmā rājā pucchi – ‘‘ettakāva, bhante, buddhaguṇā, udāhu aññepi atthī’’ti. Mayā kathitato, mahārāja, akathitameva bahu appamāṇanti. Upamaṃ, bhante, karothāti. Yathā, mahārāja , karīsasahassamatte sālikkhette ekasālisīsato avasesasālīyeva bahū, evaṃ mayā kathitaguṇā appā, avasesā bahūti. Aparampi, bhante, upamaṃ karothāti. Yathā, mahārāja, mahāgaṅgāya oghapuṇṇāya sūcipāsaṃ sammukhaṃ kareyya, sūcipāsena gataudakaṃ appaṃ, sesaṃ bahu, evameva mayā kathitaguṇā appā, avasesā bahūti. Aparampi, bhante, upamaṃ karothāti. Idha, mahārāja, cātakasakuṇā nāma ākāse kīḷantā vicaranti. Khuddakā sā sakuṇajāti, kiṃ nu kho tassa sakuṇassa ākāse pakkhapasāraṇaṭṭhānaṃ bahu, avaseso ākāso appoti? Kiṃ, bhante, vadatha, appo tassa pakkhapasāraṇokāso, avasesova bahūti. Evameva, mahārāja, appakā mayā buddhaguṇā kathitā, avasesā bahū anantā appameyyāti. Sukathitaṃ, bhante, anantā buddhaguṇā ananteneva ākāsena upamitā. Pasannā mayaṃ ayyassa, anucchavikaṃ pana kātuṃ na sakkoma. Ayaṃ me duggatapaṇṇākāro imasmiṃ tambapaṇṇidīpe imaṃ tiyojanasatikaṃ rajjaṃ ayyassa demāti. Tumhehi, mahārāja, attano pasannākāro kato, mayaṃ pana amhākaṃ dinnaṃ rajjaṃ tumhākaṃyeva dema, dhammena samena rajjaṃ kārehi mahārājāti.
《小渴爱灭尽经注》显示巴利原文
7. Cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhayasuttavaṇṇanā
390 “如是我闻”,这是《小渴爱灭尽经》。其中,“在东园鹿母讲堂”是指位于东园寺院的鹿母讲堂。这里有一段次第缘起:过去十万劫前,有一位优婆夷邀请莲华上佛,向以佛陀为首的比丘僧团供养了十万布施,而后匍匐于佛足前发愿:“愿我未来能成为像您一样的佛陀的最上侍者。”她于十万劫中轮转于天界与人界之间,到我们的世尊出世时,生于跋地亚城,在美达卡大财主之子、檀越阇耶大财主的家中,在善慧夫人胎中结生。出生后,她被命名为毗舍佉。当世尊前往跋地亚城时,她与五百童女一同出迎,初次见面便证得入流果。后来,她嫁到舍卫城,进入鹿大财主之子圆满增长王子的家。在那里,鹿大财主将她置于母亲的地位,她因此被称为鹿母。显示巴利原文
390.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhayasuttaṃ. Tattha pubbārāme migāramātupāsādeti pubbārāmasaṅkhāte vihāre migāramātuyā pāsāde. Tatrāyaṃ anupubbīkathāatīte satasahassakappamatthake ekā upāsikā padumuttaraṃ bhagavantaṃ nimantetvā buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa satasahassaṃ dānaṃ datvā bhagavato pādamūle nipajjitvā, ‘‘anāgate tumhādisassa buddhassa aggupaṭṭhāyikā homī’’ti patthanamakāsi. Sā kappasatasahassaṃ devesu ceva manussesu ca saṃsaritvā amhākaṃ bhagavato kāle bhaddiyanagare meṇḍakaseṭṭhiputtassa dhanañjayassa seṭṭhino gahe sumanadeviyā kucchimhi paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi. Jātakāle cassā visākhāti nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Sā yadā bhagavā bhaddiyanagaraṃ agamāsi, tadā pañcahi dārikāsatehi saddhiṃ bhagavato paccuggamanaṃ katvā paṭhamadassanamhiyeva sotāpannā ahosi. Aparabhāge sāvatthiyaṃ migāraseṭṭhiputtassa puṇṇavaḍḍhanakumārassa gehaṃ gatā, tattha naṃ migāraseṭṭhi mātiṭṭhāne ṭhapesi, tasmā migāramātāti vuccati.
她出嫁时,父亲为她制作了一件名为大藤蔓的装饰物。这件装饰物用上了四管金刚石、十一管珍珠、二十二管珊瑚、三十三管宝石,并以这些及另外七种宝物制成。它戴在头上,垂挂至脚背;须五头大象之力才能承载,而这位女子却能佩戴自如。后来她成为十力佛陀的最上侍者,舍弃那件装饰,以九亿资财为世尊建造寺院,在仅仅一迦梨沙量的地基上建起殿宇。殿宇上层五百个房间,下层五百个房间,共一千个房间。她认为仅有殿宇尚不够庄严,便围绕着它建造了五百座双顶屋、五百座小殿宇和五百座长房。寺院落成庆典历时四个月才圆满完成。显示巴利原文
Patikulaṃ gacchantiyā cassā pitā mahālatāpiḷandhanaṃ nāma kārāpesi. Tasmiṃ piḷandhane catasso vajiranāḷiyo upayogaṃ agamaṃsu, muttānaṃ ekādasa nāḷiyo, pavāḷānaṃ dvāvīsati nāḷiyo, maṇīnaṃ tettiṃsa nāḷiyo, iti etehi ca aññehi ca sattavaṇṇehi ratanehi niṭṭhānaṃ agamāsi. Taṃ sīse paṭimukkaṃ yāva pādapiṭṭhiyā bhassati, pañcannaṃ hatthīnaṃ balaṃ dhārayamānāva naṃ itthī dhāretuṃ sakkoti. Sā aparabhāge dasabalassa aggupaṭṭhāyikā hutvā taṃ pasādhanaṃ vissajjetvā navahi koṭīhi bhagavato vihāraṃ kārayamānā karīsamatte bhūmibhāge pāsādaṃ kāresi. Tassa uparibhūmiyaṃ pañca gabbhasatāni honti, heṭṭhābhūmiyaṃ pañcāti gabbhasahassappaṭimaṇḍito ahosi. Sā ‘‘suddhapāsādova na sobhatī’’ti taṃ parivāretvā pañca dvikūṭagehasatāni, pañca cūḷapāsādasatāni, pañca dīghasālasatāni ca kārāpesi. Vihāramaho catūhi māsehi niṭṭhānaṃ agamāsi.
身为女性的毗舍佉,于佛陀教法中如此舍财,再无其他女人能及;身为男性的给孤独长者,于教法中如此舍财,也无其他男人能及。给孤独长者舍出五十四亿,在舍卫城南方一处与阿努罗陀城大寺相似的地点上,建造了名为祇园的大寺。毗舍佉则在舍卫城东方一处与最胜天妃寺相似的地点上,建造了名为东园的寺院。世尊为了慈悯这两个家族,依舍卫城而住,在这两座寺院中轮流常居:一个雨安居住于祇园,另一个雨安居住于东园。那时,世尊正住在东园,因此经文说“在东园鹿母讲堂”。显示巴利原文
Mātugāmattabhāve ṭhitāya visākhāya viya aññissā buddhasāsane dhanapariccāgo nāma natthi, purisattabhāve ṭhitassa ca anāthapiṇḍikassa viya aññassa buddhasāsane dhanapariccāgo nāma natthi. So hi catupaññāsakoṭiyo vissajjetvā sāvatthiyā dakkhiṇabhāge anurādhapurassa mahāvihārasadise ṭhāne jetavanamahāvihāraṃ nāma kāresi. Visākhā, sāvatthiyā pācīnabhāge uttamadevīvihārasadise ṭhāne pubbārāmaṃ nāma kāresi. Bhagavā imesaṃ dvinnaṃ kulānaṃ anukampāya sāvatthiṃ nissāya viharanto imesu dvīsu vihāresu nibaddhavāsaṃ vasi. Ekaṃ antovassaṃ jetavane vasati, ekaṃ pubbārāme, etasmiṃ pana samaye bhagavā pubbārāme viharati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pubbārāme migāramātupāsāde’’ti.
“Kittāvatā nu kho, bhante”的意思是:“尊者,以何种方式和程度呢?”“saṃkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimutto hoti”意为:在渴爱灭尽——即涅槃中,以涅槃为所缘而心得解脱,因此被称为“渴爱灭尽而解脱者”。简言之,他如何被称为渴爱灭尽而解脱者?这是在请问:依何种行道而成为渴爱灭尽而解脱者,请您为我简略开示彼漏尽比丘的先前行道。“究竟终点”指超越了所谓坏灭、消逝的终点,故为“究竟”;因为拥有究竟的终点,所以称为“拥有究竟终点者”,意为绝对、恒常的终点。“究竟离轭安稳”意为恒常离轭安稳。“究竟梵行”意为恒常梵行者。“究竟终极”:如前所说,即拥有究竟的终极。“天与人中最胜者”:即天与人类之中最胜、最上者。这样的比丘。显示巴利原文
Kittāvatānu kho, bhanteti kittakena nu kho, bhante. Saṃkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimutto hotīti taṇhāsaṅkhaye nibbāne taṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vimuttacittatāya taṇhāsaṅkhayavimutto nāma saṃkhittena kittāvatā hoti? Yāya paṭipattiyā taṇhāsaṅkhayavimutto hoti, taṃ me khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno pubbabhāgappaṭipadaṃ saṃkhittena desethāti pucchati. Accantaniṭṭhoti khayavayasaṅkhātaṃ antaṃ atītāti accantā. Accantā niṭṭhā assāti accantaniṭṭho, ekantaniṭṭho satataniṭṭhoti attho. Accantaṃ yogakkhemīti accantayogakkhemī, niccayogakkhemīti attho. Accantaṃ brahmacārīti accantabrahmacārī, niccabrahmacārīti attho. Accantaṃ pariyosānamassāti purimanayeneva accantapariyosāno. Seṭṭho devamanussānanti devānañca manussānañca seṭṭho uttamo. Evarūpo bhikkhu kittāvatā hoti, khippametassa saṅkhepeneva paṭipattiṃ kathethāti bhagavantaṃ yācati. Kasmā panesa evaṃ vegāyatīti? Kīḷaṃ anubhavitukāmatāya.
据传,这位帝释天王命人准备好游园娱乐之后,便令四大天王镇守四方,由两重天界的诸天众伴随,与两亿五千万天女乐神妃一同,乘上伊罗婆那白象王,立于游园门口。此时他仔细思量这个问题:“那位渴爱灭尽而解脱的漏尽者,其简略的、堪为趣入之因的前行道,究竟如何呢?”他当时这样想:“这个问题实在殊胜光明,若我未弄明白就进入游园,一旦被六门的所缘搅扰,便不会再思量了。且让游园娱乐暂候,我先往大师跟前请教,通达其义之后,再到游园中娱乐。”如此思惟已,他即从象肩处隐没,出现在世尊近前。而那四大天王仍守在原先所安排的地方,侍女天众、乐神妃乃至龙王伊罗婆那,也都还在游园门口。就这样,他因急于享乐,才说出了这番话。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ kira uyyānakīḷaṃ āṇāpetvā catūhi mahārājūhi catūsu disāsu ārakkhaṃ gāhāpetvā dvīsu devalokesu devasaṅghena parivuto aḍḍhatiyāhi nāṭakakoṭīhi saddhiṃ erāvaṇaṃ āruyha uyyānadvāre ṭhito imaṃ pañhaṃ sallakkhesi – ‘‘kittakena nu kho taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttassa khīṇāsavassa saṅkhepato āgamaniyapubbabhāgapaṭipadā hotī’’ti. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘ayaṃ pañho ativiya sassiriko, sacāhaṃ imaṃ pañhaṃ anuggaṇhitvāva uyyānaṃ pavisissāmi, chadvārikehi ārammaṇehi nimmathito na puna imaṃ pañhaṃ sallakkhessāmi , tiṭṭhatu tāva uyyānakīḷā, satthu santikaṃ gantvā imaṃ pañhaṃ pucchitvā uggahitapañho uyyāne kīḷissāmī’’ti hatthikkhandhe antarahito bhagavato santike pāturahosi. Tepi cattāro mahārājāno ārakkhaṃ gahetvā ṭhitaṭṭhāneyeva ṭhitā, paricārikadevasaṅghāpi nāṭakānipi erāvaṇopi nāgarājā tattheva uyyānadvāre aṭṭhāsi, evamesa kīḷaṃ anubhavitukāmatāya vegāyanto evamāha.
“Sabbe dhammā nālaṃ abhinivesāya”(一切法不足以执取):这里的“一切法”,指五蕴、十二处、十八界。所有这一切,无论以渴爱还是邪见的方式去执取,都是不足够、不适宜、不相应的。为什么呢?因为它们不会按照所执取的样子而存续。即使被执取为常,它们也终究是无常;即使被执取为乐,终究是苦;即使被执取为我,终究是无我。因此,它们不足以执取。“Abhijānāti”(遍知):即通过“知遍知”了知“无常、苦、无我”。“Parijānāti”(遍了知):同样,即通过“度遍知”而遍知。“Yaṃ kiñci vedanaṃ”(任何受):指任何所感受的,乃至与五种识相应的、极微细的感受。世尊以此为由受而生的非色法之执取,为帝释作了开示。然而,受的业处若在下文未加解说,便应在此处解说。但因别处已经解说过,故应依《念处经》中的方式来了解。“Aniccānupassī”(观无常者):于此,应了知无常,应了知无常随观,应显示巴利原文
Sabbe dhammā nālaṃ abhinivesāyāti ettha sabbe dhammā nāma pañcakkhandhā dvādasāyatanāni aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo. Te sabbepi taṇhādiṭṭhivasena abhinivesāya nālaṃ na pariyattā na samatthā na yuttā, kasmā? Gahitākārena atiṭṭhanato. Te hi niccāti gahitāpi aniccāva sampajjanti, sukhāti gahitāpi dukkhāva sampajjanti, attāti gahitāpi anattāva sampajjanti, tasmā nālaṃ abhinivesāya. Abhijānātīti aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti ñātapariññāya abhijānāti. Parijānātīti tatheva tīraṇapariññāya parijānāti. Yaṃkiñci vedananti antamaso pañcaviññāṇasampayuttampi yaṃkiñci appamattakampi vedanaṃ anubhavati. Iminā bhagavā sakkassa devānamindassa vedanāvasena nibbattetvā arūpapariggahaṃ dasseti. Sace pana vedanākammaṭṭhānaṃ heṭṭhā na kathitaṃ bhaveyya, imasmiṃ ṭhāne kathetabbaṃ siyā. Heṭṭhā pana kathitaṃ, tasmā satipaṭṭhāne vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Aniccānupassīti ettha aniccaṃ veditabbaṃ, aniccānupassanā veditabbā, aniccānupassī veditabbo. Tattha aniccanti pañcakkhandhā, te hi uppādavayaṭṭhena aniccā. Aniccānupassanāti pañcakkhandhānaṃ khayato vayato dassanañāṇaṃ. Aniccānupassīti tena ñāṇena samannāgato puggalo . Tasmā ‘‘aniccānupassī viharatī’’ti aniccato anupassanto viharatīti ayamettha attho.
“Virāgānupassī”(观离欲者):此处有两种离欲:灭尽离欲与究竟离欲。其中,从诸行的坏灭、消逝而作观,以及将究竟离欲的涅槃作为离欲来观见的道智,都称为观离欲。具足此两者之人,名为“观离欲者”。即针对此人而说“virāgānupassī”,意为:以离欲而随观。对于“Nirodhānupassī”(观灭者)也应以同样的方式理解。灭也有两种:灭尽灭与究竟灭。“Paṭinissaggānupassī”(观遣弃者):这里的“遣弃”即是“舍遣”。舍遣有两种:遍舍舍遣与趣入舍遣。其中,“遍舍舍遣”指观(vipassanā),它以彼分断的方式舍弃烦恼与蕴。“趣入舍遣”指道(magga),它以涅槃为所缘而趣入。或者,由两种原因皆可名为舍遣:因正断而舍弃诸蕴及烦恼,以及因趣入涅槃。因此,由于舍弃烦恼与蕴,故为“遍舍舍遣”;由于心在灭界——即涅槃界中趣入,故为“趣入舍遣”。此二者在道中是共存的。具足此两者之人,因具备此遣弃观,故名为“观遣弃者”。即针对此人而说“paṭini”显示巴利原文
Virāgānupassīti ettha dve virāgā khayavirāgo ca accantavirāgo ca. Tattha saṅkhārānaṃ khayavayato anupassanāpi, accantavirāgaṃ nibbānaṃ virāgato dassanamaggañāṇampi virāgānupassanā. Tadubhayasamāṅgīpuggalo virāgānupassī nāma, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘virāgānupassī’’ti, virāgato anupassantoti attho. Nirodhānupassimhipi eseva nayo, nirodhopi hi khayanirodho ca accantanirodho cāti duvidhoyeva. Paṭinissaggānupassīti ettha paṭinissaggo vuccati vossaggo, so ca pariccāgavossaggo pakkhandanavossaggoti duvidho hoti . Tattha pariccāgavossaggoti vipassanā, sā hi tadaṅgavasena kilese ca khandhe ca vossajjati. Pakkhandanavossaggoti maggo, so hi nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ ārammaṇato pakkhandati. Dvīhipi vā kāraṇehi vossaggoyeva, samucchedavasena khandhānaṃ kilesānañca vossajjanato, nibbānañca pakkhandanato. Tasmā kilese ca khandhe ca pariccajatīti pariccāgavossaggo, nirodhe nibbānadhātuyā cittaṃ pakkhandatīti pakkhandanavossaggoti ubhayampetaṃ magge sameti. Tadubhayasamaṅgīpuggalo imāya paṭinissaggānupassanāya samannāgatattā paṭinissaggānupassī nāma hoti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭinissaggānupassī’’ti. Na kiñci loke upādiyatīti kiñci ekampi saṅkhāragataṃ taṇhāvasena na upādiyati na gaṇhāti na parāmasati. Anupādiyaṃ na paritassatīti aggaṇhanto taṇhāparitassanāya na paritassati. Paccattaññeva parinibbāyatīti sayameva kilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyati. Khīṇā jātītiādinā panassa paccavekkhaṇāva dassitā. Iti bhagavā sakkassa devānamindassa saṃkhittena khīṇāsavassa pubbabhāgappaṭipadaṃ pucchito sallahukaṃ katvā saṃkhitteneva khippaṃ kathesi.
391 “Avidūre nisinno hoti”(坐于不远处):指他坐在紧邻的尖顶屋中。“Abhisamecca”(已通达):以智慧全面了解、了知后。这句话的意思是:他究竟是了知之后才随喜的,还是不了知而随喜呢?那么,长老为何会有此想法?据说,长老并未听到世尊解答问题的声音,只听到了帝释的随喜声:“诚然如是,世尊!诚然如是,善逝!”据说帝释是大声随喜的。为何没有听到世尊的声音呢?因为佛陀说法是随应大众而使他们了悟。当诸佛说法时,声音虽遍传整个乃至以轮围为边际的大众,却绝不会超出一指节之远。这是为了让如此甜美的法语不致散失。那时,世尊坐在鹿母讲堂七宝尖顶屋内的宝室中,舍利弗长老所住的尖顶屋在世尊右侧,大目犍连的尖顶屋在左侧,彼此之间毫无缝隙或开口,因此长老没有听到世尊的声音,只听到了帝释的声音。显示巴利原文
391.Avidūre nisinno hotīti anantare kūṭāgāre nisinno hoti. Abhisameccāti ñāṇena abhisamāgantvā, jānitvāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kiṃ nu kho esa jānitvā anumodi, udāhu ajānitvā vāti. Kasmā panassa evamahosīti? Thero kira na bhagavato pañhavissajjanasaddaṃ assosi, sakkassa pana devarañño, ‘‘evametaṃ bhagavā evametaṃ sugatā’’ti anumodanasaddaṃ assosi. Sakko kira devarājā mahatā saddena anumodi. Atha kasmā na bhagavato saddaṃ assosīti? Yathāparisaviññāpakattā. Buddhānañhi dhammaṃ kathentānaṃ ekābaddhāya cakkavāḷapariyantāyapi parisāya saddo suyyati, pariyantaṃ pana muñcitvā aṅgulimattampi bahiddhā na niccharati. Kasmā? Evarūpā madhurakathā mā niratthakā agamāsīti. Tadā bhagavā migāramātupāsāde sattaratanamaye kūṭāgāre sirigabbhamhi nisinno hoti, tassa dakkhiṇapasse sāriputtattherassa vasanakūṭāgāraṃ, vāmapasse mahāmoggallānassa, antare chiddavivarokāso natthi, tasmā thero na bhagavato saddaṃ assosi, sakkasseva assosīti.
“Pañcahitūriyasatehi”(以五百乐器):指五种乐器的五百件。所谓“五种乐器”是:单面鼓、双面鼓、弦鼓、吹管乐器、打击乐器。其中,“单面鼓”指蒙有一张皮革的鼓等单面乐器;“双面鼓”指两面蒙皮的鼓;“弦鼓”指带有弦线的帕纳瓦鼓等;“吹管乐器”指竹笛等;“打击乐器”指铜钹等。“Samappito”(具足,近就):拥有,靠近。“Samaṅgībhūto”(成为具足者):是其同义词。“Paricāreti”(游赏,享受):享受那等成就,在种种所缘中驰骋感官。这是说:当被这五百件乐器围绕演奏时,他具足、享有并享受天界的成就。“Paṭipaṇāmetvā”(令遣退):意思是撤去,令它们安静下来。如同现今有净信的国王们见到应受尊重的比丘时,制止歌舞伎乐说:“某位尊者来了,孩子们,别唱了,别奏乐了,别跳舞了。”帝释见到长老后,也这样做了。“Cirassaṃ kho, māri”显示巴利原文
Pañcahitūriyasatehīti pañcaṅgikānaṃ tūriyānaṃ pañcahi satehi. Pañcaṅgikaṃ tūriyaṃ nāma ātataṃ vitataṃ ātatavitataṃ susiraṃ ghananti imehi pañcahi aṅgehi samannāgataṃ. Tattha ātataṃ nāma cammapariyonaddhesu bheriādīsu ekatalatūriyaṃ. Vitataṃ nāma ubhayatalaṃ. Ātatavitataṃ nāma tantibaddhapaṇavādi. Susiraṃ vaṃsādi. Ghanaṃ sammādi. Samappitoti upagato. Samaṅgībhūtoti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Paricāretīti taṃ sampattiṃ anubhavanto tato tato indriyāni cāreti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – parivāretvā vajjamānehi pañcahi tūriyasatehi samannāgato hutvā dibbasampattiṃ anubhavatī. Paṭipaṇāmetvāti apanetvā, nissaddāni kārāpetvāti attho. Yatheva hi idāni saddhā rājāno garubhāvaniyaṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā – ‘‘asuko nāma ayyo āgacchati, mā, tātā, gāyatha, mā vādetha, mā naccathā’’ti nāṭakāni paṭivinenti, sakkopi theraṃ disvā evamakāsi. Cirassaṃ kho, mārisa moggallāna, imaṃ pariyāyamakāsīti evarūpaṃ loke pakatiyā piyasamudāhāravacanaṃ hoti, lokiyā hi cirassaṃ āgatampi anāgatapubbampi manāpajātiyaṃ āgataṃ disvā, – ‘‘kuto bhavaṃ āgato, cirassaṃ bhavaṃ āgato, kathaṃ te idhāgamanamaggo ñāto maggamūḷhosī’’tiādīni vadanti. Ayaṃ pana āgatapubbattāyeva evamāha. Thero hi kālena kālaṃ devacārikaṃ gacchatiyeva. Tattha pariyāyamakāsīti vāramakāsi. Yadidaṃ idhāgamanāyāti yo ayaṃ idhāgamanāya vāro, taṃ, bhante, cirassamakāsīti vuttaṃ hoti. Idamāsanaṃ paññattanti yojanikaṃ maṇipallaṅkaṃ paññapāpetvā evamāha.
392 “多事”与“多务”:此处,若有人事务众多,便称为“多事者”。“多务”是它的同义词。“若以自己所应作的事”:其实自己应做的事极少、微小,并不众多;但天神的事务却很多。从地面开始,有关如意树、天女等的事务,诉讼会一直呈到帝释跟前。因此,他限定说:“尤其是,光是三十三天神的事务就已很多了。”因为天神的儿女是生于膝上的,而作足部侍奉的天女则生于床榻;为她们作装饰打扮的天女环绕床榻而生;做仆役服务的则生于宫殿之内。对于这些,没有诉讼。然而,那些生于边界地区的天神,因为无法辨别“这是我的还是你的”而发生诉讼,便去请问帝释。帝释就判决:“谁的宫殿更靠近,就属于谁。”如果两者位置同等,则判决:“谁出生时是站着看见宫殿的,就属于谁。”如果连一个站着的也没有,他为了平息两者的争端,便将那争议之物收归己有。正是针对此事,他说:“尤其是,光是三十三天神的事务就已很多了。”并且,像这样的娱显示巴利原文
392.Bahukiccā bahukaraṇīyāti ettha yesaṃ bahūni kiccāni, te bahukiccā. Bahukaraṇīyāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Appeva sakena karaṇīyenāti sakaraṇīyameva appaṃ mandaṃ, na bahu, devānaṃ karaṇīyaṃ pana bahu, pathavito paṭṭhāya hi kapparukkhamātugāmādīnaṃ atthāya aṭṭā sakkassa santike chijjanti, tasmā niyamento āha – apica devānaṃyeva tāvatiṃsānaṃ karaṇīyenāti. Devānañhi dhītā ca puttā ca aṅke nibbattanti, pādaparicārikā itthiyo sayane nibbattanti, tāsaṃ maṇḍanapasādhanakārikā devadhītā sayanaṃ parivāretvā nibbattanti, veyyāvaccakarā antovimāne nibbattanti, etesaṃ atthāya aṭṭakaraṇaṃ natthi. Ye pana sīmantare nibbattanti, te ‘‘mama santakā tava santakā’’ti nicchetuṃ asakkontā aṭṭaṃ karonti, sakkaṃ devarājānaṃ pucchanti, so yassa vimānaṃ āsannataraṃ, tassa santakoti vadati. Sace dvepi samaṭṭhāne honti, yassa vimānaṃ olokento ṭhito, tassa santakoti vadati. Sace ekampi na oloketi, taṃ ubhinnaṃ kalahupacchedanatthaṃ attano santakaṃ karoti. Taṃ sandhāya, ‘‘devānaṃyeva tāvatiṃsānaṃ karaṇīyenā’’ti āha. Apicassa evarūpaṃ kīḷākiccampi karaṇīyameva.
“为我们迅速消失”:那些解答对我们而言,就像黑暗中的事物一样,转眼间便看不见了。这句话表示:“尊者,我未能记住那个问题的解答。”长老思惟:“为什么这个帝释显出没有牢记的样子?他是在回避吗?”随后了知:“天神们确实极为愚痴。当他们被六门的所缘扰乱时,连自己吃过没吃过、喝过没喝过都不清楚,那么在此所学的内容遗忘,又有什么可奇怪的呢?”然而,有些论师说:“长老对他而言是令人尊敬、畏惧的,所以他因为害怕长老责备:‘你刚刚从世间最殊胜者那里学得问题,现在却又沉溺于歌舞伎乐之中’,才这样说。”但这叫做欺诳,而圣弟子是不会有这种欺诳的。因此,应知他纯粹是由于愚痴而没有记住。那为什么后来又记起来了呢?因为长老震动了他的喜悦,为他除去了黑暗,所以他记起来了。显示巴利原文
Yaṃno khippameva antaradhāyatīti yaṃ amhākaṃ sīghameva andhakāre rūpagataṃ viya na dissati. Iminā – ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, taṃ pañhavissajjanaṃ na sallakkhemī’’ti dīpeti. Thero – ‘‘kasmā nu kho ayaṃ yakkho asallakkhaṇabhāvaṃ dīpeti, passena pariharatī’’ti āvajjanto – ‘‘devā nāma mahāmūḷhā honti. Chadvārikehi ārammaṇehi nimmathīyamānā attano bhuttābhuttabhāvampi pītāpītabhāvampi na jānanti, idha katamettha pamussantī’’ti aññāsi. Keci panāhu – ‘‘thero etassa garu bhāvaniyo, tasmā ‘idāneva loke aggapuggalassa santike pañhaṃ uggahetvā āgato, idāneva nāṭakānaṃ antaraṃ paviṭṭhoti evaṃ maṃ thero tajjeyyā’ti bhayena evamāhā’’ti. Etaṃ pana kohaññaṃ nāma hoti, na ariyasāvakassa evarūpaṃ kohaññaṃ nāma hoti, tasmā mūḷhabhāveneva na sallakkhesīti veditabbaṃ. Upari kasmā sallakkhesīti? Thero tassa somanassasaṃvegaṃ janayitvā tamaṃ nīhari, tasmā sallakkhesīti.
现在,帝释为了向长老讲述自己从前真实发生过的因缘,便说:“过去曾有”等等。其中,“集合”即聚集、汇聚成一大群。“阿修罗战败”即阿修罗遭受了败北。那么,他们是在何时战败的呢?是在帝释出生的时候。据说,帝释在紧挨着的前一世,投生在摩揭陀国的玛加拉村,是一位名叫摩伽的青年。他贤明、能干,行事如同菩萨的生涯。他带领着三十三位男子行善。某一天,他运用自己的智慧观察后,清除了村中心众人聚集处的垃圾,使那地方变得极其宜人。接着,又在那里建造了凉亭。后来,随着时日推移,又建造了大堂。他带领那些同伴走出村庄,遍行一牛呼、半由旬、三牛呼乃至一由旬之地,将不平整处弄平。他们所有人齐心协力,在该建桥的地方建桥,在应建凉亭、大堂、莲池、花环与树木等处所便建造凉亭等,做了大量的功德。摩伽圆满持守了七种誓戒行后,于身坏命终时,与同伴们一起投生到了三十三天。显示巴利原文
Idāni sakko pubbe attano evaṃ bhūtakāraṇaṃ therassa ārocetuṃ bhūtapubbantiādimāha. Tattha samupabyūḷhoti sannipatito rāsibhūto. Asurā parājiniṃsūti asurā parājayaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Kadā panete parājitāti? Sakkassa nibbattakāle. Sakko kira anantare attabhāve magadharaṭṭhe macalagāme magho nāma māṇavo ahosi, paṇḍito byatto, bodhisattacariyā viyassa cariyā ahosi. So tettiṃsa purise gahetvā kalyāṇamakāsi. Ekadivasaṃ attanova paññāya upaparikkhitvā gāmamajjhe mahājanassa sannipatitaṭṭhāne kacavaraṃ ubhayato apabbahitvā taṃ ṭhānaṃ atiramaṇīyamakāsi, puna tattheva maṇḍapaṃ kāresi, puna gacchante kāle sālaṃ kāresi. Gāmato ca nikkhamitvā gāvutampi aḍḍhayojanampi tigāvutampi yojanampi vicaritvā tehi sahāyehi saddhiṃ visamaṃ samaṃ akāsi. Te sabbepi ekacchandā tattha tattha setuyuttaṭṭhānesu setuṃ, maṇḍapasālāpokkharaṇīmālāgaccharopanādīnaṃ yuttaṭṭhānesu maṇḍapādīni karontā bahuṃ puññamakaṃsu . Magho satta vatapadāni pūretvā kāyassa bhedā saddhiṃ sahāyehi tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbatti.
那时,阿修罗众正住在三十三天。他们与天人们寿命相同、容貌无异。他们见到帝释及其随从后,以为‘这些是新投生的年轻天子’,便准备了盛大的酒宴。帝释示意天子们:‘我们行善时,并未与这些人共享。你们不要饮用这沉香酒,只做沾唇的样子即可。’他们依言而行。愚钝的阿修罗们饮下沉香酒,醉倒后便沉睡过去。帝释吩咐天人们,抓住那些醉倒阿修罗的脚,将他们丢到须弥山脚下。在须弥山下层,有一处名为阿修罗宫的住所,大小与三十三天相当,阿修罗们便住于那里。那里也有一棵名为心帕吒梨(cittapāṭali)的树,当这棵树开花时,他们便会知晓:‘此处不是三十三天,我们被帝释欺骗了。’于是他们高喊着‘抓住他们!’,环绕须弥山,从山脚往上攀爬,犹如蚁冢被破坏时,蚂蚁从蚁冢底部纷纷涌出。在那里,天人与阿修罗互有胜负。天人得胜时,会将阿修罗一直追至海面;阿修罗得胜时,亦会将天人一直追至栏楯脚下。然而在那场战斗中,天人获得胜利,他们把阿修罗一直追到海面。帝释击退阿修罗后,在五个地显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ kāle asuragaṇā tāvatiṃsadevaloke paṭivasanti. Sabbe te devānaṃ samānāyukā samānavaṇṇā ca honti, te sakkaṃ saparisaṃ disvā adhunā nibbattā navakadevaputtā āgatāti mahāpānaṃ sajjayiṃsu. Sakko devaputtānaṃ saññaṃ adāsi – ‘‘amhehi kusalaṃ karontehi na parehi saddhiṃ sādhāraṇaṃ kataṃ, tumhe gaṇḍapānaṃ mā pivittha pītamattameva karothā’’ti. Te tathā akaṃsu. Bālaasurā gaṇḍapānaṃ pivitvā mattā niddaṃ okkamiṃsu. Sakko devānaṃ saññaṃ datvā te pādesu gāhāpetvā sinerupāde khipāpesi, sinerussa heṭṭhimatale asurabhavanaṃ nāma atthi, tāvatiṃsadevalokappamāṇameva. Tattha asurā vasanti. Tesampi cittapāṭali nāma rukkho atthi. Te tassa pupphanakāle jānanti – ‘‘nāyaṃ tāvatiṃsā, sakkena vañcitā maya’’nti. Te gaṇhatha nanti vatvā sineruṃ pariharamānā deve vuṭṭhe vammikapādato vammikamakkhikā viya abhiruhiṃsu. Tattha kālena devā jinanti, kālena asurā. Yadā devānaṃ jayo hoti, asure yāva samuddapiṭṭhā anubandhanti. Yadā asurānaṃ jayo hoti, deve yāva vedikapādā anubandhanti. Tasmiṃ pana saṅgāme devānaṃ jayo ahosi, devā asure yāva samuddapiṭṭhā anubandhiṃsu. Sakko asure palāpetvā pañcasu ṭhānesu ārakkhaṃ ṭhapesi. Evaṃ ārakkhaṃ datvā vedikapāde vajirahatthā indapaṭimāyo ṭhapesi. Asurā kālena kālaṃ uṭṭhahitvā tā paṭimāyo disvā, ‘‘sakko appamatto tiṭṭhatī’’ti tatova nivattanti. Tato paṭinivattitvāti vijitaṭṭhānato nivattitvā. Paricārikāyoti mālāgandhādikammakārikāyo.
393 “毗沙门大王”(Vessavaṇo ca mahārājā):据说他是帝释的亲信,深得信赖,因此与帝释一同前往。“令前导”(purakkhatvā):就是让他走在最前面。“进入后”(pavisiṃsūti):他们进去之后,将门半掩,一边环顾四周,一边站立。而‘目犍连贤友,请看这胜利殿的悦目之处;目犍连贤友,请看这胜利殿的种种悦目之处,请看金柱、银柱、宝珠柱、珊瑚柱、摩沙罗伽罗宝石柱、珍珠柱、七宝所成诸柱,以及那些以金等材质制成的瓶状装饰、狮形雕刻等’,帝释就这样从柱列等处开始,向目犍连展示宫殿的种种美妙,并说出这番话。“如彼过去所造福业”(yathā taṃ pubbekatapuññassa):意思是,正如过去造过福业的人,其受用之处理应如此庄严,而它也确实如此庄严。“这个夜叉极度沉醉”(atibāḷhaṃ kho ayaṃ yakkho pamatto vi显示巴利原文
393.Vessavaṇo ca mahārājāti so kira sakkassa vallabho, balavavissāsiko, tasmā sakkena saddhiṃ agamāsi. Purakkhatvāti purato katvā. Pavisiṃsūti pavisitvā pana upaḍḍhapihitāni dvārāni katvā olokayamānā aṭṭhaṃsu. Idampi, mārisa moggallāna, passa vejayantassa pāsādassa rāmaṇeyyakanti, mārisa moggallāna, idampi vejayantassa pāsādassa rāmaṇeyyakaṃ passa, suvaṇṇatthambhe passa, rajatatthambhe maṇitthambhe pavāḷatthambhe lohitaṅgatthambhe masāragallatthambhe muttatthambhe sattaratanatthambhe, tesaṃyeva suvaṇṇādimaye ghaṭake vāḷarūpakāni ca passāti evaṃ thambhapantiyo ādiṃ katvā rāmaṇeyyakaṃ dassento evamāha. Yathā taṃ pubbekatapuññassāti yathā pubbe katapuññassa upabhogaṭṭhānena sobhitabbaṃ, evamevaṃ sobhatīti attho. Atibāḷhaṃkho ayaṃ yakkho pamatto viharatīti attano pāsāde nāṭakaparivārena sampattiyā vasena ativiya matto.
“作神通行”(iddhābhisaṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkhāsīti):即造作了神通。他进入水遍(āpokasiṇaṃ)之后,决意以神通力使宫殿所在之处化为水,然后用大脚趾弹击宫殿的檐角。那座宫殿,恰如一只放在水面上的钵,被人用手指弹击其口沿一般,前后晃动,摇摆不止,无法停住。同样地,它震动、大震动、大摇晃,柱础、榫接合板、檐角、椽条等发出‘嘎嘎’的声响,仿佛即刻就要倒塌。因此经文说:‘使震动、大震动、大摇晃’。“生稀有未曾有心”(acchariyabbhutacittajātāti):就是‘啊,真稀有!啊,真奇特!’这样生起稀有感与未曾有感,并且生起欢喜,产生强烈的喜悦(somanassa)。“悚惧”(saṃvigganti):即惊悚畏惧。“生毛发竖立”(lomahaṭṭhajātanti):就是生起身毛竖立(lomahaṃsa)的感觉,意思是全身遍布竖起的毛发,如同金墙上镶嵌的象牙钉一般。‘毛发竖立’这一现象,既能因喜悦(somanassa)而生,也能显示巴利原文
Iddhābhisaṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkhāsīti iddhimakāsi. Āpokasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā pāsādapatiṭṭhitokāsaṃ udakaṃ hotūti iddhiṃ adhiṭṭhāya pāsādakaṇṇike pādaṅguṭṭhakena pahari. So pāsādo yathā nāma udakapiṭṭhe ṭhapitapattaṃ mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ aṅguliyā pahaṭaṃ aparāparaṃ kampati calati na santiṭṭhati. Evamevaṃ saṃkampi sampakampi sampavedhi, thambhapiṭṭhasaṅghāṭakaṇṇikagopānasiādīni karakarāti saddaṃ muñcantāni patituṃ viya āraddhāni. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘saṅkampesi sampakampesi sampavedhesī’’ti. Acchariyabbhutacittajātāti aho acchariyaṃ, aho abbhutanti evaṃ sañjātaacchariyaabbhutā ceva sañjātatuṭṭhino ca ahesuṃ uppannabalavasomanassā. Saṃvigganti ubbiggaṃ. Lomahaṭṭhajātanti jātalomahaṃsaṃ, kañcanabhittiyaṃ ṭhapitamaṇināgadantehi viya uddhaggehi lomehi ākiṇṇasarīranti attho. Lomahaṃso ca nāmesa somanassenapi hoti domanassenapi, idha pana somanassena jāto. Thero hi sakkassa somanassavegena saṃvejetuṃ taṃ pāṭihāriyamakāsi. Tasmā somanassavegena saṃviggalomahaṭṭhaṃ viditvāti attho.
394 “贤友,今我”(idhāhaṃ, mārisa):此时,因为长老已经让他生起伴随喜悦的悚惧,使他折服,所以仔细观察后这样说。“贤友,彼世尊导师就是你所说的那样吗?”(eso nu te, mārisa, so bhagavā satthāti):贤友,当你被问及“你去了何处?”时,你回答“我去了导师面前”,如今你在这天界之中,犹如单脚站立一般根基不稳,你竟然这样说,贤友,那位导师就是如此(殊胜)吗?他们这样问。“他是我的同梵行者”(sabrahmacārī me esoti):在这里,虽然长老是出家之人、圆证发愿的上首弟子,而帝释是在家者,但从所修梵行的角度来说,他们是同梵行者,因此长老这般称呼他。“想必你那位导师世尊有大神通吧!”(ahonūna te so bhagavā satthāti):你的同梵行者已拥有如此大神力,那么你的导师世尊……显示巴利原文
394.Idhāhaṃ, mārisāti idānissa yasmā therena somanassasaṃvegaṃ janayitvā tamaṃ vinoditaṃ, tasmā sallakkhetvā evamāha. Eso nu te, mārisa, so bhagavā satthāti, mārisa, tvaṃ kuhiṃ gatosīti vutte mayhaṃ satthu santikanti vadesi, imasmiṃ devaloke ekapādakena viya tiṭṭhasi, yaṃ tvaṃ evaṃ vadesi, eso nu te, mārisa, so bhagavā satthāti pucchiṃsu. Sabrahmacārī me esoti ettha kiñcāpi thero anagāriyo abhinīhārasampanno aggasāvako, sakko agāriyo, maggabrahmacariyavasena panete sabrahmacārino honti, tasmā evamāha. Ahonūna te so bhagavā satthāti sabrahmacārī tāva te evaṃmahiddhiko, so pana te bhagavā satthā aho nūna mahiddhikoti satthu iddhipāṭihāriyadassane jātābhilāpā hutvā evamāhaṃsu.
395 “了知者之一”(ñātaññatarassāti):意为知名者中的一位,因为帝释是众所周知的知名者之一。其余各处皆显然可知,而世尊则随顺因缘次第结束了这场开示。显示巴利原文
395.Ñātaññatarassāti paññātaññatarassa, sakko hi paññātānaṃ aññataro. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva, desanaṃ pana bhagavā yathānusandhināva niṭṭhāpesīti.
《破迷障显扬之中部注疏》(Papañcasūdaniyā Majjhimanikāyaṭṭhakathāya)显示巴利原文
Papañcasūdaniyā majjhimanikāyaṭṭhakathāya
《小渴爱灭尽经》的注释结束(Cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhayasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā)。显示巴利原文
Cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhayasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
第八、《大渴爱灭尽经》的注释(8. Mahātaṇhāsaṅkhayasuttavaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
8. Mahātaṇhāsaṅkhayasuttavaṇṇanā
396 “如是我闻”(evaṃme sutanti)等是《大渴爱灭尽经》的开头。在这里,“恶见”(diṭṭhigatanti):在《蛇喻经》中,仅属执取的见解被称为“恶见”,而在此处则特指“常见”。而且,前一位比丘是多闻的,这位比丘则是寡闻(appassuto):他是一位本生经诵者,听闻世尊讲完本生故事后说:“诸比丘,我在那时,曾是须大拏、大药、毗度罗贤者、施那卡贤者、大阇那迦王。”于是他心里便想:“这些色、受、想、行,各自在其所在之处灭去,而识却从此世流转到彼世,又从彼世流转到此世,不断轮回。”由此生起了常见。因此他说:“就是这同一个识在流转、轮回,并非别的什么(tadevidaṃ viññāṇaṃ sandhāvati saṃsarati anaññaṃ)。”显示巴利原文
396.Evaṃme sutanti mahātaṇhāsaṅkhayasuttaṃ. Tattha diṭṭhigatanti alagaddūpamasutte laddhimattaṃ diṭṭhigatanti vuttaṃ, idha sassatadiṭṭhi. So ca bhikkhu bahussuto, ayaṃ appassuto, jātakabhāṇako bhagavantaṃ jātakaṃ kathetvā, ‘‘ahaṃ, bhikkhave, tena samayena vessantaro ahosiṃ, mahosadho, vidhurapaṇḍito, senakapaṇḍito, mahājanako rājā ahosi’’nti samodhānentaṃ suṇāti. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘ime rūpavedanāsaññāsaṅkhārā tattha tattheva nirujjhanti, viññāṇaṃ pana idhalokato paralokaṃ, paralokato imaṃ lokaṃ sandhāvati saṃsaratī’’ti sassatadassanaṃ uppannaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘tadevidaṃ viññāṇaṃ sandhāvati saṃsarati anañña’’nti.
然而,正自觉者曾说过:‘识依缘而生,有缘时便生起;若无缘,识则不可能生起。’因此,这位比丘所说的法,并非佛陀所说;他在攻击胜利的法轮,障碍如来的无碍智,欺诳欲闻法者,横身偏离圣道,走上了给大众带来不利和痛苦的道路。这就好比在一个国王的领土上,出现一个大盗,为的是给大众带来不利和痛苦;同样地,应知他在胜者的教法中作了贼,也是为带给大众不利和痛苦而生起。‘众多比丘’,指当地常行乞食的比丘们。‘他们前往’,意思是此人已获得徒众,甚至可能令教法隐没。为了在他拉到同伙之前使其远离恶见,这些比丘只是站在他们曾闻法之处,并未坐下,就这样上前。显示巴利原文
Sammāsambuddhena pana, ‘‘viññāṇaṃ paccayasambhavaṃ, sati paccaye uppajjati, vinā paccayaṃ natthi viññāṇassa sambhavo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā ayaṃ bhikkhu buddhena akathitaṃ katheti, jinacakke pahāraṃ deti, vesārajjañāṇaṃ paṭibāhati, sotukāmaṃ janaṃ visaṃvādeti, ariyapathe tiriyaṃ nipatitvā mahājanassa ahitāya dukkhāya paṭipanno. Yathā nāma rañño rajje mahācoro uppajjamāno mahājanassa ahitāya dukkhāya uppajjati, evaṃ jinasāsane coro hutvā mahājanassa ahitāya dukkhāya uppannoti veditabbo. Sambahulā bhikkhūti janapadavāsino piṇḍapātikabhikkhū. Tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti ayaṃ parisaṃ labhitvā sāsanampi antaradhāpeyya, yāva pakkhaṃ na labhati, tāvadeva naṃ diṭṭhigatā vivecemāti sutasutaṭṭhānatoyeva aṭṭhatvā anisīditvā upasaṅkamiṃsu.
398 ‘哪个是那个识’:你所说的那个‘识’具体指什么?哪个才是你所说的识?‘尊者!那个能说、能感受,处处领受善与不善业果报的’:尊者!这个能说、能感受,这个在一切处领受善、不善业果报的。尊者!这就是识,就是我所说的那个识。‘这究竟是谁的’:它是刹帝利、婆罗门、吠舍、首陀罗、在家者、出家者、天人还是人的?属于哪一位所有?显示巴利原文
398.Katamaṃ taṃ sāti viññāṇanti sāti yaṃ tvaṃ viññāṇaṃ sandhāya vadesi, katamaṃ taṃ viññāṇanti? Yvāyaṃ, bhante, vado vedeyyo tatra tatra kalyāṇapāpakānaṃ kammānaṃ vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedetīti, bhante, yo ayaṃ vadati vedayati, yo cāyaṃ tahiṃ tahiṃ kusalākusalakammānaṃ vipākaṃ paccanubhoti. Idaṃ, bhante, viññāṇaṃ, yamahaṃ sandhāya vademīti . Kassa nu kho nāmāti kassa khattiyassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā vessasuddagahaṭṭhapabbajitadevamanussānaṃ vā aññatarassa.
399 ‘那时,世尊告诉比丘们’——为什么世尊要告诉比丘们呢?据说,沙帝当时心里这样想:‘导师称我为“愚人”,但仅仅被称作愚人,并不会因此就没有证得道果的资粮。因为世尊也曾用“愚人”这个词训诫过瓦甘答子优波塞那:“愚人,你太容易偏向放逸了。”那位长老后来精进努力,最终证得了六神通。我也应当发起那样的精进,证得道果。’于是,世尊为了表明他在这个教法中已断绝因缘、法未增长,才告诉比丘们。‘让他发热’等,用意与前面所说相同。‘那时,世尊’此处也是一个特别的连接。据说,沙帝接着又这样想:‘世尊说我没有证得道果的资粮,如果没有资粮,还能做什么呢?如来并非只为具足资粮的人说法,而是为一切人说法。我就在佛陀座下听闻善逝的教诫,修习能导向天界福报的善法。’于是,世尊为了打消他得到善逝教诫的念头,便对他说道:‘愚人,我并非在给你教诫或教导。’就这样开始了这段开示。其含义应按照前面所说的方式来理解。现在,为了澄清大众的错误见解,他说:‘在这里,我要反问比丘们’等。这一切都应按照前面所说的方式来理解。显示巴利原文
399.Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesīti kasmā āmantesi? Sātissa kira evaṃ ahosi – ‘‘satthā maṃ ‘moghapuriso’ti vadati, na ca moghapurisoti vuttamatteneva maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo na hoti. Upasenampi hi vaṅgantaputtaṃ, ‘atilahuṃ kho tvaṃ moghapurisa bāhullāya āvatto’ti (mahāva. 75) bhagavā moghapurisavādena ovadi. Thero aparabhāge ghaṭento vāyamanto cha abhiññā sacchākāsi. Ahampi tathārūpaṃ vīriyaṃ paggaṇhitvā maggaphalāni nibbattessāmī’’ti. Athassa bhagavā chinnapaccayo ayaṃ sāsane aviruḷhadhammoti dassento bhikkhū āmantesi. Usmīkatotiādi heṭṭhā vuttādhippāyameva. Atha kho bhagavāti ayampi pāṭiyekko anusandhi. Sātissa kira etadahosi – ‘‘bhagavā mayhaṃ maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo natthīti vadati, kiṃ sakkā upanissaye asati kātuṃ? Na hi tathāgatā saupanissayasseva dhammaṃ desenti, yassa kassaci desentiyeva. Ahaṃ buddhassa santikā sugatovādaṃ labhitvā saggasampattūpagaṃ kusalaṃ karissāmī’’ti. Athassa bhagavā, ‘‘nāhaṃ, moghapurisa, tuyhaṃ ovādaṃ vā anusāsaniṃ vā demī’’ti sugatovādaṃ paṭippassambhento imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tassattho heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Idāni parisāya laddhiṃ sodhento, ‘‘idhāhaṃ bhikkhū paṭipucchissāmī’’tiādimāha. Taṃ sabbampi heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
400 现在,为了显示识是“有因有缘”而生起,世尊开示:“诸比丘,无论任何……”等等。其中,“缘意与法”:指连同转向一起,缘取作为有分的心意及三界诸法。“缘木柴”等,是为譬喻说明。以此譬喻说明什么?说明识并无“门径转移”这回事。正如依木柴燃烧的火,唯当其所执取的燃料等缘具足时,方才燃烧;若彼缘不存,便因缺缘而于彼处熄灭,不会转移到碎石等上而被唤作“碎石火”之类。同样,依眼根与色尘而生起的眼识,唯当眼根、色尘、光明、作意这些缘具足时,方才生起;若这些缘不具足,便因缺缘而于彼处灭去,不会转移到耳根等处而被唤作“耳识”之类。此理适用于一切根门。世尊即如此呵责沙提比丘:“于识的转起中,我连丝毫门径转移都不承认,而这个愚人沙提竟说存在生命的转移!”显示巴利原文
400. Idāni viññāṇassa sappaccayabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ yaṃ yadeva, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha manañca paṭicca dhamme cāti sahāvajjanena bhavaṅgamanañca tebhūmakadhamme ca paṭicca. Kaṭṭhañca paṭiccātiādi opammanidassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena kiṃ dīpeti? Dvārasaṅkantiyā abhāvaṃ. Yathā hi kaṭṭhaṃ paṭicca jalamāno aggi upādānapaccaye satiyeva jalati, tasmiṃ asati paccayavekallena tattheva vūpasammati, na sakalikādīni saṅkamitvā sakalikaggītiādisaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, evameva cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppannaṃ viññāṇaṃ tasmiṃ dvāre cakkhurūpaālokamanasikārasaṅkhāte paccayamhi satiyeva uppajjati, tasmiṃ asati paccayavekallena tattheva nirujjhati, na sotādīni saṅkamitvā sotaviññāṇantiādisaṅkhyaṃ gacchati . Esa nayo sabbavāresu. Iti bhagavā nāhaṃ viññāṇappavatte dvārasaṅkantimattampi vadāmi, ayaṃ pana sāti moghapuriso bhavasaṅkantiṃ vadatīti sātiṃ niggahesi.
401 如此显示了识的“有因有缘”性后,现在为了显示五蕴也同样“有因有缘”,世尊继而开示:“诸比丘,这是已生者……”等等。其中,“这是已生者”:指此五蕴乃已生、已有、已现起者;诸比丘,你们也应将它视作已生者。“它依食而生起”:而此五蕴是依食而生,依缘而生,缘具足时便得生起——他如此询问:你们是否也这样看待?“由于彼食的灭”:指所依之缘灭尽。“这是已生者,不是吗?”:这究竟是已生者,还是并非已生者呢?“它依食而生起,不是吗?”:此已生的五蕴,究竟是依缘而生起,还是不依缘而生起呢?“由于彼食的灭”:由于那所依之缘的灭尽。“具有灭尽之法,不是吗?”:此法是否具有灭尽的本质?“以正慧观察”:即以观慧,依真实的自相与共相正确观察:此五蕴是已生、已有、已现起者。“为慧所善见”:依前述之理,为观慧所明见。如此,世尊逐一询问而纳受回答,由此显示五蕴的“有因有缘”性。显示巴利原文
401. Evaṃ viññāṇassa sappaccayabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni pana pañcannampi khandhānaṃ sappaccayabhāvaṃ dassento, bhūtamidantiādimāha. Tattha bhūtamidanti idaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ jātaṃ bhūtaṃ nibbattaṃ, tumhepi taṃ bhūtamidanti, bhikkhave, passathāti. Tadāhārasambhavanti taṃ panetaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ āhārasambhavaṃ paccayasambhavaṃ, sati paccaye uppajjati evaṃ passathāti pucchati. Tadāhāranirodhāti tassa paccayassa nirodhā. Bhūtamidaṃ nossūti bhūtaṃ nu kho idaṃ, na nu kho bhūtanti. Tadāhārasambhavaṃ nossūti taṃ bhūtaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ paccayasambhavaṃ nu kho, na nu khoti. Tadāhāranirodhāti tassa paccayassa nirodhā. Nirodhadhammaṃ nossūti taṃ dhammaṃ nirodhadhammaṃ nu kho, na nu khoti. Sammappaññāya passatoti idaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ jātaṃ bhūtaṃ nibbattanti yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇato vipassanāpaññāya sammā passantassa. Paññāya sudiṭṭhanti vuttanayeneva vipassanāpaññāya suṭṭhu diṭṭhaṃ. Evaṃ ye ye taṃ pucchaṃ sallakkhesuṃ, tesaṃ tesaṃ paṭiññaṃ gaṇhanto pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ sappaccayabhāvaṃ dasseti.
现在,对于那些以彼慧清楚见到五蕴是有缘、有灭之后,为询问其于五蕴的离贪状态,世尊便说:“你们对这个……”等等。其中,“见”:指观的正见。以见自相而得以“清净”,以见缘相而得以“明净”。“你们会黏著吗”:你们会以爱和见黏著而安住吗?“你们会玩弄吗”:你们会以爱和见玩弄而安住吗?“你们会视作财物吗”:会像渴求财物那样对之生起贪求吗?“你们会执为‘我所有’吗”:会以爱和见生起“这是我的”执取吗?“是为了度脱,而非为了执取”:我所教导的筏喻之法,是为了度脱四种瀑流,而非为了喜爱而执取。“你们能领会此义吗?”与此相反的,应知是善净的一面。显示巴利原文
Idāni yāya paññāya tehi taṃ sappaccayaṃ sanirodhaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ sudiṭṭhaṃ, tattha nittaṇhabhāvaṃ pucchanto imaṃ ce tumhetiādimāha. Tattha diṭṭhinti vipassanāsammādiṭṭhiṃ . Sabhāvadassanena parisuddhaṃ. Paccayadassanena pariyodātaṃ. Allīyethāti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi allīyitvā vihareyyātha. Kelāyethāti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi kīḷamānā vihareyyātha . Dhanāyethāti dhanaṃ viya icchantā gedhaṃ āpajjeyyātha. Mamāyethāti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi mamattaṃ uppādeyyātha. Nittharaṇatthāya no gahaṇatthāyāti yo so mayā caturoghanittharaṇatthāya kullūpamo dhammo desito, no nikantivasena gahaṇatthāya. Api nu taṃ tumhe ājāneyyāthāti. Vipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
402 现在,为显示诸蕴的缘,他说:「诸比丘,有此四食」等,其义已如前述。然而,好比有人被问:「你认识此人吗?」回答:「我不仅认识此人,认识他的母亲,还认识他母亲的母亲。」如此依传承而了知者,才可谓善知。同样地,世尊不仅了知诸蕴本身,还了知诸蕴的缘,乃至缘的缘;如此,他了知整个缘的序列。如今,为彰显佛陀智力而显示缘的序列,他说:「诸比丘,此四食」等,其义已说。「如是,诸比丘,以无明为缘而有行……乃至……整个苦蕴的集起」,于此,若欲详展缘起的论述,已在《清净道论》中广说。显示巴利原文
402. Idāni tesaṃ khandhānaṃ paccayaṃ dassento, cattārome, bhikkhave, āhārātiādimāha, tampi vuttatthameva. Yathā pana eko imaṃ jānāsīti vutto, ‘‘na kevalaṃ imaṃ, mātarampissa jānāmi, mātu mātarampī’’ti evaṃ paveṇivasena jānanto suṭṭhu jānāti nāma. Evamevaṃ bhagavā na kevalaṃ khandhamattameva jānāti, khandhānaṃ paccayampi tesampi paccayānaṃ paccayanti evaṃ sabbapaccayaparamparaṃ jānāti. So taṃ, buddhabalaṃ dīpento idāni paccayaparamparaṃ dassetuṃ, ime ca, bhikkhave, cattāro āhārātiādimāha. Taṃ vuttatthameva. Iti kho, bhikkhave, avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā…pe… dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotīti ettha pana paṭiccasamuppādakathā vitthāretabbā bhaveyya, sā visuddhimagge vitthāritāva.
404 「此有故彼有」:即当无明等缘存在时,行等果便存在。「由此生起故彼生起」:即由无明等缘的生起,行等果便生起。因此他说:「即以无明为缘而有行……乃至……集起。」如此显示了流转后,现在为显示还灭,他说:「然而,仅由无明的无余离贪、灭尽」等。其中,「然而,仅由无明」:单单因为无明这一项。「无余离贪灭尽」:通过称为离贪之道,达到无余的灭尽、不再生起的灭尽。「行灭」:行不再生起之灭。当行如此灭尽时,为显示「由于行灭而有识灭;由于识等灭,名色等便灭」,他在说了「由行灭而识灭」等之后,总结道:「如是整个苦蕴灭尽」。其中,「整个」:全部、纯粹,或离有情之义。「苦蕴」:苦的集合。「灭尽」:不再生起。显示巴利原文
404.Imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotīti imasmiṃ avijjādike paccaye sati idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ hoti. Imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatīti imassa avijjādikassa paccayassa uppādā idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ uppajjati, tenevāha – ‘‘yadidaṃ avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā…pe… samudayo hotī’’ti. Evaṃ vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā idāni vivaṭṭaṃ dassento, avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhātiādimāha. Tattha avijjāya tvevāti avijjāya eva tu. Asesavirāganirodhāti virāgasaṅkhātena maggena asesanirodhā anuppādanirodhā. Saṅkhāranirodhoti saṅkhārānaṃ anuppādanirodho hoti, evaṃ niruddhānaṃ pana saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhā viññāṇanirodho hoti, viññāṇādīnañca nirodhā nāmarūpādīni niruddhāniyeva hontīti dassetuṃ saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodhotiādiṃ vatvā evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodhohotīti vuttaṃ. Tattha kevalassāti sakalassa, suddhassa vā, sattavirahitassāti attho. Dukkhakkhandhassāti dukkharāsissa. Nirodho hotīti anuppādo hoti.
406 「此无故彼无」等,应依与前相反之理而了知。显示巴利原文
406.Imasmiṃ asatītiādi vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbaṃ.
407 讲毕流转与还灭后,为询问当以与观相应的圣道了知这十二支缘起的流转时,那种“追驰”会被舍断,它何以不复存在,世尊便说:“诸比丘,你们……”等等。其中,“如此知”即是以与观相应的圣道如此了知。“如此见”是其同义词。“前际”指过去分,即过去的蕴、界、处。“你们会追驰吗?”意为:你们会以爱、见的方式而追驰吗?其余义理在《一切漏经》中有详说。显示巴利原文
407. Evaṃ vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathetvā idāni imaṃ dvādasaṅgapaccayavaṭṭaṃ saha vipassanāya maggena jānantassa yā paṭidhāvanā pahīyati, tassā abhāvaṃ pucchanto api nu tumhe, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha evaṃ jānantāti evaṃ sahavipassanāya maggena jānantā. Evaṃ passantāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Pubbantanti purimakoṭṭhāsaṃ, atītakhandhadhātuāyatanānīti attho. Paṭidhāveyyāthāti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena paṭidhāveyyātha. Sesaṃ sabbāsavasutte vitthāritameva.
现在,为了询问他们对此是否不动摇,世尊说:“诸比丘,你们如此知、如此见,会这样说:‘我们不以大师为重’……吗?”其中,“为重”指视为负担,不得不顺从。“沙门”指佛陀沙门。“会指出其他大师吗?”意谓:若生起“这位大师不能成就我们的事”这样的想法,你们会指出其他外道的大师吗?“众多沙门婆罗门”:生起如是想,而指向诸多外道沙门及婆罗门。“禁戒、异兽与吉祥”:指所受持的禁戒、种种异见兽,以及所见、所闻、所觉的吉祥。“那些会成为你们的本质而归信吗?”意为:若生起“这些是本质”的想法,再去归信它们,即舍此取彼之义。“自己证知的”:以己智证知。“自己看见的”:以己慧眼看见。“自己了悟的”:自己明了、弄清楚的。“诸比丘,我已将你们引至”:世尊说:“诸比丘,我以此法等自见等的体性,将你们引至涅槃,令你们到达。”“自见”等义在《清净道论》中有详述。“此乃缘此而说”:这句话是依据你们自己证知等事实而说的。显示巴利原文
Idāni nesaṃ tattha niccalabhāvaṃ pucchanto, api nu tumhe, bhikkhave, evaṃ jānantā evaṃ passantā evaṃ vadeyyātha, satthā no garūtiādimāha. Tattha garūti bhāriko akāmā anuvattitabbo . Samaṇoti buddhasamaṇo. Aññaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyyāthāti ayaṃ satthā amhākaṃ kiccaṃ sādhetuṃ na sakkotīti api nu evaṃsaññino hutvā aññaṃ bāhirakaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyyātha. Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānanti evaṃsaññino hutvā puthūnaṃ titthiyasamaṇānaṃ ceva brāhmaṇānañca. Vatakotūhalamaṅgalānīti vatasamādānāni ca diṭṭhikutūhalāni ca diṭṭhasutamutamaṅgalāni ca. Tāni sārato paccāgaccheyyāthāti etāni sāranti evaṃsaññino hutvā paṭiāgaccheyyātha. Evaṃ nissaṭṭhāni ca puna gaṇheyyāthāti attho. Sāmaṃ ñātanti sayaṃ ñāṇena ñātaṃ. Sāmaṃ diṭṭhanti sayaṃ paññācakkhunā diṭṭhaṃ. Sāmaṃ viditanti sayaṃ vibhāvitaṃ pākaṭaṃ kataṃ. Upanītā kho me tumheti mayā, bhikkhave, tumhe iminā sandiṭṭhikādisabhāvena dhammena nibbānaṃ upanītā, pāpitāti attho. Sandiṭṭhikotiādīnamattho visuddhimagge vitthārito. Idametaṃ paṭicca vuttanti etaṃ vacanamidaṃ tumhehi sāmaṃ ñātādibhāvaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
408 “诸比丘,三事和合”这一段,为何而说?难道前面不是已经以流转与还灭的方式将教说推至顶点了吗?是的,已推至顶点。然而,这是另一层关联:因为“世间有情的结生是迷乱的,我将破除其迷乱之处,令其明显”,所以宣说此法。再者,流转的根本是无明,还灭的根本是佛陀出世;如此展示了流转的根本——无明,以及还灭的根本——佛陀出世之后,又为了“再一次以流转与还灭将教说推至顶点”而说此法。其中,“和合”指会聚而生、成为总聚。“入胎”指在母胎中产生的有情入胎。“发生”即产生。有些处所说“胎”指母胎,例如:显示巴利原文
408.Tiṇṇaṃ kho pana, bhikkhaveti kasmā ārabhi? Nanu heṭṭhā vaṭṭavivaṭṭavasena desanā matthakaṃ pāpitāti? Āma pāpitā. Ayaṃ pana pāṭiekko anusandhi , ‘‘ayañhi lokasannivāso paṭisandhisammūḷho, tassa sammohaṭṭhānaṃ viddhaṃsetvā pākaṭaṃ karissāmī’’ti imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Apica vaṭṭamūlaṃ avijjā, vivaṭṭamūlaṃ buddhuppādo, iti vaṭṭamūlaṃ avijjaṃ vivaṭṭamūlañca buddhuppādaṃ dassetvāpi, ‘‘puna ekavāraṃ vaṭṭavivaṭṭavasena desanaṃ matthakaṃ pāpessāmī’’ti imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha sannipātāti samodhānena piṇḍabhāvena. Gabbhassāti gabbhe nibbattanakasattassa. Avakkanti hotīti nibbatti hoti. Katthaci hi gabbhoti mātukucchi vutto. Yathāha –
那最初的一夜,童子安住于母胎之中;
他一出生便离去,离去即不再返回。”(本生经1.15.363)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yamekarattiṃ paṭhamaṃ, gabbhe vasati māṇavo; Abbhuṭṭhitova so yāti, sa gacchaṃ na nivattatī’’ti. (jā. 1.15.363);
在有些语境中,“胎”是指投生其中的有情。譬如:“阿难,正如某些妇女怀胎九月或十月后便分娩。”(中部3.205)此处所指即是有情,正是就此而说“入胎”。显示巴利原文
Katthaci gabbhe nibbattanasatto. Yathāha – ‘‘yathā kho, panānanda, aññā itthikā nava vā dasa vā māse gabbhaṃ kucchinā pariharitvā vijāyantī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.205). Idha satto adhippeto, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘gabbhassa avakkanti hotī’’ti.
“在此”(idha)是指于此有情世间。“母正值经期”(mātā ca utunī hotī)是就经期之时而言。据说,于女人体内胎儿投生之处,会形成一个大的血疱,血疱破裂流出后,该处即变得清净;而当此处清净时,若父母一次结合,此后整整七天,它都如同良田一般。在此期间,哪怕仅仅握手、捉臂等肢体接触,胎儿也会形成。“乾闼婆”(gandhabba)是指将要投生于该处的有情。“现前”(paccupaṭṭhito hotī)并非指有有情站在近旁观看父母交合,而是指由业力所驱使,必有有情将投生于彼处,这是此处表达之义。“以疑虑”(saṃsayena)是指:“我会健康吗?我的孩子会健康吗?”——像这样关于生命的极大忧虑。“诸比丘,那血”是说当时母血到达该处,由于爱子之情而变得洁白,因此这样说。“弯犁”(vaṅkaka)指村童玩耍的小犁。“打板”(ghaṭikā)指用长杖击打短杖的游戏。“倒翻戏”(mokkhacika)指翻身游戏,即于空中握住棍棒,或头顶地上下翻转的游戏。“转轮”(ciṅgulaka)指转动轮状玩具的游戏。显示巴利原文
Idhāti imasmiṃ sattaloke. Mātā ca utunī hotīti idaṃ utusamayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Mātugāmassa kira yasmiṃ okāse dārako nibbattati, tattha mahatī lohitapīḷakā saṇṭhahitvā bhijjitvā paggharati, vatthu suddhaṃ hoti, suddhe vatthumhi mātāpitūsu ekavāraṃ sannipatitesu yāva satta divasāni khettameva hoti. Tasmiṃ samaye hatthaggāhaveṇiggāhādinā aṅgaparāmasanenapi dārako nibbattatiyeva. Gandhabboti tatrūpagasatto. Paccupaṭṭhito hotīti na mātāpitūnaṃ sannipātaṃ olokayamāno samīpe ṭhito paccupaṭṭhito nāma hoti. Kammayantayantito pana eko satto tasmiṃ okāse nibbattanako hotīti ayamettha adhippāyo. Saṃsayenāti ‘‘arogo nu kho bhavissāmi ahaṃ vā, putto vā me’’ti evaṃ mahantena jīvitasaṃsayena. Lohitañhetaṃ, bhikkhaveti tadā kira mātulohitaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ sampattaṃ puttasinehena paṇḍaraṃ hoti. Tasmā evamāha. Vaṅkakanti gāmadārakānaṃ kīḷanakaṃ khuddakanaṅgalaṃ. Ghaṭikā vuccati dīghadaṇḍena rassadaṇḍakaṃ paharaṇakīḷā. Mokkhacikanti samparivattakakīḷā, ākāse vā daṇḍakaṃ gahetvā bhūmiyaṃ vā sīsaṃ ṭhapetvā heṭṭhupariyabhāvena parivattanakīḷananti vuttaṃ hoti. Ciṅgulakaṃ vuccati tālapaṇṇādīhi kataṃ vātappahārena paribbhamanacakkaṃ . Pattāḷhakaṃ vuccati paṇṇanāḷikā, tāya vālikādīni minantā kīḷanti. Rathakanti khuddakarathaṃ. Dhanukampi khuddakadhanumeva.
409 “生着”(sārajjatī)指生起贪。“生恚”(byāpajjatī)指生起瞋。“未现起身至念”(anupaṭṭhitakāyasatī)是说身至念未被建立;所谓身至念,即对身体的念,此处指未曾安立。“心狭小”(parittacetaso)指有不善心。“他所不知不达的恶”——此中的恶,是指那些于果等至中灭尽的恶法,然而他既不了解也不证得此果等至。“随顺与违逆”(anurodhavirodha)即贪与瞋。“喜悦”(abhinandatī)是由于渴爱而感到欢喜,并因渴爱而口出“啊,真快乐”等言,从而随喜。“深入执取而住立”(ajjhosāya tiṭṭhatī)是说以渴爱的深入执取,将对象吞没并紧紧抓取。那么,对于乐受或不苦不乐受,又如何会有“喜悦”呢?当他执著于“我苦、我的苦”时,这也称为喜悦。“生起喜”(uppajjati nandī)指生起渴爱。“彼之取”(tadupādāna)即彼渴爱,从执取的意义上称为取。以彼取为缘而有……乃至……苦蕴的集起,这就是世尊所说。显示巴利原文
409.Sārajjatīti rāgaṃ uppādeti. Byāpajjatīti byāpādaṃ uppādeti. Anupaṭṭhitakāyasatīti kāye sati kāyasati, taṃ anupaṭṭhapetvāti attho. Parittacetasoti akusalacitto. Yatthassa te pāpakāti yassaṃ phalasamāpattiyaṃ ete nirujjhanti, taṃ na jānāti nādhigacchatīti attho. Anurodhavirodhanti rāgañceva dosañca. Abhinandatīti taṇhāvasena abhinandati, taṇhāvaseneva aho sukhantiādīni vadanto abhivadati. Ajjhosāya tiṭṭhatīti taṇhāajjhosānagahaṇena gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā gaṇhāti. Sukhaṃ vā adukkhamasukhaṃ vā abhinandatu, dukkhaṃ kathaṃ abhinandatīti? ‘‘Ahaṃ dukkhito mama dukkha’’nti gaṇhanto abhinandati nāma. Uppajjati nandīti taṇhā uppajjati. Tadupādānanti sāva taṇhā gahaṇaṭṭhena upādānaṃ nāma. Tassa upādānapaccayā bhavo…pe… samudayo hotīti, idañhi bhagavatā puna ekavāraṃ dvisandhi tisaṅkhepaṃ paccayākāravaṭṭaṃ dassitaṃ.
410-4 现在,为了开示还灭,世尊说:“诸比丘,于此,如来出现于世间……”等等。其中,“心无量”(appamāṇacetaso)是指具有无量、出世间之心的人,即拥有道心者。“诸比丘,你们应当受持我以略说而开示的爱灭尽解脱。”诸比丘,我如此略说的爱灭尽解脱教法,你们应当恒常忆持,切莫放逸。此处所说的教法,因为是获得解脱之因,故称“解脱”。“被大爱网、爱结缚所缠缚”(mahātaṇhājālataṇhāsaṅghāṭapaṭimukka):贪爱如网交织,故称大爱网;如结缠缚,故称爱结。你们当知,这位名为渔夫之子的比丘,即是这样被大爱网与爱结所缠缚;这就是说,他已深深陷入其中,被完全包裹,你们应当如此忆持。其余各处,义理浅显易了。显示巴利原文
410-4. Idāni vivaṭṭaṃ dassetuṃ idha, bhikkhave, tathāgato loke uppajjatītiādimāha. Tattha appamāṇacetasoti appamāṇaṃ lokuttaraṃ ceto assāti appamāṇacetaso, maggacittasamaṅgīti attho. Imaṃ kho me tumhe, bhikkhave, saṃkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttiṃ dhārethāti, bhikkhave, imaṃ saṃkhittena desitaṃ mayhaṃ, taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttidesanaṃ tumhe niccakālaṃ dhāreyyātha mā pamajjeyyātha. Desanā hi ettha vimuttipaṭilābhahetuto vimuttīti vuttā. Mahātaṇhājālataṇhāsaṅghāṭapaṭimukkanti taṇhāva saṃsibbitaṭṭhena mahātaṇhājālaṃ, saṅghaṭitaṭṭhena saṅghāṭanti vuccati; iti imasmiṃ mahātaṇhājāle taṇhāsaṅghāṭe ca imaṃ sātiṃ bhikkhuṃ kevaṭṭaputtaṃ paṭimukkaṃ dhāretha. Anupaviṭṭho antogadhoti naṃ dhārethāti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
《马邑大经》的解释显示巴利原文
9. Mahāassapurasuttavaṇṇanā
415 如是我闻,这部经是《马邑大经》。其中,「在盎伽国」:“盎伽”本指当地的王子们,他们居住的地区依惯用名也被称为“盎伽”,便是这盎伽国。“马邑”是盎伽国的一座城,也是该地区的一个聚落。世尊便以此城为托钵的村落而住,他对那里的比丘们说了这番话:“诸比丘,世间的人们称你们为‘沙门、沙门’……”等等。显示巴利原文
415.Evaṃme sutanti mahāassapurasuttaṃ. Tattha aṅgesūti aṅgā nāma jānapadino rājakumārā, tesaṃ nivāso ekopi janapado ruḷhīsaddena ‘‘aṅgā’’ti vuccati, tasmiṃ aṅgesu janapade. Assapuraṃ nāma aṅgānaṃ nigamoti assapuranti nagaranāmena laddhavohāro aṅgānaṃ janapadassa eko nigamo, taṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvā viharatīti attho. Bhagavā etadavocāti etaṃ ‘‘samaṇā samaṇāti vo, bhikkhave, jano sañjānātī’’tiādivacanamavoca.
为何世尊要这样说?据说在那个聚落,人们具足正信,是佛弟子、法弟子、僧弟子。即便对当天刚出家的沙弥,他们也当作戒腊百年的长老一般恭敬赞叹。上午时分,当他们看见比丘僧团入村托钵时,即使正拿着锄具等要去田间,或拿着斧头等要入林,也会放下那些工具,来到比丘僧团将要就坐的地方——讲堂、帐篷或树下,清扫干净,铺设座位,备好无尘的饮用水,请僧团入座,供养粥食等。待比丘僧团用斋完毕,送他们离开之后,才拿起各自的工具,去田间或林中干活。即使在劳作之处,他们除了谈论僧团的功德,并无其他话题。他们说:‘有道位的四种人、果位的四种人,这八种圣者称为圣僧。他们具备这样的戒、这样的威仪、这样的修行,有惭有愧,贤善而又功德广大。’他们如此只称赞比丘僧团的功德。劳作归来,用过晚饭,坐在家门口时,或在房中歇息时,也依旧只谈论僧团的功德。世尊见到这些人如此的恭敬礼遇后,为了策励比丘僧团精进,以堪当受此饮食供养,而宣说了这番话。显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana evaṃ avocāti. Tasmiṃ kira nigame manussā saddhā pasannā buddhamāmakā dhammamāmakā saṅghamāmakā, tadahupabbajitasāmaṇerampi vassasatikattherasadisaṃ katvā pasaṃsanti; pubbaṇhasamayaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ piṇḍāya pavisantaṃ disvā bījanaṅgalādīni gahetvā khettaṃ gacchantāpi, pharasuādīni gahetvā araññaṃ pavisantāpi tāni upakaraṇāni nikkhipitvā bhikkhusaṅghassa nisīdanaṭṭhānaṃ āsanasālaṃ vā maṇḍapaṃ vā rukkhamūlaṃ vā sammajjitvā āsanāni paññapetvā arajapānīyaṃ paccupaṭṭhāpetvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ nisīdāpetvā yāgukhajjakādīni datvā katabhattakiccaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ uyyojetvā tato tāni upakaraṇāni ādāya khettaṃ vā araññaṃ vā gantvā attano kammāni karonti, kammantaṭṭhānepi nesaṃ aññā kathā nāma natthi. Cattāro maggaṭṭhā cattāro phalaṭṭhāti aṭṭha puggalā ariyasaṅgho nāma; te ‘‘evarūpena sīlena, evarūpena ācārena, evarūpāya paṭipattiyā samannāgatā lajjino pesalā uḷāraguṇā’’ti bhikkhusaṅghasseva vaṇṇaṃ kathenti. Kammantaṭṭhānato āgantvā bhuttasāyamāsā gharadvāre nisinnāpi, sayanigharaṃ pavisitvā nisinnāpi bhikkhusaṅghasseva vaṇṇaṃ kathenti. Bhagavā tesaṃ manussānaṃ nipaccakāraṃ disvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ piṇḍapātāpacāyane niyojetvā etadavoca.
「沙门因与婆罗门因」:其义为,受持并圆满哪些法之后,能成为止息诸恶的沙门、舍离诸恶的婆罗门。在《增支部》中,世尊说:‘诸比丘,有这三种沙门的沙门性与沙门所应行。哪三种?受持增上戒学、受持增上心学、受持增上慧学。’那里说的是沙门所应修的法,这些法也就是沙门因。但在此处,世尊是以惭与愧等为核心作详细开示的。「如是,这便属于我们」中的‘no’仅为语助词,实际意思是‘如是,这便属于我们’。「有大果报、大功德」:两词意义相同,都指有大果报与利益。「不空过」:指不虚无,不落空。「有果」:意同前词,因为没有果报才称为‘空’。「有增益」:能带来增长,此词是‘有果’的同义词。‘因此,诸比丘,你们应当这样修学’:意为,比丘们,你们应当如此学习。就这样,世尊用了如此多的篇幅,来赞叹惭、愧等法的功德。为何如此?是为了预先截断可能生起的议论。因为可能会有刚出家的愚痴比丘说:‘世尊只说要受持惭、愧等法……’显示巴利原文
Ye dhammā samaṇakaraṇā ca brāhmaṇakaraṇā cāti ye dhammā samādāya paripūritā samitapāpasamaṇañca bāhitapāpabrāhmaṇañca karontīti attho. ‘‘Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, samaṇassa samaṇiyāni samaṇakaraṇīyāni . Katamāni tīṇi? Adhisīlasikkhāsamādānaṃ, adhicittasikkhāsamādānaṃ , adhipaññāsikkhāsamādāna’’nti (a. ni. 3.82) ettha pana samaṇena kattabbadhammā vuttā. Tepi ca samaṇakaraṇā hontiyeva. Idha pana hirottappādivasena desanā vitthāritā. Evaṃ no ayaṃ amhākanti ettha noti nipātamattaṃ. Evaṃ ayaṃ amhākanti attho. Mahapphalā mahānisaṃsāti ubhayampi atthato ekameva. Avañjhāti amoghā. Saphalāti ayaṃ tasseva attho. Yassā hi phalaṃ natthi, sā vañjhā nāma hoti. Saudrayāti savaḍḍhi, idaṃ saphalatāya vevacanaṃ. Evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbanti, bhikkhave, evaṃ tumhehi sikkhitabbaṃ. Iti bhagavā iminā ettakena ṭhānena hirottappādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ kathesi. Kasmā? Vacanapathapacchindanatthaṃ. Sace hi koci acirapabbajito bālabhikkhu evaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘bhagavā hirottappādidhamme samādāya vattathāti vadati, ko nu kho tesaṃ samādāya vattane ānisaṃso’’ti? Tassa vacanapathapacchindanatthaṃ. Ayañca ānisaṃso, ime hi dhammā samādāya paripūritā samitapāpasamaṇaṃ nāma bāhitapāpabrāhmaṇaṃ nāma karonti, catupaccayalābhaṃ uppādenti, paccayadāyakānaṃ mahapphalataṃ sampādenti, pabbajjaṃ avañjhaṃ saphalaṃ saudrayaṃ karontīti vaṇṇaṃ abhāsi. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato pana vaṇṇakathā satipaṭṭhāne (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.373; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.373) vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
416 “以惭与愧”:即《法集论》等所详述的“于应惭处而惭,于应愧处而愧”的惭与愧。其中,惭由内在因素引发,愧由外缘引发。惭以自我为基准,愧以世间为基准。惭的本质是羞耻,愧的本质是畏惧。种种解说详见于《清净道论》中。再者,此二法能守护世间,故称“世间守护法”。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,有两种白法守护世间。哪两种?惭与愧。诸比丘,若此二种白法不守护世间,世间便不会有‘母亲’、‘姨母’、‘舅母’、‘师母’、‘尊长之妻’这样的称谓,世间将如山羊、绵羊、鸡、猪、狗、豺狼般混乱。”此二法在《本生经》中被称为“天法”。正如所说:显示巴利原文
416.Hirottappenāti ‘‘yaṃ hirīyati hirīyitabbena, ottappati ottappitabbenā’’ti (dha. sa. 1331) evaṃ vitthāritāya hiriyā ceva ottappena ca. Apicettha ajjhattasamuṭṭhānā hirī, bahiddhāsamuṭṭhānaṃ ottappaṃ. Attādhipateyyā hirī, lokādhipateyyaṃ ottappaṃ. Lajjāsabhāvasaṇṭhitā hirī, bhayasabhāvasaṇṭhitaṃ ottappaṃ, vitthārakathā panettha sabbākārena visuddhimagge vuttā. Apica ime dve dhammā lokaṃ pālanato lokapāladhammā nāmāti kathitā. Yathāha – ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, sukkā dhammā lokaṃ pālenti. Katame dve? Hirī ca ottappañca . Ime kho, bhikkhave, dve sukkā dhammā lokaṃ pālenti. Ime ca kho, bhikkhave, dve sukkā dhammā lokaṃ na pāleyyuṃ, nayidha paññāyetha, ‘mātā’ti vā, ‘mātucchā’ti vā, ‘mātulānī’ti vā, ‘ācariyabhariyā’ti vā, ‘garūnaṃ dārā’ti vā, sambhedaṃ loko agamissa, yathā ajeḷakā kukkuṭasūkarā soṇasiṅgālā’’ti (a. ni. 2.9). Imeyeva jātake ‘‘devadhammā’’ti kathitā. Yathāha –
“具足惭与愧,安住于白法,
世间寂静善人,即称为具天法者。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Hiriottappasampannā , sukkadhammasamāhitā; Santo sappurisā loke, devadhammāti vuccare’’ti. (jā. 1.1.6);
另外,在大纯陀长老那里,这些法被示现为“削减烦恼的修行”。正如经中所说:“他人可能无惭,而我们于此应具惭——应如是修习削减;他人可能无愧,而我们于此应具愧——应如是修习削减。”在大迦叶长老那里,这些法被示现为“具足教诫”。确实有这样说:“因此,迦叶!你应当这样学:我应当对长老、年少、中年的比丘,都生起强烈的惭与愧。迦叶!你应当这样学。”但在此处,则显示它们被称为“沙门法”。显示巴利原文
Mahācundattherassa pana kilesasallekhanapaṭipadāti katvā dassitā. Yathāha – ‘‘pare ahirikā bhavissanti, mayamettha hirimanā bhavissāmāti sallekho karaṇīyo. Pare anottāpī bhavissanti, mayamettha ottāpī bhavissāmāti sallekho karaṇīyo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.83). Imeva mahākassapattherassa ovādūpasampadāti katvā dassitā. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘tasmā tiha te, kassapa, evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ, tibbaṃ me hirottappaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavissati theresu navesu majjhimesūti. Evañhi te, kassapa, sikkhitabba’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.154). Idha panete samaṇadhammā nāmāti dassitā.
然而,至此,“沙门义”可说已达极致,因此世尊为进一步开示其他沙门因的法,而开始说“诸比丘,然而,你们可能……”等语。这里,关于“沙门义”:《相应部》中这样说:“诸比丘,什么是沙门性?就是这圣八支道,即:正见……乃至……正定。诸比丘,这称为沙门性。诸比丘,什么是沙门义?诸比丘,贪欲的灭尽、瞋恚的灭尽、愚痴的灭尽,诸比丘,这称为沙门义。”在那里,道被称为“沙门性”,果与涅槃被称为“沙门义”。但在当前语境下,应理解为将道与果合在一起,说为“沙门义”。“Ārocayāmi”(我宣说)意思是“我讲述”,“Paṭivedayāmi”(我告知)意思是“我令知”。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana ettāvatā sāmaññattho matthakaṃ patto nāma hoti, tasmā aparepi samaṇakaraṇadhamme dassetuṃ siyā kho pana, bhikkhave, tumhākantiādimāha. Tattha sāmaññatthoti saṃyuttake tāva, ‘‘katamañca, bhikkhave, sāmaññaṃ? Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Seyyathidaṃ, sammādiṭṭhi…pe… sammāsamādhi, idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, sāmaññaṃ. Katamo ca, bhikkhave, sāmaññattho? Yo, bhikkhave, rāgakkhayo dosakkhayo mohakkhayo, ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, sāmaññattho’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.36) maggo ‘‘sāmañña’’nti, phalanibbānāni ‘‘sāmaññattho’’ti vuttāni. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne maggampi phalampi ekato katvā sāmaññattho kathitoti veditabbo. Ārocayāmīti kathemi. Paṭivedayāmīti jānāpemi.
417 于“parisuddho no kāyasamācāro”(我们的身行是清净的)这一句中,“身行”有清净与不清净两种。若比丘杀害有情、取未给与之物、于诸欲行邪淫,其“身行”即名不清净,但这只是就业道而言被遮止。若有人用手、土块、杖或刀打击、恼害他人,其“身行”亦名不清净,这也是依学处所禁止的。在此经中,并未论及此二种情况,而是说为“最极严苛”。若比丘为了驱赶在水罐旁饮水、或在钵中进食的乌鸦,而挥手、举杖或投掷土块,其“身行”即名不清净;相反的情形则名为清净。“Uttāno”意为显露、明白;“Vivaṭo”意为敞开,无所覆藏;两者皆在阐明其清净。“Na ca chiddavā”意为无有缺陷,恒常相续无有间断。“Saṃvuto”意为由关闭烦恼之门而防护,并非为了覆藏过失。显示巴利原文
417.Parisuddho no kāyasamācāroti ettha kāyasamācāro parisuddho aparisuddhoti duvidho. Yo hi bhikkhu pāṇaṃ hanati adinnaṃ ādiyati, kāmesu micchā carati, tassa kāyasamācāro aparisuddho nāma, ayaṃ pana kammapathavaseneva vārito. Yo pana pāṇinā vā leḍḍunā vā daṇḍena vā satthena vā paraṃ potheti viheṭheti, tassa kāyasamācāro aparisuddho nāma, ayampi sikkhāpadabaddheneva paṭikkhitto. Imasmiṃ sutte ubhayampetaṃ akathetvā paramasallekho nāma kathito. Yo hi bhikkhu pānīyaghaṭe vā pānīyaṃ pivantānaṃ, patte vā bhattaṃ bhuñjantānaṃ kākānaṃ nivāraṇavasena hatthaṃ vā daṇḍaṃ vā leḍḍuṃ vā uggirati, tassa kāyasamācāro aparisuddho. Viparīto parisuddho nāma. Uttānoti uggato pākaṭo. Vivaṭoti anāvaṭo asañchanno. Ubhayenāpi parisuddhataṃyeva dīpeti. Na ca chiddavāti sadā ekasadiso antarantare chiddarahito. Saṃvutoti kilesānaṃ dvāra pidahanena pidahito, na vajjapaṭicchādanatthāya.
418 在「语正行」上也是如此。若比丘说妄语、离间语、粗恶语与杂秽语,其语正行即是不清净,然此乃从业道而被遮止。若以「居士」「奴仆」「雇工」等语辱骂他人,其语正行亦是不清净,此乃依学处所禁止。此经中并未讨论这两种情况,唯说为「最极严苛」。若比丘面对沙弥,被问「尊者,您见到我的戒师了吗?」时,以戏谑之心答道:「贤友,众多比丘、比丘尼共聚游化之处,你的戒师或许已提着可售的叶包离去了。」如此之言,其语正行即是不清净。相反的情形,则称为清净。显示巴利原文
418.Vacīsamācārepi yo bhikkhu musā vadati, pisuṇaṃ katheti, pharusaṃ bhāsati, samphaṃ palapati, tassa vacīsamācāro aparisuddho nāma. Ayaṃ pana kammapathavasena vārito. Yo pana gahapatikāti vā dāsāti vā pessāti vā ādīhi khuṃsento vadati, tassa vacīsamācāro aparisuddho nāma. Ayaṃ pana sikkhāpadabaddheneva paṭikkhitto. Imasmiṃ sutte ubhayampetaṃ akathetvā paramasallekho nāma kathito. Yo hi bhikkhu daharena vā sāmaṇerena vā, ‘‘kacci, bhante, amhākaṃ upajjhāyaṃ passathā’’ti vutte, sambahulā, āvuso, bhikkhubhikkhuniyo ekasmiṃ padese vicadiṃsu, upajjhāyo te vikkāyikasākabhaṇḍikaṃ ukkhipitvā gato bhavissatī’’tiādinā nayena hasādhippāyopi evarūpaṃ kathaṃ katheti, tassa vacīsamācāro aparisuddho. Viparīto parisuddho nāma.
419 在「意正行」上,若比丘有贪欲、瞋心、邪见,其意正行即是不清净,然此乃从业道而被遮止。若接受他人寄存的金银,其意正行亦是不清净,此乃依学处所禁止。此经中并未讨论这两种情况,唯说为「最极严苛」。若比丘思维欲寻、瞋恚寻、害寻,其意正行即是不清净。相反的情形,则称为清净。显示巴利原文
419.Manosamācāre yo bhikkhu abhijjhālu byāpannacitto micchādiṭṭhiko hoti, tassa manosamācāro aparisuddho nāma. Ayaṃ pana kammapathavaseneva vārito. Yo pana upanikkhittaṃ jātarūparajataṃ sādiyati, tassa manosamācāro aparisuddho nāma. Ayampi sikkhāpadabaddheneva paṭikkhitto. Imasmiṃ sutte ubhayampetaṃ akathetvā paramasallekho nāma kathito. Yo pana bhikkhu kāmavitakkaṃ vā byāpādavitakkaṃ vā vihiṃsāvitakkaṃ vā vitakketi, tassa manosamācāro aparisuddho. Viparīto parisuddho nāma.
420 关于「活命」:若比丘为了活命而行医、传递消息、切开脓疮、涂敷药膏、熬煮药油——即依二十一种邪命而谋生。或先向人请求而后受用食物,其活命即是不清净,然此乃依学处所禁止。此经中并未讨论这两种情况,唯说为「最极严苛」。譬如,比丘若得酥油、生酥、油、蜜、糖浆等,心想「明日或后日还会有」,便以囤积之心受用;或见苦楝嫩芽等,对沙弥说:「你们吃些嫩芽吧」,沙弥心想「长老想吃」,便作净法后供养;或对年少比丘或沙弥说:「贤友,喝点水吧」,他们心想「长老想喝水」,便洗净水杯后奉上。如此受用者,其活命即是不清净。不如此者,则称为清净。显示巴利原文
420. Ājīvasmiṃ yo bhikkhu ājīvahetu vejjakammaṃ pahiṇagamanaṃ gaṇḍaphālanaṃ karoti, arumakkhanaṃ deti, telaṃ pacatīti ekavīsatianesanāvasena jīvikaṃ kappeti. Yo vā pana viññāpetvā bhuñjati, tassa ājīvo aparisuddho nāma. Ayaṃ pana sikkhāpadabaddheneva paṭikkhitto. Imasmiṃ sutte ubhayampetaṃ akathetvā paramasallekho nāma kathito. Yo hi bhikkhu sappinavanītatelamadhuphāṇitādīni labhitvā, ‘‘sve vā punadivase vā bhavissatī’’ti sannidhikārakaṃ paribhuñjati, yo vā pana nimbaṅkurādīni disvā sāmaṇere vadati – ‘‘aṃṅkure khādathā’’ti, sāmaṇerā thero khāditukāmoti kappiyaṃ katvā denti, dahare pana sāmaṇere vā pānīyaṃ pivatha, āvusoti vadati, te thero pānīyaṃ pivitukāmoti pānīyasaṅkhaṃ dhovitvā denti, tampi paribhuñjantassa ājīvo aparisuddho nāma hoti. Viparīto parisuddho nāma.
422 「知量」:在寻求、接受、受用这三方面,都懂得适量、恰到好处,把握分寸。显示巴利原文
422.Mattaññūti pariyesanapaṭiggahaṇaparibhogesu mattaññū, yuttaññū, pamāṇaññū.
423 「警寤专修」:将一昼夜划分为六个时段,将其中一个时段给予睡眠休息,其余五个时段则专志保持醒寤、精勤用功。「狮子卧」:在此,有四种卧姿:享受欲乐者的卧姿、饿鬼的卧姿、狮子的卧姿,以及如来的卧姿。其中,佛陀说:‘诸比丘,享受欲乐的众生大多左胁而卧。’这即是享受欲乐者的卧姿,因为在他们之中,极少有右胁而卧的人。显示巴利原文
423.Jāgariyamanuyuttāti rattindivaṃ cha koṭṭhāse katvā ekasmiṃ koṭṭhāse niddāya okāsaṃ datvā pañca koṭṭhāse jāgariyamhi yuttā payuttā. Sīhaseyyanti ettha kāmabhogiseyyā, petaseyyā, sīhaseyyā, tathāgataseyyāti catasso seyyā. Tattha ‘‘yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, kāmabhogī sattā vāmena passena sentī’’ti (a. ni. 4.246) ayaṃ kāmabhogiseyyā, tesu hi yebhuyyena dakkhiṇapassena sayāno nāma natthi.
佛陀说:‘诸比丘,饿鬼大多仰面而卧。’这便是饿鬼卧。因为饿鬼身体血肉极少,仅由骨架支离散乱地相连,无法侧卧,只能仰卧。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, petā uttānā sentī’’ti (a. ni. 4.246) ayaṃ petaseyyā, petā hi appamaṃsalohitattā aṭṭhisaṅghātajaṭitā ekena passena sayituṃ na sakkonti, uttānāva senti.
佛陀说:‘诸比丘,兽王狮子大多将尾巴收进两条后腿之间,向右侧躺卧。’这便是狮子卧。兽王狮子由于充满威势,会将两只前脚并排安放,两只后脚也并排安放,随后把尾巴收入大腿之间,心中留意前脚、后脚以及尾尖的位置,然后将头安放在两只前脚上方躺卧。即使睡了一整天再醒来,它也不会惊慌地惊醒。醒来后,它会抬起头,察看前脚摆放的位置。如果发现任何部位有所移动、偏离了原位,便心感不悦,想道:‘这可不匹配你的高贵出身与勇猛本性。’于是它便继续待在原处躺着,不外出觅食。如果检查发现并无偏移,仍稳固地放在原位,它便欢喜满意地想:‘这才与你的高贵出身和勇猛本性相称。’接着便起身,做一个狮子伸展的动作,抖擞鬃毛,发出三遍狮子吼,然后才外出觅食。至于第四禅的卧姿,则称为如来卧。在这几种卧姿中,此处经文提及的是狮子卧。由于这是充满威势力量的威仪,因此被称为最尊贵、最殊胜的卧姿。‘脚叠脚’:指将左脚叠放在右脚上。‘稍作重叠’:即稍稍超出、略略错开地安放,而非完全对齐。为什么呢?显示巴利原文
‘‘Yebhuyyena , bhikkhave, sīho migarājā naṅguṭṭhaṃ antarasatthimhi anupakkhipitvā dakkhiṇena passena setī’’ti (a. ni. 4.246) ayaṃ sīhaseyyā. Tejussadattā hi sīho migarājā dve purimapāde ekasmiṃ ṭhāne pacchimapāde ekasmiṃ ṭhapetvā naṅguṭṭhaṃ antarasatthimhi pakkhipitvā purimapādapacchimapādanaṅguṭṭhānaṃ ṭhitokāsaṃ sallakkhetvā dvinnaṃ purimapādānaṃ matthake sīsaṃ ṭhapetvā sayati . Divasampi sayitvā pabujjhamāno na utrāsanto pabujjhati. Sīsaṃ pana ukkhipitvā purimapādānaṃ ṭhitokāsaṃ sallakkheti. Sace kiñci ṭhānaṃ vijahitvā ṭhitaṃ hoti, ‘‘nayidaṃ tuyhaṃ jātiyā, na sūrabhāvassa ca anurūpa’’nti anattamano hutvā tattheva sayati, na gocarāya pakkamati. Avijahitvā ṭhite pana ‘‘tuyhaṃ jātiyā sūrabhāvassa ca anurūpamida’’nti haṭṭhatuṭṭho uṭṭhāya sīhavijambhitaṃ vijambhitvā kesarabhāraṃ vidhunitvā tikkhattuṃ sīhanādaṃ naditvā gocarāya pakkamati. Catutthajjhānaseyyā pana tathāgataseyyāti vuccati. Tāsu idha sīhaseyyā āgatā. Ayañhi tejussadairiyāpathattā uttamaseyyā nāma. Pāde pādanti dakkhiṇapāde vāmapādaṃ. Accādhāyāti atiādhāya īsakaṃ atikkamma ṭhapetvā, gopphakena hi gopphake, jāṇunā vā jāṇumhi saṅghaṭṭiyamāne abhiṇhaṃ vedanā uppajjati, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ na hoti, seyyā aphāsukā hoti. Yathā pana na saṅghaṭṭeti, evaṃ atikkamma ṭhapite vedanā nuppajjati, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, seyyā phāsukā hoti, tasmā evamāha.
425 关于‘于世间的贪欲’等内容,在《小象迹喻经》中有详细解说。显示巴利原文
425.Abhijjhaṃ loketiādi cūḷahatthipade vitthāritaṃ.
426 经文中所说‘比丘们,譬如……’等譬喻,在此明示。其中,‘借债’:指取来钱财作为生息的本钱。‘还清’:意为令那些债务完全断除,乃至不欠一分一毫,也就是全部清偿完毕。‘以此为因缘’:即以这‘无债一身轻’作为因缘。因为当一个人审察‘我已无债’时,便会获得强烈的欢悦,体验到强烈的喜悦。因此说:‘应得欢悦,应证喜悦。’显示巴利原文
426. Yā panāyaṃ seyyathāpi, bhikkhaveti upamā vuttā. Tattha iṇaṃ ādāyāti vaḍḍhiyā dhanaṃ gahetvā. Byantī kareyyāti vigatantāni kareyya. Yathā tesaṃ kākaṇikamattopi pariyanto nāma nāvasissati, evaṃ kareyya, sabbaso paṭiniyyāteyyāti attho. Tatonidānanti āṇaṇyanidānaṃ. So hi aṇaṇomhīti āvajjanto balavapāmojjaṃ labhati, balavasomanassamadhigacchati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘labhetha pāmojjaṃ, adhigaccheyya somanassa’’nti.
‘病’:因与自身不相应的感受生起,犹如锯子在切割四威仪般折磨,故称为‘病’。具此病者,称为‘有病’。他正被由此病所生之苦所折磨。‘重病’:即病得极重。‘不喜’:因被重病所覆,于诸事物全然不感乐趣。‘仅有余力’:即些微之力,身体中几乎无有气力之意。‘以此为因缘’:此处是以‘无病’为因缘。因为当审思‘我实无病’时,那两种(欢悦与喜悦)便得生起。因此说:‘应得欢悦,应证得喜悦’。‘财物无任何损耗’:指连一钱之财都未曾损失。‘以此为因缘’:此处是以‘解脱束缚’为因缘,其余所有相关段落的解说,都应依此理来连结理解。‘不自主’:指不能自主,不能随心所欲而行。‘他主’:指受他人主宰,行事须看他人脸色。‘不能随意去’:指心生‘欲往某处’之念,且已生起身行之欲,却无法动身前往。‘奴役’:指身为奴隶之状态。‘自由’:指成为独立自主、拥有自身权利之人。‘以此为因缘’:此处是以‘获得自由’为因缘。‘沙漠旷野的长显示巴利原文
Visabhāgavedanuppattiyā kakaceneva catuiriyāpathaṃ chindanto ābādhatīti ābādho, svāssa atthīti ābādhiko. Taṃsamuṭṭhānena dukkhena dukkhito. Adhimattagilānoti bāḷhagilāno. Nacchādeyyāti adhimattabyādhiparetatāya na rucceyya. Balamattāti balameva, balañcassa kāye na bhaveyyāti attho. Tatonidānanti ārogyanidānaṃ, tassa hi arogomhīti āvajjayato tadubhayaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘labhetha pāmojjaṃ, adhigaccheyya somanassa’’nti. Nacassa kiñci bhogānaṃ vayoti kākaṇikamattampi bhogānaṃ vayo na bhaveyya. Tatonidānanti bandhanāmokkhanidānaṃ, sesaṃ vuttanayeneva sabbapadesu yojetabbaṃ. Anattādhīnoti na attani adhīno, attano ruciyā kiñci kātuṃ na labhati. Parādhīnoti paresu adhīno, parasseva ruciyā pavattati. Na yena kāmaṃ gamoti yena disābhāgenassa kāmo hoti. Icchā uppajjati gamanāya, tena gantuṃ na labhati. Dāsabyāti dāsabhāvā. Bhujissoti attano santako . Tatonidānanti bhujissanidānaṃ. Kantāraddhānamagganti kantāraṃ addhānamaggaṃ, nirudakaṃ dīghamagganti attho. Tatonidānanti khemantabhūminidānaṃ.
于‘此五盖未被断除’一句中,世尊将未断除的欲欲盖示现为如同债务,而将其余诸盖分别示现为如同疾病等。其间的相似之处在于:譬如有人借了他人钱财,挥霍殆尽,当被那些人催索‘还钱’、被恶语相向、被捆绑、被打时,他完全无力反抗,一切唯有忍受。他之所以要忍受,便是因为那笔债。同样,若对某个对象生起欲欲、心生染着,以渴爱执取那事物,那么当被那人辱骂、捆绑、殴打时,也同样都会忍受。他之所以要忍受,便是因为心中有那欲欲,如同那些被家主杀害的妇女一样。因此,应将欲欲视同债务。显示巴利原文
Ime pañca nīvaraṇe appahīneti ettha bhagavā appahīnaṃ kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ iṇasadisaṃ, sesāni rogādisadisāni katvā dasseti. Tatrāyaṃ sadisatā – yo hi paresaṃ iṇaṃ gahetvā vināseti. So tehi iṇaṃ dehīti vuccamānopi pharusaṃ vuccamānopi bajjhamānopi pahariyamānopi kiñci paṭibāhituṃ na sakkoti, sabbaṃ titikkhati, titikkhakāraṇañhissa taṃ iṇaṃ hoti. Evamevaṃ yo yamhi kāmacchandena rajjati, taṇhāgaṇena taṃ vatthuṃ gaṇhāti, so tena pharusaṃ vuccamānopi bajjhamānopi pahariyamānopi sabbaṃ titikkhati. Titikkhakāraṇañhissa so kāmacchando hoti gharasāmikehi vadhīyamānānaṃ itthīnaṃ viyāti. Evaṃ iṇaṃ viya kāmacchando daṭṭhabbo.
又如同一个患了胆病的人,即使给他蜜和糖等物,也因病势所困,尝不出其中滋味,只是一边吐出,一边说着‘苦啊,苦啊!’。同样,一个心怀嗔恚的人,即使关心他利益的亲教师与戒师稍加劝诫,他也听不进去,反而说出‘你们实在是在逼迫我’等语,而后便还俗离去。正如那人因胆病而尝不到蜜糖的滋味,这位嗔怒之人也因嗔恚之病,尝不到禅那之乐等法的滋味。因此,应将嗔恚视同疾病。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana pittarogāturo madhusakkarādīsupi dinnesu pittarogāturatāya tesaṃ rasaṃ na vindati, tittakaṃ tittakanti uggiratiyeva. Evamevaṃ byāpannacitto hitakāmehi ācariyupajjhāyehi appamattakampi ovadīyamāno ovādaṃ na gaṇhāti, ‘‘ati viya me tumhe upaddavethā’’tiādīni vatvā vibbhamati. Pittarogāturatāya so puriso madhusakkarādirasaṃ viya, kodhāturatāya jhānasukhādibhedaṃ sāsanarasaṃ na vindatīti. Evaṃ rogo viya byāpādo daṭṭhabbo.
又如一个人在节庆之日被关在牢房里,他既看不到庆典的开头,也看不到中间和结尾。第二天被释放后,即便听到别人说‘啊,昨天的庆典真让人欢喜,啊,那舞蹈,啊,那歌声……’,他也无法接上半句话。为什么呢?因为他根本没有亲身经历那庆典。同样,一个被昏沉睡眠所征服的比丘,即使正举行着充满种种法义的闻法,他对法会的开头、中间和结尾也一无所知。闻法结束后,就算听到有人赞叹‘啊,那场闻法,啊,那个道理,啊,那个譬喻……’,他也完全无言以对。为什么呢?因为他被昏沉睡眠所制,根本未曾真实经历说法。因此,应将昏沉睡眠视如牢狱。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana nakkhattadivase bandhanāgāre baddho puriso nakkhattassa neva ādiṃ, na majjhaṃ, na pariyosānaṃ passati. So dutiyadivase mutto, ‘‘aho hiyyo nakkhattaṃ manāpaṃ, aho naccaṃ, aho gīta’’ntiādīni sutvāpi paṭivacanaṃ na deti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Nakkhattassa ananubhūtattā. Evamevaṃ thinamiddhābhibhūto bhikkhu vicittanayepi dhammassavane pavattamāne neva tassa ādiṃ, na majjhaṃ, na pariyosānaṃ jānāti. So uṭṭhite dhammassavane, ‘‘aho dhammassavanaṃ, aho kāraṇaṃ, aho upamā’’ti dhammassavanassa vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇamānānaṃ sutvāpi paṭivacanaṃ na deti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Thinamiddhavasena dhammakathāya ananubhūtattāti. Evaṃ bandhanāgāraṃ viya thinamiddhaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
又如一个正在尽情享受节庆的奴隶,当有人对他说:‘有件紧急的事要做,你马上去那边,若是不去,我就砍断你的手脚,或割掉你的耳鼻!’他便立刻跑开,根本来不及体验庆典的始末。为什么呢?因为他隶属于人,身不由己。同样,一个不通达律藏的比丘,纵使为求远离而前往山林,只要对如法的肉食等生起不如法的念头,就必须放下远离,到持律者那里清净戒律。他无法享受远离之乐。为什么呢?因为他被掉举与悔恨所征服。因此,应将掉举与悔恨视如奴仆的身份。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana nakkhattaṃ kīḷantopi dāso, ‘‘idaṃ nāma accāyikaṃ karaṇīyaṃ atthi, sīghaṃ, tattha gaccha, no ce gacchasi, hatthapādaṃ vā te chindāmi kaṇṇanāsaṃ vā’’ti vutto sīghaṃ gacchatiyeva, nakkhattassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ anubhavituṃ na labhati. Kasmā? Parādhīnatāya. Evamevaṃ vinaye appakataññunā vivekatthāya araññaṃ paviṭṭhenāpi kismiñcideva antamaso kappiyamaṃsepi akappiyamaṃsasaññāya uppannāya vivekaṃ pahāya sīlavisodhanatthaṃ vinayadharassa santike gantabbaṃ hoti. Vivekasukhaṃ anubhavituṃ na labhati. Kasmā? Uddhaccakukkuccābhibhūtatāyāti, evaṃ dāsabyaṃ viya uddhaccakukkuccaṃ daṭṭabbaṃ.
又如一人行于旷野远路,见到人们被强盗洗劫或打死的地方,此时即便听到木杖敲击声或鸟叫声,他都会疑惧:‘是否强盗来了?’一直处在猜疑与紧张中,向前走、停下来、又往回走,走回头路比前进的路还多。他历经艰辛,或许能抵达安稳之地,或许不能。同样,一个对八事生起疑惑的人,便会沿着‘真有佛吗?没有佛吗?’这样的方式犹豫不定,无法以信心决断、如实把握。既然无法把握,便不能证得道果。犹如在旷野远路上,反复猜疑‘有强盗、没有强盗’,徘徊不安、犹豫不定,心生惊悚,障碍他抵达安稳之地;同样,疑也让人沿着‘真有佛吗?没有佛吗?’这样的方式反复徘徊、不安、犹豫,心生惊悚,障碍到达圣者的境地。因此,应将疑视如旷野之远途。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana kantāraddhānamaggapaṭipanno puriso corehi manussānaṃ viluttokāsaṃ pahatokāsañca disvā daṇḍakasaddenapi sakuṇasaddenapi corā āgatāti ussaṅkitaparisaṅkito hoti, gacchatipi, tiṭṭhatipi, nivattatipi, gataṭṭhānato āgataṭṭhānameva bahutaraṃ hoti. So kicchena kasirena khemantabhūmiṃ pāpuṇāti vā, na vā pāpuṇāti. Evamevaṃ yassa aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu vicikicchā uppannā hoti. So ‘‘buddho nu kho, na nu kho buddho’’tiādinā nayena vicikicchanto adhimuccitvā saddhāya gaṇhituṃ na sakkoti. Asakkonto maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā na pāpuṇātīti yathā kantāraddhānamagge ‘‘corā atthi natthī’’ti punappunaṃ āsappanaparisappanaṃ apariyogāhanaṃ chambhitatta cittassa uppādento khemantapattiyā antarāyaṃ karoti, evaṃ vicikicchāpi ‘‘buddho nu kho na buddho’’tiādinā nayena punappunaṃ āsappanaparisappanaṃ apariyogāhanaṃ chambhitattaṃ cittassa uppādayamānā ariyabhūmippattiyā antarāyaṃ karotīti kantāraddhānamaggo viya daṭṭhabbā.
在这里,世尊将已断除的欲贪盖喻为无债,将其余诸盖分别喻为无病等。其中相似之处如下:好比有人借了钱去经营事业,待事业成功后,他想:‘这债务确实是障碍的根源。’于是连同利息还清了本金,并将借据销毁。从那时起,再也不会有使者来催债或送来催债信;即便再见到债主,他若愿意便从座起身,不愿意则安坐不动。何以故?因为他与那些人已毫无牵连、不再粘着。同样地,比丘思惟:‘这名为欲贪者,正是障碍的根源。’便依照《念处经》中所说,修习六法,断除了欲贪盖。如此断除欲贪之后,他恰如脱离债务的人见到债主,无惧无惊。同样地,他对于外在事物也无贪着、无系缚;纵使见到天界的美色,烦恼亦不现起。因此,世尊说断除欲贪如同‘无债’。显示巴利原文
Idāni seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, āṇaṇyanti ettha bhagavā pahīnakāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ āṇaṇyasadisaṃ, sesāni ārogyādisadisāni katvā dasseti. Tatrāyaṃ sadisatā – yathā hi puriso iṇaṃ ādāya kammante payojetvā samiddhakammanto, ‘‘idaṃ iṇaṃ nāma palibodhamūla’’nti cintetvā savaḍḍhikaṃ iṇaṃ niyyātetvā paṇṇaṃ phālāpeyya. Athassa tato paṭṭhāya neva koci dūtaṃ peseti, na paṇṇaṃ, so iṇasāmike disvāpi sace icchati, āsanā uṭṭhahati, no ce, na uṭṭhahati. Kasmā? Tehi saddhiṃ nillepatāya alaggatāya. Evameva bhikkhu, ‘‘ayaṃ kāmacchando nāma palibodhamūla’’nti satipaṭṭhāne vuttanayeneva cha dhamme bhāvetvā kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ pajahati. Tassevaṃ pahīnakāmacchandassa yathā iṇamuttassa purisassa iṇasāmike disvā neva bhayaṃ na chambhitattaṃ hoti. Evameva paravatthumhi neva saṅgo na bandho hoti. Dibbānipi rūpāni passato kileso na samudācarati. Tasmā bhagavā āṇaṇyamiva kāmacchandappahānamāha.
又好比那个患胆病的人,经过药物治疗使病平息之后,从此便能尝到蜜与糖的滋味。同样地,比丘思惟:‘这名为瞋恚者,真是大害。’便修习六法,断除了瞋恚盖。这样断除瞋恚之后,他恰如摆脱了胆病的人,欢欢喜喜地享用蜜、糖等甜美之物。同样地,当别人教授他学处、行仪等种种规范时,他也欢喜顶戴、乐意修学。因此,世尊说断除瞋恚如同‘无病’。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana so pittarogāturo puriso bhesajjakiriyāya taṃ rogaṃ vūpasametvā tato paṭṭhāya madhusakkarādīnaṃ rasaṃ vindati. Evamevaṃ bhikkhu, ‘‘ayaṃ byāpādo nāma anatthakārako’’ti cha dhamme bhāvetvā byāpādanīvaraṇaṃ pajahati. So evaṃ pahīnabyāpādo yathā pittarogavimutto puriso madhusakkarādīni madhurāni sampiyāyamāno paṭisevati. Evamevaṃ ācārapaṇṇattiādīni sikkhāpiyamāno sirasā sampaṭicchitvā sampiyāyamāno sikkhati. Tasmā bhagavā ārogyamiva byāpādappahānamāha.
又好比那个在节庆之日被关入牢房的人,到了另一个节庆日,他心想:‘从前我因放逸之过而被捆绑,没能受用那个庆典,如今我切不可再放逸。’于是他不令怨敌得到机会,这样不放逸地度过庆典后,便发出赞叹:‘啊,这庆典!啊,这庆典!’同样地,比丘思惟:‘这名为昏沉睡眠者,真是大害!’便修习六法,断除了昏沉睡眠盖。如此断除昏沉睡眠后,他恰似从牢狱获释之人,能完整经历七日庆典的始、中、终。同样地,比丘得以完整经历‘法之庆典’的始、中、终,与无碍解俱证阿拉汉果。因此,世尊说断除昏沉睡眠如同‘从牢狱获释’。显示巴利原文
Yathā so nakkhattadivase bandhanāgāraṃ pavesito puriso aparasmiṃ nakkhattadivase, ‘‘pubbepi ahaṃ pamādadosena baddho taṃ nakkhattaṃ nānubhavāmi, idāni appamatto bhavissāmī’’ti yathāssa paccatthikā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Evaṃ appamatto hutvā nakkhattaṃ anubhavitvā – ‘‘aho nakkhattaṃ aho nakkhatta’’nti udānaṃ udānesi. Evameva bhikkhu, ‘‘idaṃ thinamiddhaṃ nāma mahāanatthakara’’nti cha dhamme bhāvetvā thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṃ pajahati. So evaṃ pahīnathinamiddho yathā bandhanā mutto puriso sattāhampi nakkhattassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ anubhavati. Evamevaṃ bhikkhu dhammanakkhattassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ anubhavanto saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā bhagavā bandhanā mokkhamiva thinamiddhappahānamāha.
犹如奴隶依靠某位朋友,向主人付钱赎身,成为自由人,从此以后,想做什么便能做什么。同样,比丘了知:“这掉举与追悔实为极大祸害”,修习六法,断除掉举与追悔。他如此断除掉举与追悔之后,便如自由人一般,想做什么就能做,无人能以强力阻止他。同样,比丘随心所欲地修行出离之道,掉举与追悔也无法以强力阻止他。因此,世尊将断除掉举与追悔譬喻为自由之人。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana dāso kañcideva mittaṃ upanissāya sāmikānaṃ dhanaṃ datvā attānaṃ bhujissaṃ katvā tato paṭṭhāya yaṃ icchati, taṃ kareyya. Evameva bhikkhu, ‘‘idaṃ uddhaccakukkuccaṃ nāma mahāanatthakara’’nti cha dhamme bhāvetvā uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pajahati. So evaṃ pahīnuddhaccakukkucco yathā bhujisso puriso yaṃ icchati, taṃ karoti. Na taṃ koci balakkārena tato nivatteti. Evamevaṃ bhikkhu yathāsukhaṃ nekkhammapaṭipadaṃ paṭipajjati, na naṃ uddhaccakukkuccaṃ balakkārena tato nivatteti. Tasmā bhagavā bhujissaṃ viya uddhaccakukkuccappahānamāha.
譬如,一个强壮的男子手持坚实的棍杖,装备齐全,有随从相伴,踏上荒漠。强盗远远望见他便逃走了。他平安走出那片荒漠,抵达安稳之地,欢喜愉悦。同样,比丘了知:“这疑实为祸害”,修习六法,断除疑。他如此断除了疑之后,便如同那位强壮、装备齐全、有随从的男子,无所畏惧,平安抵达安稳之地。同样,比丘度过恶行的荒漠,到达最安稳之地——不死的涅槃。因此,世尊将断除疑譬喻为安稳之地。显示巴利原文
Yathā balavā puriso hatthasāraṃ gahetvā sajjāvudho saparivāro kantāraṃ paṭipajjeyya. Taṃ corā dūratova disvā palāyeyyuṃ. So sotthinā taṃ kantāraṃ nittharitvā khemantaṃ patto haṭṭhatuṭṭho assa. Evamevaṃ bhikkhu, ‘‘ayaṃ vicikicchā nāma anatthakārikā’’ti cha dhamme bhāvetvā vicikicchaṃ pajahati. So evaṃ pahīnavicikiccho yathā balavā sajjāvudho saparivāro puriso nibbhayo core tiṇaṃ viya agaṇetvā sotthinā nikkhamitvā khemantabhūmiṃ pāpuṇāti. Evamevaṃ duccaritakantāraṃ nittharitvā paramakhemantabhūmiṃ amataṃ nibbānaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā bhagavā khemantabhūmiṃ viya vicikicchāpahānamāha.
427 “其身”:指这个业所生之身。“灌注”:意为湿润、滋润,让喜乐遍满一切处。“周遍灌注”:意为从周围灌注。“充满”:意为如同风充满皮囊那样充满。“遍满”:意为周遍接触。“此比丘之全身”:指这位比丘身体的所有部分。在业所生身的相续中,凡是连带皮肤、肌肉、血液的极微细之处,没有一处不被初禅的喜乐所触及。“善巧者”:指技术娴熟、有能力的沐浴粉制作者,能制作、调和、揉合沐浴粉。“铜盆”:指任何金属制成的器皿。若为陶器则不坚固,揉合时容易碎裂,故不以此为喻。“一再洒水”:意为反复洒水。“揉合”:意为用左手持铜盆,右手取适量之水,一遍遍洒水,揉捏成团。“为水所润”:意为被水的湿润所渗透。“为水所遍含”:意为被水的湿润所包围。“内外俱”:意为内部和外部所有部分,即整团都被水的湿润所触及。“而不滴水”:意为水不会滴落,可以用两根或三根手指捏起它,甚至可以折叠也不会滴水。显示巴利原文
427.Imameva kāyanti imaṃ karajakāyaṃ. Abhisandetīti temeti sneheti, sabbattha pavattapītisukhaṃ karoti. Parisandetīti samantato sandeti. Paripūretīti vāyunā bhastaṃ viya pūreti. Parippharatīti samantato phusati . Sabbāvato kāyassāti assa bhikkhuno sabbakoṭṭhāsavato kāyassa. Kiñci upādinnakasantatipavattiṭṭhāne chavimaṃsalohitānugataṃ aṇumattampi ṭhānaṃ paṭhamajjhānasukhena aphuṭṭhaṃ nāma na hoti. Dakkhoti cheko paṭibalo nhānīyacuṇṇāni kātuñceva yojetuñca sannetuñca. Kaṃsathāleti yena kenaci lohena katabhājane. Mattikabhājanaṃ pana thiraṃ na hoti, sannentassa bhijjati, tasmā taṃ na dasseti. Paripphosakaṃ paripphosakanti siñcitvā siñcitvā. Sanneyyāti vāmahatthena kaṃsathālaṃ gahetvā dakkhiṇena hatthena pamāṇayuttaṃ udakaṃ siñcitvā siñcitvā parimaddanto piṇḍaṃ kareyya. Snehānugatāti udakasinehena anugatā. Snehaparetāti udakasinehena parigatā. Santarabāhirāti saddhiṃ antopadesena ceva bahipadesena ca, sabbatthakameva udakasinehena phuṭāti attho. Na ca pagghariṇīti na bindu bindu udakaṃ paggharati, sakkā hoti hatthenapi dvīhipi tīhipi aṅgulīhi gahetuṃ ovaṭṭikampi kātunti attho.
428 在第二禅那乐的譬喻中:“涌出之水”,是指从内部涌出的水,不是从下方喷涌而上升的水,而是只在内部涌出的水。“入口”,即水流进入的通道。“天”,指云。“时时”,指应时,即每半月或每十天。“大雨”,指降雨。“不降”,指不进入,也就是不下雨。清凉的水流涌出,是指清凉之水涌出后充满彼池。因为如果是自下方喷涌而上升的水,则一次次涌升破裂,会搅浑池水;从四方流入的水,会带着枯叶、草、木棍等杂物,也会搅浑池水;雨水则因雨柱落下时所击起的泡沫,同样会搅浑池水。唯有那种寂静安住、如同由神通化现而生起的水,才能遍触一切而无有“此处未及”之说,所以没有不被水触及之处。在此譬喻中,水池如同业生之身,水如同第二禅那的喜乐。其余的含义,可依前面所说的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
428. Dutiyajjhānasukhaupamāyaṃ ubbhitodakoti ubbhinnaudako, na heṭṭhā ubbhijjitvā uggacchanaudako, antoyeva pana ubbhijjanaudakoti attho. Āyamukhanti āgamanamaggo. Devoti megho. Kālenakālanti kāle kāle, anvaddhamāsaṃ vā anudasāhaṃ vāti attho. Dhāranti vuṭṭhiṃ. Nānuppaveccheyyāti na paveseyya, na vasseyyāti attho. Sītā vāridhārā ubbhijjitvāti sītaṃ vāri taṃ udakarahadaṃ pūrayamānaṃ ubbhijjitvā. Heṭṭhā uggacchanaudakañhi uggantvā uggantvā bhijjantaṃ udakaṃ khobheti. Catūhi disāhi pavisanaudakaṃ purāṇapaṇṇatiṇakaṭṭhadaṇḍakādīhi udakaṃ khobheti. Vuṭṭhiudakaṃ dhārānipātapupphuḷakehi udakaṃ khobheti. Sannisinnameva pana hutvā iddhinimmitamiva uppajjamānaṃ udakaṃ imaṃ padesaṃ pharati, imaṃ padesaṃ na pharatīti natthi. Tena aphuṭokāso nāma na hotīti. Tattha rahado viya karajakāyo, udakaṃ viya dutiyajjhānasukhaṃ. Sesaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
429 在第三禅那乐的譬喻中,“于中有青莲”故称“青莲池”。其余两组词(红莲池、白莲池)也依此理类推。此处,无论白、红、蓝哪一类,凡是青莲皆属于“青莲”;花瓣不足一百片的称为白莲,满一百片的称为红莲。或者,不拘泥于花瓣数量的规则,也有将白莲判为红莲、红莲判为白莲的情况,这是此处的判定。“随水而长”,指没有长出水面。“在水面下生长”,指完全没入水面以下而生长,意思是在下方成长。其余的含义,依前面所说的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
429. Tatiyajjhānasukhaupamāyaṃ uppalāni ettha santīti uppalinī. Sesapadadvayesupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca setarattanīlesu yaṃkiñci uppalaṃ uppalameva, ūnakasatapattaṃ puṇḍarīkaṃ, satapattaṃ padumaṃ. Pattaniyamaṃ vā vināpi setaṃ padumaṃ, rattaṃ puṇḍarīkanti ayamettha vinicchayo. Udakānuggatānīti udakato na uggatāni. Antonimuggaposīnīti udakatalassa anto nimuggāniyeva hutvā posīni, vaḍḍhīnīti attho. Sesaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
430 在第四禅那乐的譬喻中,“以清净、洁白之心”一段:因无杂染之义而名为“清净”,因光辉之义而名为“洁白”,应当如此理解。“以白衣”是用来说明遍满之势。因为有垢秽的衣服不能生起遍满之势,只有刚刚洗净的清净衣服,才会有强力的遍满之势。在此譬喻中,衣服如同业生之身,遍满之势如同第四禅那之乐。恰如善沐浴之人,以清净白衣从头覆盖而坐,身体之暖势遍及整件衣服,无任何一处未被触及。同样,比丘的业生之身也无任何一处不被第四禅那之乐所遍及,应如此理解此处的意义。或者,第四禅那心本身如同衣服,由它生起的色身如同遍满之势。就像有时身体虽未直接触碰白衣,但由于其所生的暖势,身体各部分都被触及;同样,由第四禅那所生的微细色身,遍满比丘业生之身的一切处,应如此理解此处的意义。显示巴利原文
430. Catutthajjhānasukhaupamāyaṃ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātenāti ettha nirupakkilesaṭṭhena parisuddhaṃ. Pabhassaraṭṭhena pariyodātaṃ veditabbaṃ. Odātena vatthenāti idaṃ utupharaṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiliṭṭhavatthena hi utupharaṇaṃ na hoti, taṅkhaṇadhotaparisuddhena utupharaṇaṃ balavaṃ hoti. Imissā hi upamāya vatthaṃ viya karajakāyo. Utupharaṇaṃ viya catutthajjhānasukhaṃ. Tasmā yathā sunhātassa purisassa parisuddhaṃ vatthaṃ sasīsaṃ pārupitvā nisinnassa sarīrato utu sabbameva vatthaṃ pharati, na koci vatthassa aphuṭokāso hoti. Evaṃ catutthajjhānasukhena bhikkhuno karajakāyassa na koci okāso aphuṭo hotīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Catutthajjhānacittameva vā vatthaṃ viya, taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpaṃ utupharaṇaṃ viya. Yathā hi katthaci odātavatthe kāyaṃ apphusantepi taṃsamuṭṭhānena utunā sabbatthakameva kāyo phuṭṭho hoti. Evaṃ catutthajjhānasamuṭṭhitena sukhumarūpena sabbatthakameva bhikkhuno karajakāyo phuṭo hotīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
431 在宿命智的譬喻中,「当日所作之事明显」:这里仅取用他当日所到的三个村落为喻。其中,那位去了三个村落的人,应理解为证得宿命智的人;三个村落,应理解为三有。那人当日在三个村落里所做的一切事全部显现,正如比丘将心导向宿命而坐定时,于三有中所造的一切事全部显现,应如此看待。显示巴利原文
431. Pubbenivāsañāṇaupamāyaṃ taṃdivasaṃ katakiriyā pākaṭā hotīti taṃdivasaṃ gatagāmattayameva gahitaṃ. Tattha gāmattayaṃ gatapuriso viya pubbenivāsañāṇalābhī daṭṭhabbo. Tayo gāmā viya tayo bhavā daṭṭhabbā. Tassa purisassa tīsu gāmesu taṃdivasaṃ katakiriyāya āvibhāvo viya pubbenivāsāya cittaṃ abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno tīsu bhavesu katakiriyāya āvibhāvo daṭṭhabbo.
432 在天眼智的譬喻中:「二家」指两间房屋。「有门」指正面有门相对。「经行来往」指前后往返行走。「遍游」指到处游走,也可理解为从这家出来进入那家,或从那家出来进入这家。在此譬喻中,两间有门的房屋,如同死与结生;有眼睛的人,如同证得天眼智的人。当有眼睛的人站在两间房屋之间,清楚看见人们从中出入时,便如证得天眼者放大光明而作观察,清楚看见众生死亡与转生之时。那么,这些景象是对智慧自身明显,还是对补特伽罗明显?是对智慧自身明显。然而,正因为对智慧明显,所以对补特伽罗也同样明显。显示巴利原文
432. Dibbacakkhuupamāyaṃ dve agārāti dve gharā. Sadvārāti sammukhadvārā. Anucaṅkamanteti aparāparaṃ sañcarante. Anuvicaranteti ito cito ca vicarante, ito pana gehā nikkhamitvā etaṃ gehaṃ, etasmā vā nikkhamitvā imaṃ gehaṃ pavisanavasenapi daṭṭhabbā. Tattha dve agārā sadvārā viya cutipaṭisandhiyo, cakkhumā puriso viya dibbacakkhuñāṇalābhī, cakkhumato purisassa dvinnaṃ gehānaṃ antare ṭhatvā passato dve agāre pavisanakanikkhamanakapurisānaṃ pākaṭakālo viya dibbacakkhulābhino ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā olokentassa cavanakaupapajjanakasattānaṃ pākaṭakālo. Kiṃ pana te ñāṇassa pākaṭā, puggalassāti? Ñāṇassa. Tassa pākaṭattā pana puggalassa pākaṭāyevāti.
433 在漏尽智的譬喻中,「于山顶」指在山顶上。「不浊」即无淤泥。「贝螺」指贝类和螺类。「沙砾」指沙和碎石。「鱼群」指聚集的鱼群。在「或住或游」这一句中,沙砾只是安住,而贝螺与鱼群则有时游动、有时安住。不过,就如一群牛有的站、有的坐、有的卧,却说“这些牛在移动”,是以其中移动的牛为代表,把其余者也称为移动。同样,以始终安住的沙砾为代表,其余两者也可称为“住”;以其余两者的移动为代表,沙砾也可称为“游”。在这个譬喻中,有眼者立于岸边观看,贝螺等清晰可见的当下,便好比一位比丘为了断尽诸漏而提起心、坐着观察,四圣谛清晰显现的当下。显示巴利原文
433. Āsavakkhayañāṇaupamāyaṃ pabbatasaṅkhepeti pabbatamatthake. Anāviloti nikkaddamo. Sippiyo ca sambukā ca sippisambukaṃ. Sakkharā ca kathalā ca sakkharakathalaṃ. Macchānaṃ gumbā ghaṭāti macchagumbaṃ. Tiṭṭhantampi carantampīti ettha sakkharakathalaṃ tiṭṭhatiyeva, itarāni carantipi tiṭṭhantipi. Yathā pana antarantarā ṭhitāsupi nisinnāsupi vijjamānāsupi, ‘‘etā gāvo carantī’’ti carantiyo upādāya itarāpi carantīti vuccanti. Evaṃ tiṭṭhantameva sakkharakathalaṃ upādāya itarampi dvayaṃ tiṭṭhantanti vuttaṃ. Itarañca dvayaṃ carantaṃ upādāya sakkharakathalampi carantanti vuttaṃ. Tattha cakkhumato purisassa tīre ṭhatvā passato sippisambukādīnaṃ vibhūtakālo viya āsavānaṃ khayāya cittaṃ nīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno catunnaṃ saccānaṃ vibhūtakālo daṭṭhabbo.
434 现在,从特征与功德两方面,以七种方式为漏尽者安立名称,于是说道:“诸比丘,这位比丘称为沙门”等等。其中,“诸比丘,如此,比丘成为沙门”等的意思是:诸比丘,如此,因平息了恶,故成为沙门;因排除了恶,故成为婆罗门;因洗净了烦恼,故成为洗净者,即涤除烦恼之意;因以四道智为体的智慧了知不善法,故成为极智者,即已了知之意,因此说“这些已被他完全了知”等;因烦恼已流出、无残留,故成为闻者,即已流出、已除去之意;因远离烦恼,故成为圣者,即已杀灭烦恼之意;因那些烦恼已远远离去,故成为应供,即已远离安住之意。其余各处文义明了。显示巴利原文
434. Idāni sattahākārehi saliṅgato saguṇato khīṇāsavassa nāmaṃ gaṇhanto, ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu samaṇo itipītiādimāha. Tattha evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu samaṇohotītiādīsu, bhikkhave, evaṃ bhikkhu samitapāpattā samaṇo hoti. Bāhitapāpattā brāhmaṇo hoti. Nhātakilesattā nhātako hoti, dhotakilesattāti attho. Catumaggañāṇasaṅkhātehi vedehi akusaladhammānaṃ gatattā vedagū hoti, viditattāti attho. Teneva viditāssa hontītiādimāha. Kilesānaṃ sutattā sottiyo hoti, nissutattā apahatattāti attho. Kilesānaṃ ārakattā ariyo hoti, hatattāti attho. Tehi ārakattā arahaṃ hoti, dūrībhūtattāti attho. Sesaṃ sabattha pākaṭamevāti.
10. 小《马邑经》解释显示巴利原文
10. Cūḷaassapurasuttavaṇṇanā
435 “如是我闻”——这是《小马邑经》。此经的说法因缘与前篇相同。“沙门正行”,就是与沙门相称、随顺沙门的修行。显示巴利原文
435.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷaassapurasuttaṃ. Tassa desanākāraṇaṃ purimasadisameva. Samaṇasāmīcippaṭipadāti samaṇānaṃ anucchavikā samaṇānaṃ anulomappaṭipadā.
436 关于“沙门垢”等词:这些法生起时,令沙门变得污秽、为垢秽所染,因此称为“沙门垢”。由于这些,沙门被染污、被徹底染污,因此称为“沙门过恶”。这些法生起后,令沙门变得粗劣、无光泽、憔悴,因此称为“沙门渣滓”。“导向苦处的因”,意思是导致投生恶趣的原因。“能感得恶趣受”,意思是成为在恶趣中感受果报的缘。所谓“铁箭”:人们用一块铁反复摩擦另一块锐利的铁,将磨出的铁屑与肉混合,喂食鹤鸟。那些鸟因无法排泄而死,若未死,便被打杀。之后剖开鸟腹,用水冲洗取出铁屑,再与肉混合喂给其他鸟。如此反复喂食七次,最后以所得铁屑制成武器。善巧的铁匠收取高额工费来打造此武器。由于是从死鸟中所得,故称“铁箭”,极为锋利。“饮水磨利”的意思是,制作时使其饮水,并在石上极精细地打磨。“用僧伽梨”指以丝绸制成的僧伽梨衣。“覆盖”即完全包住。“缠绕”即从四周全部缠裹起来。显示巴利原文
436.Samaṇamalānantiādīsu ete dhammā uppajjamānā samaṇe maline karonti malaggahite, tasmā ‘‘samaṇamalā’’ti vuccanti. Etehi samaṇā dussanti, padussanti, tasmā samaṇadosāti vuccanti. Ete uppajjitvā samaṇe kasaṭe niroje karonti milāpenti, tasmā samaṇakasaṭāti vuccanti. Āpāyikānaṃ ṭhānānanti apāye nibbattāpakānaṃ kāraṇānaṃ. Duggativedaniyānanti duggatiyaṃ vipākavedanāya paccayānaṃ. Matajaṃ nāmāti manussā tikhiṇaṃ ayaṃ ayena sughaṃsitvā taṃ ayacuṇṇaṃ maṃsena saddhiṃ madditvā koñcasakuṇe khādāpenti. Te uccāraṃ kātuṃ asakkontā maranti. No ce maranti, paharitvā mārenti. Atha tesaṃ kucchiṃ phāletvā naṃ udakena dhovitvā cuṇṇaṃ gahetvā maṃsena saddhiṃ madditvā puna khādāpentīti evaṃ satta vāre khādāpetvā gahitena ayacuṇṇena āvudhaṃ karonti. Susikkhitā ca naṃ ayakārā bahuhatthakammamūlaṃ labhitvā karonti. Taṃ matasakuṇato jātattā ‘‘mataja’’nti vuccati, atitikhiṇaṃ hoti. Pītanisitanti udakapītañceva silāya ca sunighaṃsitaṃ. Saṅghāṭiyāti kosiyā. Sampārutanti pariyonaddhaṃ. Sampaliveṭhitanti samantato veṭhitaṃ.
437 「尘垢行者」是指持守尘垢的人。「水浴行者」是指一天三次入水沐浴的人。「树下住者」是指以树下为住处的人。「露地住者」是指以露天为住处的人。「常立行者」是指一直保持站立的人。「轮食行者」是指按月或半月才进食一次的人。所有这些,都只在外道学说中才这么说。因为在佛陀的教法中,穿着袈裟的比丘并不会被称为“僧伽帝者”;像持守尘垢这类行持,在佛教中根本不存在。属于佛语的,只会被称为佛语,不会叫做咒语。然而,“树下住者”、“露地住者”这些名称在佛教中虽然也有,但那也是外道典籍里的说法。「就在出生当天」的意思是:就在它出生的那一天,刚刚出生,就让它「成为僧伽帝者」,也就是给它穿上并披上僧伽帝衣。这种方法适用于一切相关情况。显示巴利原文
437.Rajojallikassāti rajojalladhārino. Udakorohakassāti divasassa tikkhattuṃ udakaṃ orohantassa. Rukkhamūlikassāti rukkhamūlavāsino. Abbhokāsikassāti abbhokāsavāsino. Ubbhaṭṭhakassāti uddhaṃ ṭhitakassa. Pariyāyabhattikassāti māsavārena vā aḍḍhamāsavārena vā bhuñjantassa. Sabbametaṃ bāhirasamayeneva kathitaṃ. Imasmiñhi sāsane cīvaradharo bhikkhu saṅghāṭikoti na vuccati. Rajojalladhāraṇādivatāni imasmiṃ sāsane natthiyeva. Buddhavacanassa buddhavacanameva nāmaṃ, na mantāti. Rukkhamūliko, abbhokāsikoti ettakaṃyeva pana labbhati. Tampi bāhirasamayeneva kathitaṃ. Jātamevananti taṃdivase jātamattaṃyeva naṃ. Saṅghāṭikaṃ kareyyunti saṅghāṭikaṃ vatthaṃ nivāsetvā ca pārupitvā ca saṅghāṭikaṃ kareyyuṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha.
438 「看见自己清净」:他看见自己在变得清净,但此时还远远不能说已经“是清净的”。「欢悦生起」:即心中生起一种满足的状态。「喜悦者」:会产生喜悦,这种喜悦能撼动整个身体。「意有喜者」:指与喜相应的补特伽罗的名身。「变得轻安」:指内心的躁动不安消失了。「感受乐」:感受身体之乐与内心之乐。「心得定」:由于出离之乐而感到快乐的人,他的心会变得安定,仿佛达到了安止定的状态。「他以慈俱行之心…」:前面那些被烦恼所驱使而展开的开示,就像从山上降下的雨水汇入河流一样,顺着法义的关联,自然导向了梵住的修习。在这里,所有相关的说明,都已在《清净道论》中详述。正如「诸比丘,譬如池塘」这句经文,在《大狮子吼经》中是把“道”比喻成池塘;而在这里,应理解为是把“教法”比喻成池塘。「由于诸漏灭尽而成为沙门」:因为一切烦恼都被止息了,所以他成为究竟义上的沙门。其余各处的内容,意义都很清晰。显示巴利原文
438.Visuddhamattānaṃ samanupassatīti attānaṃ visujjhantaṃ passati. Visuddhoti pana na tāva vattabbo. Pāmojjaṃ jāyatīti tuṭṭhākāro jāyati. Pamuditassa pītīti tuṭṭhassa sakalasarīraṃ khobhayamānā pīti jāyati. Pītimanassa kāyoti pītisampayuttassa puggalassa nāmakāyo. Passambhatīti vigatadaratho hoti. Sukhaṃ vedetīti kāyikampi cetasikampi sukhaṃ vediyati. Cittaṃ samādhiyatīti iminā nekkhammasukhena sukhitassa cittaṃ samādhiyati, appanāpattaṃ viya hoti. So mettāsahagatena cetasāti heṭṭhā kilesavasena āraddhā desanā pabbate vuṭṭhavuṭṭhi viya nadiṃ yathānusandhinā brahmavihārabhāvanaṃ otiṇṇā. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge vuttameva. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, pokkharaṇīti mahāsīhanādasutte maggo pokkharaṇiyā upamito, idha sāsanaṃ upamitanti veditabbaṃ. Āsavānaṃ khayā samaṇo hotīti sabbakilesānaṃ samitattā paramatthasamaṇo hotīti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.